HP LaserJet 2400 Printer series, 2410 User's manual

HP LaserJet 2400 Printer series, 2410 User's manual
HP LaserJet 2410/2420/2430
Software Technical Reference
HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers
Software Technical Reference
Copyright and license
Trademark credits
©2004 Copyright Hewlett-Packard
Development Company, L.P.
Adobe®, Adobe Photoshop®, Acrobat®,
PostScript®, and the Acrobat logo® are
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Reproduction, adaptation or translation
without prior written permission is
prohibited, except as allowed under the
copyright laws.
The information contained herein is subject
to change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and
services are set forth in the express
warranty statements accompanying such
products and services. Nothing herein
should be construed as constituting an
additional warranty. HP shall not be liable
for technical or editorial errors or omissions
contained herein.
Edition 1, 10/2004
The Bluetooth® trademarks are owned by
its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard
Company under license.
EnergyStar® and the Energy Star logo®
are US registered marks of the United
States Environmental Protection Agency.
HP-UX Release 10.20 and later and HPUX Release 11.00 and later (in both 32
and 64-bit configurations) on all HP 9000
computers are Open Group UNIX 95
branded products.
Linux is a U.S. registered trademark of
Linus Torvalds
Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows NT®
are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
Pentium® is a trademark or registered
trademark of Intel Corporation or its
subsidiaries in the United States and other
countries.
UNIX® is a registered trademark of The
Open Group.
Table of contents
1 Purpose and scope
Introduction..............................................................................................................................................1
HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers...........................................................................................2
Printing-system software CD...................................................................................................................4
Software features ...................................................................................................................4
Printing system and installer..................................................................................4
HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printing-system software CD
for Windows systems ...........................................................................4
Installer features....................................................................................6
HP LaserJet print drivers........................................................................................7
HP PCL 5e, PCL 6, and PS emulation drivers......................................8
Print-driver version numbers for Windows operating systems..............8
Macintosh and Macintosh-compatible printing system.........................9
Additional driver availability...................................................................9
Driver Autoconfiguration.......................................................................................10
Update Now..........................................................................................................10
HP Driver Preconfiguration..................................................................................10
HP LaserJet documentation.................................................................................................10
HP LaserJet 2400 Series User Guide .................................................................11
Hewlett Packard LaserJet 2410/2420/2430 series Printing System Install
Notes ...................................................................................................................12
HP Driver Preconfiguration User Guide...............................................................12
HP Embedded Web Server Guide.......................................................................13
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide......................................................................13
HP Device Installer Customization Wizard..........................................................13
Structure and availability of the software CD........................................................................................15
In-box file layout ...................................................................................................................15
HP LaserJet software CD, Windows partition .....................................................15
HP LaserJet software CD, Macintosh partition....................................................15
Availability and fulfillment......................................................................................................16
In-box CDs ..........................................................................................................16
Web deployment .................................................................................................21
Printing-system software ....................................................................21
Standalone drivers .............................................................................21
Other operating systems.....................................................................22
Software component availability .........................................................22
2 Software description
Introduction ...........................................................................................................................................23
iii
Supported operating systems ...............................................................................................................24
Technology background information.....................................................................................................25
Driver Configuration .............................................................................................................25
Bidirectional communication................................................................................25
Enterprise AutoConfiguration...............................................................................26
HP Driver Preconfiguration ..................................................................................................28
Lockable features ................................................................................................29
Continuous export ...............................................................................................29
HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check tool...............................................................................29
HP Printer Access Tool.........................................................................................................30
Euro character .....................................................................................................................30
HP Embedded Web Server and HP Toolbox ......................................................................31
HP Embedded Web Server .................................................................................................31
The HP EWS frame..............................................................................................32
Information tab.....................................................................................................32
Links to off-product solutions...............................................................................33
Device Status screen ..........................................................................................33
Configuration Page .............................................................................................34
Settings tab..........................................................................................................35
Configure device .................................................................................................36
Alerts....................................................................................................................37
Security................................................................................................................38
Networking tab ....................................................................................................39
Configuration section...........................................................................40
Security section ..................................................................................40
Diagnostics section ............................................................................41
Network settings .................................................................................41
HP Toolbox ..........................................................................................................................41
HP Toolbox requirements....................................................................................41
Installing HP Toolbox...........................................................................................42
Uninstalling HP Toolbox ......................................................................................42
To view the HP Toolbox ......................................................................................42
The HP Toolbox Frame .......................................................................................43
Top banner...........................................................................................................43
Status tab.............................................................................................................43
Troubleshooting tab ............................................................................................45
Print Quality Tools ..............................................................................45
Maintenance .......................................................................................46
Error Messages ..................................................................................46
Paper Jams ........................................................................................47
Supported Media ................................................................................48
Printer Pages ......................................................................................49
Alerts tab..............................................................................................................50
Documentation tab ..............................................................................................51
Linking to the HP Embedded Web Server...........................................................52
Other Links ..........................................................................................................53
HP Web Jetadmin.................................................................................................................54
Bluetooth...............................................................................................................................56
Remote firmware update .....................................................................................................56
Determining the current level of firmware ...........................................................56
iv
Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site........................................57
Remote firmware update by using FTP through a browser.................................57
Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network connection.............58
Windows operating systems................................................................58
Macintosh operating systems..............................................................59
Remote firmware update through a local Windows port .....................................59
Windows 98 or Windows Me...............................................................60
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or
Windows Server 2003 ........................................................................61
Remote firmware update through a Windows network .......................................61
Remote firmware update for UNIX systems .......................................................61
Remote firmware update by using Fetch (Mac OS 9.x only)...............................62
Remote firmware update by using the HP LaserJet Utility (Mac OS 9.x
only) .....................................................................................................................62
Remote firmware update by using the LPR command .......................................63
Remote firmware update through HP Web Jetadmin .........................................63
Printer messages during the firmware update.....................................................64
Troubleshooting a firmware update ....................................................................65
Printing print-ready documents from a command line .........................................................66
Print-ready file printing by using FTP through a browser....................................66
Print-ready file printing by using FTP on a direct network connection................66
Windows operating systems................................................................66
Macintosh operating systems..............................................................67
Print-ready printing by using a local Windows port..............................................68
Windows 98 or Windows Me...............................................................68
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or
Windows Server 2003 ........................................................................69
Print-ready file printing in a Windows network ....................................................69
Print-ready file printing in UNIX systems.............................................................69
Print-ready file printing by using Fetch (Mac OS 9.x only)..................................69
File printing by using the HP LaserJet Utility (Mac OS 9.x only) ........................70
Print-ready file printing by using the LPR command ..........................................70
Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems.....................................................71
Job stream output ...............................................................................................71
PJL/PJL Encoding................................................................................................72
Job tracking..........................................................................................................72
Connectivity .........................................................................................................73
Bidirectional communication ...............................................................................73
HP Driver Preconfiguration .................................................................................74
Bundle support.....................................................................................................74
Tray and paper assignment.................................................................................75
Installable options ...............................................................................................75
UI features ...........................................................................................................76
Help features .......................................................................................................76
Quick Sets ...........................................................................................................77
Paper Sizes..........................................................................................................77
Media Types ........................................................................................................77
Job storage ..........................................................................................................78
Print-quality and resolution..................................................................................79
Reordering Options..............................................................................................79
v
Resizing options...................................................................................................80
Other document options.......................................................................................80
Watermarks .........................................................................................................81
Alternative source/paper type..............................................................................82
Printing destination...............................................................................................82
Finishing Options.................................................................................................83
Font support.........................................................................................................83
Postscript-specific features .................................................................................84
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Introduction............................................................................................................................................87
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features .................................................................................88
Access to print drivers...........................................................................................................88
Access to print drivers in Windows NT 4.0..........................................................88
Document Defaults... driver tabs.........................................................88
Properties driver tabs..........................................................................89
Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me....................................89
Help system..........................................................................................................................89
What's this? Help ................................................................................................90
Context-sensitive Help.........................................................................................90
Incompatible Options messages .........................................................................90
Bubble Help..........................................................................................................90
Finishing tab features ...........................................................................................................91
Print Task Quick Sets ..........................................................................................92
Default Print Settings ..........................................................................93
User Guide Print Settings ...................................................................95
Document Options...............................................................................................95
Correct Order for Rear Bin .................................................................96
Print on Both Sides .............................................................................96
Automatically printing on both sides ..................................96
Manually printing on both sides..........................................96
Flip Pages Up .....................................................................................98
Booklet Printing...................................................................................99
Book and Booklet Printing..................................................99
Printing a Booklet ..............................................99
Printing a Book ................................................100
Pages per Sheet................................................................................100
Print Page Borders............................................................................101
Page Order........................................................................................101
Document preview image...................................................................................101
Print Quality group box.......................................................................................102
Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver..................102
Current Setting .................................................................103
Font Settings ....................................................................103
Output Settings ................................................................103
Resolution........................................................104
Resolution Enhancement technology (REt).....104
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG)............................104
Print all Text as Black .....................................104
Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver................104
vi
Current Setting .................................................................105
Graphics Settings ............................................................105
Font Settings ....................................................................106
Output Settings.................................................................106
Resolution........................................................106
Resolution Enhancement technology (REt).....106
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) ...........................106
Print all Text as Black .....................................107
Effects tab features ............................................................................................................107
Print Task Quick Sets.........................................................................................108
Fit To Page group box .......................................................................................108
Print Document On ...........................................................................108
Scale to Fit ........................................................................................108
% of Normal Size...............................................................................109
Watermarks .......................................................................................................109
Watermarks drop-down menu ..........................................................110
First Page Only .................................................................................110
Edit.....................................................................................................110
Current Watermarks ........................................................111
Watermark Message ........................................................112
Message Angle ................................................................112
Document preview image.................................................112
Font Attributes .................................................................112
Name................................................................112
Color.................................................................113
Shading ...........................................................113
Size..................................................................113
Style.................................................................113
Default settings ...............................................113
Paper tab features .............................................................................................................113
Print Task Quick Sets.........................................................................................114
Paper Options ...................................................................................................115
Size is ...............................................................................................115
Use Different Paper/Covers .............................................................116
Source Is ..........................................................................................116
Type is ..............................................................................................116
Custom .............................................................................................117
Name................................................................................118
Save, Delete, or Rename.................................................119
Custom size (width and height controls) .........................120
Custom width and height control limits.............................120
Paper and envelope icons...............................121
Dynamic measurement units ...........................................121
Close.................................................................................121
Use Different Paper/Covers..............................................................121
First Page ........................................................................122
Front Cover ......................................................................123
Other Pages......................................................................124
Last Page .........................................................................125
Back Cover.......................................................................125
vii
Document preview image...................................................................................126
Product image ...................................................................................................127
Job Storage tab features....................................................................................................127
Job Storage tab .................................................................................................128
Print Task Quick Sets.........................................................................................129
Status group box ...............................................................................................129
Job Storage Mode .............................................................................................129
Off......................................................................................................129
Proof and Hold ..................................................................................129
Private Job ........................................................................................130
Using a PIN for Private Job .............................................130
PIN.....................................................................................................................130
Job notification ..................................................................................................130
User Name ........................................................................................................131
Job Name ..........................................................................................................131
Using Job Storage features when printing.........................................................131
Releasing a Job Storage print job.....................................................132
Deleting a Job Storage print job........................................................132
Basics tab features ............................................................................................................132
Print Task Quick Sets.........................................................................................133
Copies ...............................................................................................................134
Orientation .........................................................................................................134
Document preview image...................................................................................134
About .................................................................................................................134
Properties tabs....................................................................................................................136
NT Forms tab features ......................................................................................136
Configuring the trays.........................................................................137
Configure tab features .......................................................................................137
Printer Model ....................................................................................138
Paper Handling Options....................................................................139
Duplexing Unit .................................................................139
Allow Manual Duplexing...................................................140
Mopier Enabled ................................................................140
Mopier mode and collation...............................140
Optional Paper Sources ..................................................141
Other Options ...................................................................................141
More configuration options...............................................141
Storage.............................................................142
Fonts................................................................142
Include types in application source list ...........144
Alternative letterhead mode ............................144
Ignore Application Collation.............................144
Printer memory................................................144
Allow Scaling from Large Paper .....................145
Automatic configuration.....................................................................145
Printer image ....................................................................................145
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features........................................................................146
Access to print drivers........................................................................................................146
Access to print drivers in Windows NT 4.0........................................................146
Properties driver tabs........................................................................147
viii
Access to print-driver settings in Windows 98 and Windows Me......................147
PS 3 emulation support for the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer......................147
Help system .......................................................................................................................147
What's this Help.................................................................................................148
Context-sensitive Help.......................................................................................148
Page Setup tab features ....................................................................................................148
Advanced tab features........................................................................................................149
Paper/Output......................................................................................................150
Graphic...............................................................................................................150
Document Options ............................................................................................150
Page Layout Option...........................................................................................151
PostScript Options ............................................................................................151
Printer Features ................................................................................................152
Job Storage tab features....................................................................................................154
Job Storage tab .................................................................................................154
Status group box ...............................................................................................155
Job Storage Mode .............................................................................................155
Off......................................................................................................156
Proof and Hold ..................................................................................156
Private Job ........................................................................................156
Using a PIN for Private Job..............................................157
Job Identification ...............................................................................................157
User Name .......................................................................................157
Job Name .........................................................................................157
PIN.....................................................................................................157
Using Job Storage features when printing.........................................................158
Releasing a Job Storage print job.....................................................158
Deleting a Job Storage print job........................................................158
Device Settings tab ............................................................................................................159
Form to Tray Assignment ..................................................................................161
Font Substitution Table......................................................................................162
Postscript Configure ..........................................................................................162
Available PostScript Memory............................................................162
Output Protocol..................................................................................162
Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job............................................................163
Send Ctrl-D After Each Job ..............................................................163
Job Timeout ......................................................................................163
Wait Timeout ....................................................................................163
Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline.....................................163
Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline ...................................163
Installable Options..............................................................................................164
Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing) .....................................................164
Mopier Mode......................................................................................164
Job Storage ......................................................................................164
Tray 3 ...............................................................................................164
Printer Memory..................................................................................165
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
Introduction..........................................................................................................................................167
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features.............................................................168
ix
Access to print drivers........................................................................................................168
Help system........................................................................................................................168
What's this? Help...............................................................................................169
Context-sensitive Help ......................................................................................169
Incompatible Print Settings messages...............................................................169
Advanced tab features........................................................................................................170
Paper/Output......................................................................................................171
Copy Count .......................................................................................171
Collated.............................................................................171
Graphic options..................................................................................................172
Document Options.............................................................................................172
Advanced Printing Features..............................................................172
Print Optimizations ...........................................................................172
Printer Features ................................................................................172
Print All Text as Black.......................................................173
Send TrueType as Bitmap ...............................................173
REt....................................................................................173
Alternative Letterhead Mode............................................173
Graphics Mode.................................................................173
Layout Options .................................................................................174
Page Order.......................................................................174
Paper/Quality tab features..................................................................................................174
Print Task Quick Sets.........................................................................................175
Default Print Settings.........................................................................176
User Guide Print Settings .................................................................179
Type new Quick Set name here .......................................................179
Paper Options....................................................................................................180
Size is................................................................................................180
Custom .............................................................................................181
Name................................................................................181
Paper size ........................................................................182
Units..................................................................................182
Custom width and height control limits.............................182
Use Different Paper/Covers..............................................................182
Source Is ..........................................................................................182
Type is...............................................................................................183
Use Different Paper/Covers..............................................................184
Front Cover ......................................................................184
First Page ........................................................................186
Other Pages .....................................................................187
Last Page .........................................................................188
Back Cover ......................................................................189
Document preview image...................................................................................190
Print Quality........................................................................................................190
Effects tab features.............................................................................................................191
Print Task Quick Sets.........................................................................................192
Resizing options.................................................................................................193
Actual Size ........................................................................................193
Print Document On ...........................................................................193
Scale to Fit ........................................................................................193
x
% of Normal Size ..............................................................................194
Document preview image...................................................................................194
Watermarks........................................................................................................194
Current watermarks ..........................................................................196
Watermark Message ........................................................................196
Message Angle .................................................................................196
Font Attributes ..................................................................................196
Name................................................................................197
Color.................................................................................197
Shading.............................................................................197
Size...................................................................................197
Style..................................................................................197
Default settings ................................................................197
Finishing tab features.........................................................................................................197
Print Task Quick Sets.........................................................................................198
Document Options ............................................................................................199
Correct Order for Rear Bin ...............................................................199
Print on Both Sides............................................................................199
Automatically printing on both sides ................................199
Manually printing on both sides........................................200
Flip Pages Up....................................................................................201
Booklet layout....................................................................................202
Book and Booklet Printing................................................202
Printing a Booklet ............................................202
Printing a Book ................................................203
Pages per Sheet................................................................................203
Print Page Borders ...........................................................................203
Page Order........................................................................................203
Document preview image...................................................................................204
Orientation..........................................................................................................204
Job Storage tab features....................................................................................................205
Job Storage tab .................................................................................................205
Print Task Quick Sets.........................................................................................207
Status group box ...............................................................................................207
Job Storage Mode .............................................................................................207
Off......................................................................................................207
Proof and Hold ..................................................................................207
Private Job.........................................................................................208
Using a PIN for Private Job .............................................208
Require PIN .......................................................................................................208
Job notification ..................................................................................................208
User Name ........................................................................................................208
Job Name ..........................................................................................................209
Using Job Storage features when printing.........................................................209
Releasing a Job Storage print job.....................................................209
Deleting a Job Storage print job........................................................210
Properties tabs....................................................................................................................210
Device Settings .................................................................................................210
Form to Tray Assignment..................................................................211
Font Substitution Table.....................................................................212
xi
External Fonts...................................................................................213
Installing external fonts.....................................................214
Removing external fonts...................................................214
Postscript options..............................................................................215
Available PostScript Memory............................................215
Output Protocol.................................................................216
Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job...........................................216
Send Ctrl-D After Each Job .............................................216
Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray .............................216
Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray......................216
Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts..............216
Job Timeout .....................................................................216
Wait Timeout ....................................................................217
Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline....................217
Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline ..................217
Installable Options.............................................................................217
Automatic Configuration...................................................217
Tray 3 ...............................................................................218
Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing) ....................................218
Allow Manual Duplexing...................................................218
Printer Memory.................................................................218
Job Storage......................................................................218
Mopier Mode.....................................................................218
Mopier mode and collation...............................219
Postscript Passthrough.....................................................219
About tab............................................................................................................220
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Supported Windows operating systems..............................................................................................222
System requirements...........................................................................................................................223
Font support.........................................................................................................................................224
Basic fonts .........................................................................................................................224
Default fonts........................................................................................................................224
Installation instructions........................................................................................................................230
General installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, and XP operating systems ....................230
Installing from the printing-system CD...............................................................230
Installing from a network or from downloaded files ..........................................231
Detailed Windows installation ............................................................................................231
Using the Back and Cancel buttons...................................................................231
Modifying a pre-existing installation ..................................................................231
Typical Installation dialog box sequence ..........................................................232
Custom Installation.............................................................................................257
Installing print drivers by using the Add Printer feature.....................................258
Installer Customization Wizard for Windows.....................................................259
Running the installer customization wizard.......................................259
Dialogs ..............................................................................................259
Distribution.........................................................................................276
Point and Print installation for Windows 98, Me, NT 4.0, 2000, XP, and
Server 2003........................................................................................................276
Setting a default printer.......................................................................................................277
xii
6 Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and UNIX operating systems
System requirements ..........................................................................................................................280
Macintosh ...........................................................................................................................280
Linux....................................................................................................................................280
UNIX....................................................................................................................................280
Macintosh ...........................................................................................................................................281
Macintosh component descriptions ...................................................................................281
HP LaserJet PPDs.............................................................................................281
PDEs..................................................................................................................281
HP Toolbox ........................................................................................................281
HP Embedded Web Server................................................................................281
Install notes........................................................................................................282
Online help.........................................................................................................282
Screen fonts.......................................................................................................282
Font support .....................................................................................282
Installing the Macintosh printing system.............................................................................286
To install the HP LaserJet printing-system software for the Macintosh OS .....286
To set up an AppleTalk networked Printer with Mac OS 9.x ............................286
To set up a Printer with Mac OS X.....................................................................287
To set up an IP/LPR networked Printer with Mac OS 9.x..................................287
Uninstalling the Macintosh printing system .......................................................................287
In-box disk layout ...............................................................................................................287
Mac OS Classic installation................................................................................................288
Main Install dialog box sequence.......................................................................288
HP LaserJet Screen Fonts Installer dialog box sequence ................................290
Mac OS X installation.........................................................................................................291
Main Install dialog box sequence.......................................................................291
7 Engineering Detail
Introduction .........................................................................................................................................297
Media attributes ..................................................................................................................................297
Paper sources and destinations.........................................................................................297
Paper-tray configurations....................................................................................................297
Paper-source commands....................................................................................................298
Media types and sizes........................................................................................................299
Driver features and attributes.............................................................................299
Custom paper size support................................................................................301
Media-type commands ......................................................................................302
HP Toolbox .........................................................................................................................................303
Enabling or disabling HP Toolbox support.........................................................................303
Manually uninstalling HP Toolbox in Macintosh Operating Systems.................................303
Index....................................................................................................................................................................305
xiii
xiv
Purpose and scope
1
Purpose and scope
Introduction
This software technical reference (STR) provides information about and troubleshooting tips for the
printing-system software for the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers.
This document is prepared in an electronic format to serve as a quick-reference tool for Customer
Care Center (CCC) agents, support engineers, system administrators, management information
systems (MIS) personnel, and HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer end users, as appropriate.
NOTE This STR describes drivers that are shipped with the printing-system software CD.
This STR does not cover drivers that might be released for use by support personnel.
The following information is included in this technical reference:
■
descriptions of drivers and platforms with system modifications
■
procedures for installing and uninstalling software components
■
descriptions of various topics associated with the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers,
including engineering details
NOTE An addendum to this STR includes system modification information and descriptions
of known software issues and workarounds.
This chapter contains information about the following topics:
Introduction
●
HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers
●
Printing-system software CD
●
Structure and availability of the software CD
1
Purpose and scope
HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers
The following table contains descriptions of the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer models
that are described in this STR. Product configurations might vary among countries/regions.
Table 1-1 Features of the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers
Feature
Model Specifications
Performance
■
HP LaserJet 2410 printer: 24 pages per minute (ppm) for A4-sized media;
25 ppm for letter-sized media
■
HP LaserJet 2420 printer: 28 pages per minute (ppm) for A4-sized media;
30 ppm for letter-sized media
■
HP LaserJet 2430 printer: 33 pages per minute (ppm) for A4-sized media;
35 ppm for letter-sized media
■
32 megabytes (MB) of memory for the HP LaserJet 2410 and 2420
printers, expandable to 288 MB
■
48 MB of memory for the HP LaserJet 2420d and 2430t printers,
expandable to 304
■
64 MB of memory for the HP LaserJet 2420n, 2420dn, 2430tn and
2430dtn printers, expandable to 320 MB
■
Graphical display on control panel
■
Enhanced Help with animated graphics
■
Embedded Web server to gain access to support and order supplies (for
network-connected products)
■
HP toolbox software to provide printer status and alerts, order supplies,
show documentation and troubleshooting information, and print internal
printer information pages
■
PCL 6
■
PCL 5
■
PDF
■
MIME
■
Postscript emulation
■
Job storage
■
Fonts and forms
■
PowerSave setting
■
High content of recyclable components and materials
■
Energy Star® compliant
■
Blue Angel compliant.
Memory
User interface
Supported printer personalities
Storage features
Environmental features
2
1
Purpose and scope
Purpose and scope
Table 1-1 Features of the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers (continued)
Feature
Model Specifications
Fonts
■
66 default TrueType fonts installed with typical installation.
■
92 additional postscript fonts available on the installation CD.
■
Supports forms and fonts on the disk by using HP Web Jetadmin.
■
Prints on media from 76 x 127 mm (3 by 5 inches) to 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x
14 inches) in size.
■
Prints on media with weights from 60 g/m2 to 199 g/m2 (16 lb to 53 lb bond).
■
Prints on a wide range of media types including labels, transparencies,
and envelopes.
■
250-sheet paper tray (Tray 2)
■
Optional 500-sheet paper tray (Tray 3); standard on the HP LaserJet 2430
printer
■
Duplexing unit is standard on HP LaserJet 2420d, 2420dn and 2430dtn
printers
■
250-sheet face-down output bin
■
100-pin DDR memory DIMM (dual inline memory module)
■
Optional 500-sheet paper tray
■
Optional embedded HP Jetdirect print server; standard on
HP LaserJet 2420n, 2420dn, 2430tn, and 2430dtn printers
■
Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2.0 connection
■
Standard bidirectional, extended capabilities (ECP) type-B (IEEE 1284compliant) parallel cable
■
The printer supports an auxiliary connection for paper handling input
devices.
Paper Handling
Accessories
Connectivity
NOTE Both USB and parallel connections are supported, but
cannot be used at the same time.
Supplies
HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers
■
The supplies status page contains information on toner level, page count,
and estimated pages remaining.
■
The product uses a no-shake cartridge design.
■
The product checks for authentic HP print cartridges at cartridge
installation.
■
The product offers Internet-enabled supply-ordering capabilities (by using
the embedded Web server or the HP Toolbox software).
3
Purpose and scope
Printing-system software CD
This section contains information about the following topics:
●
Software features
●
HP LaserJet documentation
Software features
This section contains information about the following topics:
●
Printing system and installer
●
HP LaserJet print drivers
●
Driver Autoconfiguration
●
Update Now
●
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Printing system and installer
The following sections contain information about the printing-system software and the installer on the
software CD that came with the product.
HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printing-system software CD for Windows systems
For the Microsoft® Windows® environment (Windows 98, Windows 98, Windows NT® 4.0,
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003), the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430
printing-system software CD provides an interactive software window that you can use not only to
install the print drivers and related components, but also to gain access to online user
documentation, a customization utility, Adobe® Acrobat® Reader® software, and optional HP
software.
The following illustration shows the main screen of the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printingsystem software CD, which appears when you insert the software CD in your CD-ROM drive. If the
screen does not appear when you insert the software CD, click Start, click Run, click Browse...,
navigate to the root directory of the software CD, and then double-click the SETUP.EXE file to start
the installer.
4
1
Purpose and scope
Purpose and scope
Figure 1-1 Installation software CD main screen
The main screen of the software CD contains installation options in the upper-left panel and
documentation options in the lower-left panel. As you move your cursor over each option, a
description of the option appears above the product image.
NOTE
The options on your product might vary from the illustration.
install printer. This wizard guides you through the installation of your HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and
2430 printing-system software. You are given the choice of performing a Typical Installation, a
Minimum Installation, or a Custom Installation. If you select Typical Installation, only the necessary
software is installed. If you select Minimum Installation, only the components required for basic
printing are installed. If you select Custom Installation, you can select the components that you want
to install.
installer customization wizard. Use this wizard to customize the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and
2430 print driver installer by presetting the installation options in a response file. The installer that
you have customized can then be used for silent, unattended installation.
NOTE For HP Traditional PCL 5e drivers and all Windows NT 4.0 drivers, use HP Web
Jetadmin or the HP Driver Preconfiguration utility to create a silent installer.
register product. Use this option to register your product online. Using the Web registration, you
can gain access to support and services, manage your profile, and sign up for free support alerts,
driver notices, and personalized newsletters.
Printing-system software CD
5
Purpose and scope
printer documentation. Use this option to view the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer user
documentation. The following document options are available when you click this option:
■
user guide (interactive
■
user guide (printer friendly)
■
install notes
■
hp driver preconfiguration user guide
■
embedded web server guide
■
hp jetdirect guide
NOTE If your system does not have Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0 or later installed, clicking
any of the links to documentation that is provided in the portable document format (PDF) file
format opens a version of Adobe Acrobat Reader software that runs from the HP LaserJet
2410, 2420, and 2430 printing-system software CD. The CD Browser version of Acrobat
Reader is in English only, but can be used to open localized versions of .PDF documents. The
Adobe Acrobat Reader software is not installed on your computer and can only run while the
printing-system software CD is in the CD-ROM drive. Adobe Acrobat Reader is also available
from www.adobe.com.
support. To increase productivity and get the most use from your printer, view a list of optional
software programs that are available for installation and links to HP Web sites. The following options
are available:
■
Click hp web jetadmin to download HP Web Jetadmin software from the Web for a Web
browser-based network-management tool.
■
Click supplies for information about ordering HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer supplies.
■
Click product information for HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer support information
and updates.
■
Click hp.com to go to the HP home Web page for information about products and services,
support, drivers, and HP online stores.
Installer features
The common Windows installer is designed to provide a simple and consistent installation method for
the product. The common installer is available for the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems.
6
1
Purpose and scope
■
The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printing-system software CD features an interactive
software interface. See HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printing-system software CD for
Windows systems.
■
Network connection is integrated so that you can install drivers and connect to a network product
in a single process.
■
The selection dialog box sets the operating-system language as the default language (for
Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 only). You
can use the installer to select any of the languages available on the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420,
and 2430 printing-system software CD.
The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printing-system software CD also includes the following
features:
■
The HP LaserJet Uninstaller Utility
■
The HP Customization Utility for custom installations
■
The HP Toolbox application
All of the Windows system components are installed by using the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430
printing-system installer. The installer automatically detects your language of choice and your
operating system. You can select the type of installation that you prefer: Typical Installation,
Minimum Installation, or Custom Installation.
HP LaserJet print drivers
HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 print drivers make the printer features available and allow the
computer to communicate with the product. The printing system includes software for end users and
network administrators who are working in the following operating environments:
■
Microsoft Windows 98 and Windows Me
■
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit), and
Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit)
■
Apple Mac OS 9.x and later, and Mac OS X (V10.1 and later)
Automatic driver configuration, driver update capability after a new configuration, and
preconfiguration features are available with the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 print drivers.
NOTE For the latest information about the printing-system software components, view the
readme files on the CD. For additional information about installing the printing-system
software, view the Hewlett Packard LaserJet 2410/2420/2430 series Printing System Install
Notes on the printing-system software CD.
All of the drivers provide access to the paper-handling and print-quality features, and are described
in chapters 3 and 4 of this guide.
Printing-system software CD
7
Purpose and scope
The common Windows installer offers the following features:
Purpose and scope
HP PCL 5e, PCL 6, and PS emulation drivers
The following drivers are available on the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printing—system
software CD:
■
The HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver for Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0.
■
The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver for Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0.
■
The HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver for Windows 98, Windows Me, and
Windows NT 4.0.
■
The HP PCL 6, PCL 5e, and PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003.
NOTE If you select a Typical Installation during installation of the printing-system software,
the HP PCL 6 driver is installed by default. You must use the Add Printer wizard to install any
of the PCL 5 drivers.
Table 1-2 Print drivers included with the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers
Operating System1
PCL 6
PCL 5e
PS emulation
Windows 98, Windows Me
X
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
X
X
X
Windows 2000
X
X
X
Windows XP
X
X
X
Windows Server 2003
X
X
X
Macintosh OS
1
X
Not all product features are available from all drivers or operating systems. See the online Help in your driver for
information about the features that are available.
Print-driver version numbers for Windows operating systems
The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 PCL 6 and PCL 5e print drivers support Windows 98,
Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating
systems. The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 PS emulation driver software provides postscript
feature support for the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers.
If you are using an HP traditional driver, you can view the print-driver version number by clicking the
HP logo in the lower-left corner of the following HP traditional PCL 6 or PCL 5e driver tabs:
8
■
Finishing
■
Effects
■
Paper
■
Job Storage
■
Basics
1
Purpose and scope
Purpose and scope
If you are using an HP unidriver in Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
environments, follow these steps to find driver-version information:
1
Click Start.
2
Click Settings.
3
Click Printers (or Printers and Faxes in Windows XP and Windows Server 2003).
4
Right-click the printer icon.
5
Click Properties.
6
Click the About tab.
NOTE For a list of print drivers, updated HP printing-system software, and product support
information, go to www.hp.com/support/lj2410 for the HP LaserJet 2410 printer, www.hp.com/
support/lj2420 for the HP LaserJet 2420 printer, or www.hp.com/support/lj2430 for the HP
LaserJet 2430 printer.
Macintosh and Macintosh-compatible printing system
The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printing system for Macintosh is composed of the Print
Center for OS X and the Apple LaserWriter driver for OS 9, which are provided with the operating
system, and HP-created PPD files. The driver uses these files to determine the features and
postscript commands that the product supports. Bidirectional support in AppleTalk connections
supports software autoconfiguration. The following are installable components:
■
The HP LaserJet Installer for Mac OS 9, and Mac OS X
■
The HP LaserJet Screen Fonts Installer
■
SYSTEM/EXTENSIONS/PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS (for Mac OS 9)
■
LIBRARY/PRINTERS/PPDS/CONTENTS/RESOURCES/LANGUAGE.LPROJ (for Mac OS X)
■
Online Help, an HTML-based printer and utility help that can be viewed through a browser or in
the Macintosh OS Help Center (in English only)
■
Install notes
NOTE The HP LaserJet Utility is a standalone utility that is not installed by the installer, but
is available on the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer software CD. It is an HP utility
that is installed in the HP LaserJet folder of Mac OS 9 and provides configuration and
management support for postscript. It can be found on the CD in a directory called “hp OS 9
LaserJet Utility.”
Additional driver availability
■
HP OpenVMS drivers. For further information, go to h71000.www7.hp.com/openvms/print/
■
HP Install Network Printer Wizard (INPW). For further information, go to www.hp.com/go/
inpw_software
■
OS/2 PCL 5c/6 print driver
■
OS/2 PS print driver
Printing-system software CD
9
Purpose and scope
■
UNIX® model scripts. For further information about UNIX model scripts, go to www.hp.com/go/
unixmodelscripts.
■
Tru64 UNIX printing. For further information, go to h30097.www3.hp.com/printing/
■
Linux drivers. For further information, go to www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting.
■
SAP printing. For further information, go to www.hp.com/go/sap/print
NOTE The OS/2 drivers are available from IBM and are packaged with OS/2.
Driver Autoconfiguration
The HP LaserJet PCL 6 and PCL 5e drivers for Windows features automatic discovery and driver
configuration for product accessories at the time of installation. Accessories that can be detected
include the duplexing unit, optional paper tray, and dual inline memory modules (DIMMs).
Update Now
If you have modified the configuration of the product since installation, the driver can be
automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional
communication. Use the Update Now feature to automatically reflect the new configuration in the
driver.
NOTE The Update Now feature is not supported in environments where shared Windows NT
4.0, Windows 2000, or Windows XP clients are connected to Windows NT 4.0, Windows
2000, or Windows XP hosts.
HP Driver Preconfiguration
HP Driver Preconfiguration is a software architecture and set of tools that permits HP software to be
customized and distributed in managed corporate printing environments. Using HP Driver
Preconfiguration, information technology (IT) administrators in corporate and enterprise
environments can preconfigure the printing and device defaults for HP print drivers before installing
the drivers in the network environment. For more information, see the HP Driver Preconfiguration
Support Guide, which is available on the software CD or from www.hp.com/support/lj2410 for the HP
LaserJet 2410 printer, www.hp.com/support/lj2420 for the HP LaserJet 2420 printer, or www.hp.com/
support/lj2430 for the HP LaserJet 2430 printer.
Information about HP Driver Preconfiguration is also available by going towww.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw,
and then selecting Cross operating system (BIOS, Firmware, Diagnostics, etc.).
HP LaserJet documentation
This section describes the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer documentation that is available
to users and administrators.
The following table lists the availability of HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printing-system
documentation by operating system.
10
1
Purpose and scope
Document
Windows
98/Me
Windows
NT 4.0
Windows 2000/
XP/Server 2003
Macintosh
HP LaserJet 2400 Series User Guide (.PDF file)
x
x
x
x
HP LaserJet 2400 Series User Guide (.CHM file)
x
x
x
x
Hewlett Packard LaserJet 2410/2420/2430 series Printing
System Install Notes
x
x
x
HP Embedded Web Server Guide
x
x
x
x
HP Driver Preconfiguration User Guide
x
x
x
x
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
x
x
x
x
HP Device Installer Customization Wizard
x
x
x
x
Access to HP LaserJet documents depends on the type of document and its location. Some
documents can be opened from the installer CD Browser. Others are found on the software CD and
can be opened by navigating to the folder where they reside. Still others are available on the Web
through links in the installer CD Browser or CD folders. Documents are available in the following file
formats:
■
Portable Document Format (.PDF). The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printing-system
software CD includes Adobe Acrobat Reader for viewing online documentation. If your system
does not have Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0 or later installed, clicking any of the links to
documentation that is provided in the portable document format (PDF) file format opens an
English-only version of Adobe Acrobat Reader software that runs from the HP LaserJet 2410,
2420, and 2430 printing-system software CD. The Adobe Acrobat Reader software is not
installed on your computer and can only run while the printing-system software CD is in the CDROM drive.
■
Compiled HTML (.CHM). When you click a documentation link to a .CHM document, a Microsoft
HTML Viewer opens the file on your computer screen. The .CHM files can reside either on the
printing-system software CD or on the Web.
■
Hypertext Markup (.HTM). When you click a documentation link to an .HTM document, a Web
browser opens the file on your computer screen. The .HTM files can reside either on the printingsystem software CD or on the Web.
■
Rich Text format (.RTF). This is a text file. You can navigate to .RTF files and open them in
Microsoft Word or Microsoft WordPad.
HP LaserJet 2400 Series User Guide
The HP LaserJet 2400 Series User Guide describes the basic features of the product.
To view this guide, click printer documentation in the installer CD Browser, and then click user
guide (interactive). The guide opens as a Windows Help file (.CHM file). This readable, onscreen
version of the guide is provided in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
The screen-readable version (.CHM) of the User Guide for the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430
printers is also available on the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printing-system software CD. To
Printing-system software CD
11
Purpose and scope
Table 1-3 Documentation availability
Purpose and scope
open the guide from the software CD, navigate to the <language> folder for your language, and then
open the Manuals folder. In that folder, open the following file:
■
LJ2410_20_30_USE_XXWW.CHM
NOTE The "XX" in the file name varies in each language. For instance, the file name for the
French version of the guide is LJ2410_20_30_USE_FRWW.CHM
To print the User Guide, click printer documentation on the installer CD Browser, and then click
user guide (printer friendly). The guide is provided as a .PDF file, which you can print.
You can also open the .PDF file by inserting the printing-system software CD into the CD-ROM drive
and navigating to the <language> folder for your language, and then open the Manuals folder. In
that folder, open the following file:
■
LJ2410_20_30_USE_XXWW.PDF
NOTE The "XX" in the file name varies for each language. For instance, the file name for the
French version of the guide is LJ2410_20_30_USE_FRWW.PDF
When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to
another location.
Hewlett Packard LaserJet 2410/2420/2430 series Printing System Install Notes
The Hewlett Packard LaserJet 2410/2420/2430 series Printing System Install Notes is a document
(in .HTM format) that contains important information about product features, instructions for installing
the printing-system software, and technical assistance.
To view this file from the software CD, click printer documentation on the main screen of the
installer CD Browser, and then click install notes.
You can also open the file by inserting the software CD into the CD-ROM drive and navigating to
<language>. In that folder, open the following file:
■
LJ24X0_INSTALL-NOTE_XXWW.HTM
NOTE The "XX" in the file name varies for each language. For instance, the file name for the
French version of the document is LJ24X0_INSTALL-NOTE_FRWW.HTM.
When you have the file open in a text editor (such as NotePad or WordPad), you can click File and
then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location.
HP Driver Preconfiguration User Guide
The HP Driver Preconfiguration User Guide is a guide (in .PDF format) for preconfiguring drivers in
network environments.
To view this guide, click printer documentation on the main screen of the installer CD Browser, and
then click hp driver preconfiguration user guide.
You can also gain access to the HP Driver Preconfiguration User Guide by inserting the software CD
into the CD-ROM drive, navigating to the English folder, and then to the Manuals folder. In that
folder, open the following file:
■
12
PRECONFIG_SUPPORT_ENWW.PDF
1
Purpose and scope
Purpose and scope
NOTE The HP Driver Preconfiguration User Guide is available only in English on the
software CD.
When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to
another location.
HP Embedded Web Server Guide
The HP Embedded Web Server User Guide (in .PDF format) provides information about device
status, settings, and networking for the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers.
To view this guide, click printer documentation on the main screen of the installer CD Browser, and
then click embedded web server guide.
You can also gain access to the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide by inserting the software CD
into the CD-ROM drive, navigating to the <language> folder for your language, and then to the
Manuals folder. In that folder, open the following file:
■
EWS81_USE_XXWW.PDF
NOTE The "XX" in the file name varies for each language. In French, the file name is
EWS90_USE_FRWW.HTM.
When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to
another location.
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
The HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide is a network administrator's guide (in .PDF format) that
contains information about connecting the product directly to a network.
To view this guide, click printer documentation on the main screen of the installer CD Browser, and
then click hp jetdirect guide.
You can also gain access to the HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide by inserting the software CD into
the CD-ROM drive, navigating to the <language> folder for your language, and then to the Manuals
folder. In that folder, open the following file:
■
HPJDIAG_XXWW.PDF
NOTE The "XX" in the file name varies for each language. In French, the file name is
HPJDIAG_FRWW.PDF.
When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to
another location.
HP Device Installer Customization Wizard
The HP Device Installer Customization Wizard (in .HTM format) provides network administrators with
information about options and installation settings that can be selected for the Installer Customization
Wizard.
Printing-system software CD
13
Purpose and scope
You can gain access to the HP Device Installer Customization Wizard by inserting the software CD
into the CD-ROM drive and navigating to the <language> folder for your language, and then to the
Manuals folder. In that folder, open the following file:
■
CUSTOMIZATION_README_XXWW.RTF
NOTE The "XX" in the file name varies for each language. In French, the file name is
CUSTOMIZATION_README_FRWW.PDF.
When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to
another location.
14
1
Purpose and scope
Purpose and scope
Structure and availability of the software CD
The software CD for the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer contains a variety of files for
installing the printing-system software on your computer. This section describes the files that are
available on the software CD, as well as additional support and fulfillment information.
In-box file layout
The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printing-system software consists of two partitions: one for
installing the product into Windows operating systems, and the other for Macintosh operating
systems. The files include documentation files and files that are required to install and uninstall the
printing-system components.
HP LaserJet software CD, Windows partition
The root directory in the Windows partition of the software CD contains the AUTORUN.EXE file,
SETUP.EXE file, and the following directories and support files:
■
autorun
■
Fonts
■
HW
■
System32
■
Temp
■
toolbox
■
WebReg
■
Language directories for all the languages that are on the software CD
The printing-system files for each language reside in the following directories:
■
Drivers
■
Manuals
File layouts differ by language for each regional version of the software CD.
To view the files, insert the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer software CD, right-click Start,
click Explore, and then select the CD-ROM drive.
HP LaserJet software CD, Macintosh partition
The files contained in the Macintosh partition of the HP LaserJet software CD are grouped by
language and reside in the following directories:
■
Root directory
■
HP LASERJET INSTALLERS (for Macintosh operating systems)
■
PDF (for guides and manuals)
File layouts differ by language for each regional version of the software CD.
Structure and availability of the software CD
15
Purpose and scope
Availability and fulfillment
This section provides information about the availability of the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430
printing-system software and related software and firmware. Printing-system software on a CD is
available from HP fulfillment centers.
In-box CDs
The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printing-system software CD is available in five versions.
The following list shows the five versions of the software CD and the languages they support:
■
■
■
■
16
CD AM - Americas and Europe:
■
DE = German (Deutsch)
■
EN = English
■
ES = Spanish (Español)
■
FR = French (Français)
■
IT = Italian (Italiano)
■
NL = Dutch (Nederland)
■
PT = Brazilian Portuguese (Português)
CD WE - Western Europe and Arabic:
■
AR = Arabic
■
DN = Danish (Dansk)
■
EN = English
■
FR = French (Français)
CD NE - Northern Europe and Russian:
■
EN = English
■
FI = Finnish (Suomi)
■
NO = Norwegian (Norsk)
■
RU = Russian (Russ)
■
SV = Swedish (Svenska)
■
TR = Turkish (Turkçe)
CD EE - Eastern Europe:
■
CZ = Czech (Cesky)
■
EL = Greek
■
EN = English
■
HE = Hebrew
1
Purpose and scope
HU = Hungarian (Magyar)
■
PL = Polish (Polski)
Purpose and scope
■
■
CD AS - Asia:
■
EN = English
■
KO = Korean
■
TH = Thai
■
ZHCN = Simplified Chinese
■
ZHTW = Traditional Chinese
NOTE Drivers for various languages do not necessarily correspond to geographic countries/
regions. European languages, for instance, are distributed on three CDs.
The following tables show the printing-system components that are supported in each language.
Table 1-4 CD AM - Americas and Europe
Component
DE
EN
ES
FR
IT
NL
PT
HP Traditional Postscript 3
Emulation Driver
(PS Emulation Driver)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 6 Unidriver
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 5e Unidriver
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
PS Emulation Driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Common Windows Installer
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Add Printer Wizard Installer
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Customization Utility Wizard
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
CD Browser
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Driver Preconfiguration
User Guide
x
HP LaserJet 2400 Series
User Guide (PDF)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP LaserJet 2400 Series
User Guide (CHM)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Hewlett Packard LaserJet
2410/2420/2430 series
Printing System Install Notes
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Embedded Web Server
User Guide
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Structure and availability of the software CD
17
Purpose and scope
Table 1-4 CD AM - Americas and Europe (continued)
Component
DE
EN
ES
FR
IT
NL
PT
HP Device Installer
Customization Wizard
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Toolbox
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Table 1-5 CD WE - Western Europe and Arabic
Component
AR
DN
EN
FR
PS Emulation Driver
x
x
x
x
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
x
x
x
x
HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 6 Unidriver
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 5e Unidriver
x
x
x
x
PS Emulation Unidriver
x
x
x
x
Common Windows Installer
x
x
x
x
Add Printer Wizard Installer
x
x
x
x
Customization Utility Wizard
x
x
x
x
CD Browser
x
x
x
x
HP Driver Preconfiguration User Guide
x
HP LaserJet 2400 Series User Guide (PDF)
x
x
x
x
HP LaserJet 2400 Series User Guide (CHM)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
Hewlett Packard LaserJet 2410/2420/2430
series Printing System Install Notes
x
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide
HP Device Installer Customization Wizard
x
HP Toolbox
Table 1-6 CD NE - Northern Europe and Russian
18
Component
EN
FI
NO
RU
SV
TR
PS Emulation Driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 6 Unidriver
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 5e Unidriver
x
x
x
x
x
x
PS Emulation Unidriver
x
x
x
x
x
x
1
Purpose and scope
Component
EN
FI
NO
RU
SV
TR
Common Windows Installer
x
x
x
x
x
x
Add Printer Wizard Installer
x
x
x
x
x
x
Customization Utility Wizard
x
x
x
x
x
x
CD Browser
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Driver Preconfiguration
User Guide
x
HP LaserJet 2400 Series
User Guide (PDF)
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP LaserJet 2400 Series
User Guide (CHM)
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide
x
x
x
x
x
x
Hewlett Packard LaserJet
2410/2420/2430 series
Printing System Install Notes
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Embedded Web Server
User Guide
x
x
x
HP Device Installer
Customization Wizard
x
x
x
HP Toolbox
x
x
x
Purpose and scope
Table 1-6 CD NE - Northern Europe and Russian (continued)
x
x
x
x
x
Table 1-7 CD EE - Eastern Europe
Component
CZ
EL
EN
HE
HU
PL
PS Emulation Driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 6 Unidriver
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 5e Unidriver
x
x
x
x
x
x
PS Emulation Unidriver
x
x
x
x
x
Common Windows Installer
x
x
x
x
x
x
Add Printer Wizard Installer
x
x
x
x
x
x
Customization Utility Wizard
x
x
x
x
x
x
CD Browser
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Driver Preconfiguration User
Guide
HP LaserJet 2400 Series User
Guide (PDF)
Structure and availability of the software CD
x
x
x
x
19
Purpose and scope
Table 1-7 CD EE - Eastern Europe (continued)
Component
CZ
EL
EN
HE
HU
PL
HP LaserJet 2400 Series User
Guide (CHM)
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide
x
x
x
Hewlett Packard LaserJet
2410/2420/2430 series Printing
System Install Notes
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Embedded Web Server
User Guide
HP Device Installer
Customization Wizard
x
x
x
x
HP Toolbox
x
Table 1-8 CD AS - Asia
20
Component
EN
KO
TH
ZHCN
ZHTW
PS Emulation Driver
x
x
x
x
x
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
x
x
x
x
x
HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver
x
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 6 Unidriver
x
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 5e Unidriver
x
PS Emulation Unidriver
x
x
x
x
x
Common Windows Installer
x
x
x
x
x
Add Printer Wizard Installer
x
x
x
x
x
Customization Utility Wizard
x
x
x
x
x
CD Browser
x
x
x
x
x
HP Driver Preconfiguration User
Guide
x
HP LaserJet 2400 Series User
Guide (PDF)
x
x
x
x
x
HP LaserJet 2400 Series User
Guide (CHM)
x
x
x
x
x
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
x
x
x
x
Hewlett Packard LaserJet
2410/2420/2430 series Printing
System Install Notes
x
x
x
x
x
HP Embedded Web Server User
Guide
x
HP Device Installer Customization
Wizard
x
x
x
x
x
1
Purpose and scope
Component
EN
HP Toolbox
x
KO
TH
ZHCN
Purpose and scope
Table 1-8 CD AS - Asia (continued)
ZHTW
NOTE Japanese drivers are available on the Web, but not on the software CD. See
www.hp.com/go/lj2410_software for the HP LaserJet 2410 printer, www.hp.com/go/
lj2420_software for the HP LaserJet 2420 printer, or www.hp.com/go/lj2430_software for the
HP LaserJet 2430 printer.
Web deployment
All software that is contained on the installation CD is also available on the Web.
Web deployment is the preferred method for obtaining the latest software. The Web site offers a
notification option for automatic e-mail notification about new software releases.
Printing-system software
The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printing-system software is available for download from
www.hp.com/go/lj2410_software for the HP LaserJet 2410 printer, www.hp.com/go/lj2420_software
for the HP LaserJet 2420 printer, or www.hp.com/go/lj2430_software for the HP LaserJet 2430 printer.
The printing-system software supports the following operating systems:
■
Windows 98 and Windows Me
■
Windows XP Professional (32-bit)
■
Windows XP Home Edition
■
Windows 2000 (32-bit)
■
Windows Server 2003 (32-bit)
NOTE Windows NT 4.0 drivers can be installed only by using the Add Printer wizard.
Standalone drivers
The HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS emulation drivers and unidrivers are available individually to
support the following operating systems:
■
Windows 98 and Windows Me
■
Windows NT 4.0
■
Windows 2000
■
Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit)
■
Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit)
■
Mac OS 9.x
■
Mac OS X (10.1 or later)
Structure and availability of the software CD
21
Purpose and scope
Other operating systems
Drivers and related software are available for these additional operating environments:
■
UNIX
■
Linux
■
OS/2
■
HP Open VMS
Software component availability
The following table lists the availability of HP LaserJet software components by operating system.
NOTE In the following table, "98/Me" refers to Windows 98 and Windows Me; "4.0" refers to
Windows NT 4.0; "2000" refers to Windows 2000; "XP" refers to Windows XP; and "XP 64"
refers to 64-bit drivers for Windows XP.
Table 1-9 Software component availability for HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer
Component
98/Me
4.0
2000/XP1
XP 64
x
x
HP PCL 5e and PCL 6 unidrivers
x
x
PS Emulation Unidriver
x
x
Drivers
HP traditional PCL 5e and PCL 6 drivers
PS Emulation Driver
x
x
HP Driver Preconfiguration
x
x
x
x
Common Windows Installer
x
x
x
x
Customization Utility Wizard
x
x
x
x
CD Browser
x
x
x
x
Add Printer Wizard install
x
x
x
x
Web Registration
x
x
x
x
Installer
1
22
This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
1
Purpose and scope
Software description
Software description
2
Introduction
The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer comes with software and installers for Microsoft
Windows and Apple Computer, Inc., Macintosh systems. Linux and UNIX systems are supported,
and software is available on the Web. For information about specific system installers, drivers, and
components, see the section that corresponds to that system.
This chapter contains information about the following topics:
Introduction
●
Supported operating systems
●
Technology background information
23
Supported operating systems
The support for Windows operating systems (OSs) offers a full-featured configuration of the
HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers; support for OSs that are not described in this document
offer varying levels of functionality. The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printing-system software,
including HP PCL 5e, PCL 6, and PS emulation drivers, supports the following OSs:
Software description
■
Windows 98
■
Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me)
■
Windows NT 4.0 (Service packs 3 through 6)
■
Windows 2000 (Service packs 1 and 2)
■
Windows XP Home Edition
■
Windows XP Professional (Service pack 1 and greater)
■
Windows Server 2003
NOTE Throughout this manual, Windows XP is used to denote Windows XP Home Edition,
Windows XP Professional, and Windows Server 2003 unless noted otherwise.
The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printing system software also supports the following
operating environments:
■
Mac OS 9 and Mac OS X (10.1 or later)
■
Linux (available at www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting)
■
UNIX (available at www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software)
■
Windows Terminal Server
■
Citrix Terminal Server
■
Windows Cluster Server 8
■
HP OpenVMS (available at h71000.www7.hp.com/openvms/print/)
■
Tru64 UNIX printing. For further information, go to h30097.www3.hp.com/printing/
■
SAP printing. For further information, go to www.hp.com/go/sap/print
■
OS/2
For more information about the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers, go to www.hp.com/
support/lj2410 for the HP LaserJet 2410 printer, www.hp.com/support/lj2420 for the HP LaserJet
2420 printer, or www.hp.com/support/lj2430 for the HP LaserJet 2430 printer.
24
2
Software description
Technology background information
■
Driver Configuration
■
HP Driver Preconfiguration
■
Euro character
■
HP Embedded Web Server
■
HP Toolbox
■
HP Web Jetadmin
■
Bluetooth
■
Remote firmware update
■
Printing print-ready documents from a command line
■
Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems
Software description
This section contains information about the following topics:
Driver Configuration
The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 print drivers feature bidirectional communication technology
which, in supported environments, provides automatic discovery and driver configuration for product
accessories. Accessories that are automatically discovered and configured include the optional 500sheet paper tray assembly (Tray 3), the duplexing unit for automatic two-sided printing, the printer
memory, and the job-storage features.
Automatic discovery and driver configuration through bidirectional communication occurs in the
following circumstances:
■
Upon every installation of a print driver, when using Enterprise Autoconfiguration (EAC)
■
When using the Update Now feature for a driver that is already installed
Bidirectional communication
In environments that support bidirectional communication, the computer communicates with the
product during installation, determines the physical configuration, and then configures the driver
accordingly.
Bidirectional communication is the capability of the product to respond to data inquiries from the
computer and report back information, such as what type of print media is available or what
accessories are connected to the product. If the connection does not have this capability (that is, if it
has no bidirectional mode), it can only accept commands from the host and cannot report information
back to the host computer.
Bidirectional communication depends on your network operating system and on the type of
connection you have between your computer and the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers.
When you install the HP Toolbox, bidirectional communication is always enabled. Installing the
HP Toolbox activates the HP Network Registry Agent (HPNRA) to ensure constant communication
between your computer and the printer. When you install a driver without installing the HP Toolbox at
Technology background information
25
the same time, bidirectional communication is enabled only to configure the driver, and is then
disabled unless the driver's Update Now feature is used to update the driver.
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
Software description
Enterprise AutoConfiguration (EAC) uses bidirectional communication to provide autoconfiguration
functionality for installation of the print driver over a network, whether you use the installer on your
printing-system software CD or the Add Printer wizard to install the driver. Driver installation that
includes EAC is configured with the same settings as the physical configuration of the device.
Configuration occurs without user interaction. If bidirectional-communication software has been
installed previously, EAC is not activated, and the pre-existing bidirectional-communication software
is used to configure the print driver.
If bidirectional communication software has not been installed, EAC installs bidirectionalcommunication software that allows it to communicate with the product and automatically match the
print driver with the actual product configuration. EAC is activated during installation of the driver or
whenever the Update Now feature is used.
If the configuration of the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer changes after installation, the
driver can be automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support
bidirectional communication by using the Update Now feature. For example, if the HP LaserJet 2410,
2420, and 2430 printer is installed and an optional paper-handling accessory is added later, you can
use the Update Now feature to query the product and update the settings to match the product's
configuration.
The Update Now feature triggers the driver to recheck the registry for new information. The feature
automatically updates the registry and changes the configuration information that appears on the
Configure tab if you are using an HP traditional PCL 6 or PCL 5e driver, and on the Device
Settings tab if you are using an HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, or HP PS emulation unidriver.
NOTE If you are using an HP PCL or PS Emulation Unidriver, you must select Update Now
through the Automatic Configuration setting on Device Settings tab in the Properties
section of the driver. If you are using an HP traditional PCL 6 orPCL 5e driver, you must click
the Update Now button on the Configure tab in the Properties section of the driver. The
Update Now feature is not available with the PS Emulation Driver.
The following tables show the availability of EAC for various operating systems and network
environments that support bidirectional communication.
Table 2-1 EAC availability in Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Share
Method
Installer
26
Connection type
Direct
connect
Parallel
Network
Jetdirect
Microsoft Windows
Microsoft Share1
98
Me
NT 4.0
2000
XP
2000/XP
host
with
2000/XP
client
NT 4.0
host
with NT
4.0 client
TCP/IP
x
x
x
x
x
x
x2
IPX/SPX
x
x
x
x
x
x
x2
USB
2
Software description
Table 2-1 EAC availability in Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Share (continued)
Connection type
Microsoft Windows
Standard
Add
Printer
Direct
connect
Parallel
Network
Jetdirect
Microsoft Share1
98
Me
NT 4.0
2000
XP
2000/XP
host
with
2000/XP
client
NT 4.0
host
with NT
4.0 client
TCP/IP
(HP)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x2
TCP/IP
(MS)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x2
IPX/SPX
(HP)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x2
TCP/IP
x
x
x
x
x
x
IPX/SPX
x
x
x
x
x
x
x2
TCP/IP
(HP)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x2
x
x
x
x2
x
x
x
x2
USB
Standard
TCP/IP
(MS)
IPX/SPX
(HP)
1
2
Software description
Method
x
x
x
This column represents the following Microsoft Share configurations: Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 host with
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 98, or Windows Me client; Windows NT 4.0 host with Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows 2003,
Windows 98, or Windows Me client; Windows 98 or Windows Me host with any client.
In this environment, client machines use Point and Print to download the configured driver from the host.
Table 2-2 EAC availability in Novell Netware environments
Method
Connection type
Novell
Netware 5.x
Netware 4.x
Installer
Direct connect
Bindery
queue
NDS queue
Bindery
queue
NT 4.0
x
x
x
x
Parallel
USB
Network
Jetdirect
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
Standard
TCP/IP (HP)
TCP/IP (MS1)
IPX/SPX (HP)
1
Bidirectional functionality is supported only with the client software from Novell. It is not supported with Microsoft (MS) Client Service for
NetWare.
Technology background information
27
HP Driver Preconfiguration
HP Driver Preconfiguration is a software architecture and set of tools that permits HP printing-system
software to be customized and distributed in managed corporate printing environments. Using HP
Driver Preconfiguration, information technology (IT) administrators in corporate and enterprise
environments can preconfigure the printing and device defaults for HP print drivers before installing
the drivers in the network environment.
Software description
HP Driver Preconfiguration is most beneficial when configuring print drivers for multiple workstations
or print servers for print queues that share the same configuration. Two types of features can be
configured: device settings and printing-preferences settings. The driver is configured to match the
product hardware so that gaining access to all of the product accessories through the driver is
enabled correctly (for example, for duplexing units and additional input trays). Most driver feature
settings can also be configured.
HP Preconfiguration configures the driver to match the accessories installed on the product, or to
match the settings that IT administrators make in the configuration (.CFG) file (for example, optional
trays, total amount of memory, job-storage settings, or mopier settings).
The preconfiguration process consists of three basic steps: driver acquisition, driver preconfiguration,
and driver installation and deployment. These steps can be accomplished in different ways,
depending on the tool that is being used to define the configuration.
The configuration process for driver preconfiguration is supported through three distinct tools. All
three are designed with the same basic user interface controls for interacting with the configuration
(.CFG) file, but are packaged differently, either to support established product installation workflows
or to leave the deployment and installation of the driver entirely up to the user. The following tools
support driver preconfiguration:
■
HP Driver Configuration Editor. The HP Driver Configuration Editor is a small, standalone
Windows software program that the administrator can use to open the .CFG file that is
associated with a particular driver and make modifications that are applied when that driver is
installed on the target computer. It is intended for use in environments that have an established
process for deploying drivers. This is the preconfiguration tool of choice to support any Novell or
HP Print Server Appliance (PSA) Point and Print environments. It is used in the way that any
ordinary Windows software program is used.
The HP Driver Configuration Editor is available from www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw.
■
The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin. HP Web Jetadmin provides a queuecreation program that can be used to create printer queues on any Windows NT 4.0, Windows
2000, Windows XP, or Windows 2003 server or workstation. The HP Web Jetadmin Driver
Configuration Plugin adds a number of screens to the existing queue-creation workflow from
which the drivers that are being installed for the queues can be customized as part of the
process. The plug-in is limited to Internet Explorer browsers. Netscape Navigator™ is not
supported.
The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin is available from www.hp.com/sbso/tpm/
web_jetadminplugin.html.
■
HP Customization Utility/Silent Installer. The Customization Utility features an install-time
mode of HP Driver Preconfiguration. IT administrators can use the utility to preconfigure the
drivers for a printing-system software driver installation that uses the silent installer.
Detailed information about gaining access to and installing these tools can be found in the HP Driver
Preconfiguration User Guide, which is available on the printing-system software CD.
28
2
Software description
Lockable features
The following driver features can be locked to prevent end-users from changing settings:
■
Print on Both Sides (Duplex)
■
Media Type
■
Paper Source
Continuous export
The term "continuous export" refers to the ability of the driver to copy the latest driver settings back
to the working copy of the preconfiguration file. Using this feature, the exported values can be
transferred when a compatible version of the driver is used to upgrade the print driver. For instance,
if orientation is set to Landscape in an installed version of the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430
PCL 6 driver for Windows NT 4.0, then the orientation setting in the newly upgraded HP LaserJet
2410, 2420, and 2430 HP PCL 6 Unidriver or HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver for Windows XP and
Windows Server 2003 is automatically set to "Landscape." The continuous export feature functions
transparently from the user's perspective and works only between drivers of identical product models.
NOTE Not all of the driver parameters can be exported; however, the list is always the same
for those that can be preconfigured.
The following table shows drivers and operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration.
Table 2-3 Operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration
1
2
Driver
Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
Windows XP2
HP Traditional
PCL 6 Driver
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A1
N/A
HP Traditional
PCL 5e Driver
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
PS Emulation
Driver
No
No
No
N/A
N/A
HP PCL 6
Unidriver
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
HP PCL 5e
Unidriver
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
PS Emulation
Unidriver
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
N/A: Not applicable; the driver is not supported in this operating system.
This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check tool
NOTE This tool will become available after product release.
Technology background information
29
Software description
When a feature is locked, the selected default option is the only option that is available to users.
Generally, the feature is unavailable in the driver user interface after it has been installed.
The HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check tool is a Web-based diagnostic software that enables you to
determine whether you are using the correct and most current print driver for your HP LaserJet 2410,
2420, and 2430 printer. To access the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check tool, go to
http://www.hp.com/go/drivercheck, or go to the HP Business Support Center (BSC) at
http://www.hp.com/go/bsc, select the self-help resources link on the left navigation bar, and then
select automatic driver checker to run the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check tool.
Software description
When you run the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check tool, you are presented with a list of products
that are currently installed on your computer. Select the HP product that you would like to check and
the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check tool gathers information about your product, drivers, and
system setup. The data gathered is used for diagnosing your software driver configuration and for
checking your print driver update needs. The tool will then verify whether you are using the latest
driver, inform you if you are using an incorrect driver for your HP product, and let you know if there is
an updated driver version available for your product. If there is an update available, the tool enables
you to download and install the latest driver version by clicking on it.
The data gathered by the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check tool is stored anonymously for analysis
and continuous improvement of HP diagnostic tools. No private data is needed or accessed on your
computer.
HP Printer Access Tool
NOTE This tool will become available after product release.
The HP Printer Access Tool is a Web-based application that provides a single point of access to the
embedded Web server pages for each networked product in the user's local print folder, making it
easy to remotely manage the products in an unmanaged network environment without affecting
performance or reliability. For more information about the HP Embedded Web Server, see the HP
Embedded Web Server section of this guide.
To access the HP Printer Access Tool, follow these steps:
NOTE The HP Printer Access Tool must be selected during installation to be available.
1
Select Start.
2
Select Programs.
3
Select HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430, and then select HP Printer Access Tool.
4
Click on the appropriate product name to access the EWS pages for that product.
Euro character
The euro is the name for the currency of the European Union (EU). This unit was launched on
January 1, 1999. The euro has changed the way business is conducted in Europe and has affected
every company and industry in the world. It is vital that companies understand and prepare for the
changes the euro brings.
The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer includes euro characters for each of the internal
fonts. The product can print the euro character in the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0,
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems. Hewlett-Packard is
committed to maximizing document portability through supporting and promoting euro-symbol
standards.
30
2
Software description
HP Embedded Web Server and HP Toolbox
■
HP Toolbox is used to manage the products that are installed on the client machine where
HP Toolbox is installed. HP Toolbox gets the address of the printers from the registry entry of the
port that the printer is using.
■
HP Toolbox can also be used to manage locally connected products.
■
To access HP EWS the user just needs to know the transmission control protocol/Internet
protocol (TCP/IP) address of the product. No software needs to be installed on the user's
computer.
■
For most products, HP EWS can be directly accessed only when both product and computer are
equipped with network cards (or some form of network connection). In these cases the Web
browser directly accesses the product's TCP/IP address. The only Web pages available are
those that are served from the product.
■
HP Toolbox supports network and direct connect forms of printer connectivity. The browser
directs itself to a locally hosted TCP/IP service that monitors the printing port (be it network or
direct connect). HP Toolbox Web pages are generated through a combination of locally installed
Web content and data that is retrieved from the product. These Web pages also facilitate product
control. On some products, HP Toolbox provides a link to the printer's HP EWS page, but these
are not accessed directly through the browser, but rather through the locally hosted TCP/IP
service.
■
Toolbox provides the Select Device page, which is used to choose which of the locally installed
devices to manage (if more than one has been installed).
The HP EWS and HP Toolbox utilities are described in detail in the following sections.
HP Embedded Web Server
The HP EWS is a standard feature for the HP LaserJet 2420d, 2420n, 2420dn, 2430t, 2430tn, and
2430dtn printers. It is not supported for HP LaserJet 2410 and 2420 printers.
The HP EWS provides a simple, easy-to-use solution for one-to-one product management. In offices
that have a limited number of products, remote management of printing devices can be
accomplished without installing any management software, such as HP Web Jetadmin. The only
requirement is that the management console have a supported Web browser.
In environments with a larger number of products, where one-to-one management is impractical, the
HP EWS and HP Web Jetadmin work together to provide scalable remote product management. Use
HP Web Jetadmin for consolidated management tasks, when you want to perform operations on a
selected set of products instead of on individual products. For such environments, HP provides
hooks between the HP EWS and HP Web Jetadmin so that you can configure HP EWS features on
multiple products in one operation. For example, you can set the security password for the HP EWS
simultaneously on a cluster of products.
For additional information and a copy of the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide, go to
www.hp.com/support/lj2410 for the HP LaserJet 2410 printer, www.hp.com/support/lj2420 for the HP
LaserJet 2420 printer, or www.hp.com/support/lj2430 for the HP LaserJet 2430 printer.
Technology background information
31
Software description
HP embedded Web server (HP EWS) and HP Toolbox are both tools that can be used to remotely
configure products on a network. Both HP EWS and HP Toolbox are used with a Web browser and
they have a similar look and feel. Many of the pages in HP EWS are nearly identical to HP Toolbox
pages. However, there are several key differences between the two utilities:
To view information about the product by using the HP EWS, open a supported Web browser and
type in the product TCP/IP address or host name. To find the TCP/IP address, look for IP Address
on the enhanced input/output (EIO) Jetdirect page, in the TCP/IP section. To find the host name of
the product, look for Host Name in the TCP/IP section.
You also can view information about an installed HP Jetdirect print server by clicking the Networking
tab in the HP EWS window.
To print a copy of the EIO Jetdirect page from the control-panel display, follow these steps:
Software description
1
Press the SELECT button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press the SELECT button.
3
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION.
4
Press the SELECT button to print the configuration page.
5
Look in the configuration page section marked "TCP/IP" for the TCP/IP address. (The EIO
Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout.)
The HP EWS frame
Each screen in the HP EWS has a frame that contains a top banner, three category tabs, a leftaligned navigation menu bar, and a main-content area. Selecting one of the category tabs causes
the corresponding left-aligned navigation bar to appear. The left-aligned navigation menu includes
links to content that is appropriate for that tab. The main-content area shows information and opens
options in response to navigation tab selections and menu bar selections.
See the following sections for more information about each tab or area:
■
Information tab
■
Settings tab
■
Networking tab
Information tab
The following information is available on the HP EWS Information tab. To view the information, click
the menu items on the left side of the HP EWS Information tab.
NOTE If an HP EWS password has been set, the Information tab is the only tab that is
visible until the user logs in. See Security for more information.
Not all of the screens on the tab are shown in this document. For more information, see the
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide.
32
■
Device Status screen. This screen provides current status information about the product.
■
Configuration Page. This screen provides information about the configuration of the product.
■
Supplies Status. This screen provides information about the print cartridge and the total pages
that have been printed, and the serial number of the product.
■
Event log. This screen provides information about reported product errors.
2
Software description
Usage page. This screen provides a page count for each size of media that has passed through
the device, as well as the number of duplexed pages.
■
Device Information. This screen shows device information, such as the product TCP/IP address
and serial number.
■
Control Panel. This screen shows the product control panel.
■
Print. You can use this screen to print documents that are print-ready, such as those generated
by a "print to file" driver option, .PCL documents, .PS documents, .PDF files, and text (.TXT) files.
Links to off-product solutions
Links on the HP EWS screens provide an easy way to locate information or complete tasks.
■
hp instant support. This link connects you to a set of dynamic Web resources that help you
solve specific problems and determine additional services that might be available for your device.
Specific status and configuration information about the product is retained and directed to the
"Solve a Problem" Web site. This site offers targeted support content and messages to help
resolve problems as quickly as possible.
■
Order Supplies. This link connects you to an HP product supplies screen from which you can
order genuine HP supplies for your product.
■
Product Support. This link connects to an HP product-support screen from which you can
search for information, contact the HP customer care home page, or find additional resources for
your product.
Device Status screen
Status information, such as whether the product is online or the toner is low, is available through your
Web browser on a computer that is linked directly to the product. You can view this information
without physically going to the product to identify the status. The following illustration shows how this
information is presented on the product Web page.
Technology background information
33
Software description
■
Software description
Figure 2-1 Information tab – Device Status screen
Configuration Page
You can gain access to the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer configuration page remotely
through the HP EWS. The HP EWS Configuration Page screen provides configuration information
about the product in the same way as the configuration page that is printed from the product. The
following illustration shows an example of a configuration page viewed remotely through the HP EWS.
34
2
Software description
Software description
Figure 2-2 Information tab – Configuration Page
Settings tab
The following information is available on the HP EWS Settings tab. To view the information, click the
menu items on the left side of the HP EWS Settings tab. The Settings tab is shown in the Configure
device section.
Technology background information
35
Not all of the screens on the tab are shown in this document. For more information, see the
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide.
Software description
■
Configure Device. Use the Configure Device screen to print product information pages and
configure the product remotely.
■
E-mail Server. Use the E-mail Server screen to configure e-mail settings for outgoing alert email messages.
■
Alerts. IT administrators can set up the product to send alerts to anyone through e-mail
messages.
■
AutoSend. Use the AutoSend screen to send product configuration and supplies-usage
information periodically to your service provider.
■
Security. Use the Security screen to manage security on the product.
■
Edit Other Links. Use the Edit Other Links screen to add or customize up to five links to the
Web sites of your choice.
■
Device Information. Use the Device Information screen to provide a name of your choice for
the product, assign an asset number, and configure the company name, the person to contact
about the product, and the physical location of the product.
■
Language. Use the Language screen to select the language in which the HP EWS screens
appear.
■
Date & Time. Use the Date & Time screen to set the correct date and time for the product.
■
Wake Time Settings on the Wake Time screen can be set to wake the product up at a certain
time on a daily basis. There can only be one wake time setting per day; however, each day can
have a different wake time. The sleep mode delay can also be set on this page.
Configure device
You can obtain product configuration information through a Web browser by opening the HP EWS
screen and changing the basic configuration information on the Settings tab. Security and password
controls give management information system managers the level of control that they require within
their network environments. The following illustration shows an example of product options that can
be configured remotely.
36
2
Software description
Software description
Figure 2-3 Settings tab – Configure Device screen
Alerts
The product can automatically send e-mail alerts about printing problems or job status to specified email addresses. For example, if toner is low, the product can notify the person who is responsible for
ordering or changing the toner. If a product failure occurs, the product can send an e-mail alert
directly to the person who is responsible for fixing the problem. These e-mail alerts can be configured
to be sent to any device that can accept e-mail, such as digital phones, pagers, and personal digital
assistants (PDAs). In large environments, administrators can route e-mail addresses to list-servers or
uniform resource locators (URLs) for expanded notification.
Technology background information
37
Software description
Figure 2-4 Settings tab – Alerts screen
Security
The HP EWS screens that appear, and the settings on them, vary according to how you gain access
to the HP EWS: as a general user, an IT administrator, or a service provider. To control access to the
HP EWS screens, a password can be set on the Security page.
38
2
Software description
Software description
Figure 2-5 Settings tab – Security screen
In a password-protected HP EWS, only the Information tab is available to users who do not log in by
using the password. If no password has been set (which is the default), all of the tabs are visible.
If a password has been set, you must log on as an IT administrator or a service provider to gain
access to the protected HP EWS tabs (Settings, Digital Sending, and Networking).
Networking tab
The following options are available on the HP EWS Networking tab.
Not all of the screens on the tab are shown in this document. For more information, see the
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide.
Technology background information
39
Software description
Figure 2-6 Networking tab - Configuration section
The menu on the left side of the screen contains other networking options under three categories:
configuration, security, and diagnostics. For more information, see the HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide.
Configuration section
■
Network Settings
■
Other Settings
■
Privacy Settings
■
Select Language
Security section
40
■
Settings
■
Authorization
■
Mgmt. Protocols
2
Software description
Diagnostics section
■
Network Statistics
■
Protocol Info
■
Configuration Page
Network settings
■
TCP/IP
■
Internetwork packet exchange/Sequenced packet exchange (IPX/SPX)
■
AppleTalk
■
Data link control/logical link control (DLC/LLC)
■
Simple network management protocol (SNMP)
Software description
From the Networking tab, you can enable and configure the following network protocols:
HP Toolbox
The HP Toolbox is a series of Web pages and supporting software tools that provide access to the
HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer embedded Web servers and other firmware functions,
making them available on a browser-driven user interface where product properties can be viewed
and manipulated.
The HP Toolbox provides links to product status information, help information, and tools for
diagnosing and solving problems. The HP Toolbox also provides product status and settings
information from the embedded Web server, by clicking the Device Settings button in the upperright corner of each of the four tabs.
NOTE Because HP EWS is not supported for HP LaserJet 2410 and 2420 (base model)
printers, the link to the embedded Web server will not be functional for these printer models.
HP Toolbox requirements
HP Toolbox requires one of these recent Internet browsers in order to show embedded Web server
pages:
■
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 or later (Internet Explorer 5.1 or later for Macintosh)
■
Netscape Navigator 7.0 or later (Netscape Navigator 7.0 or later for Macintosh)
■
Opera Software ASA Opera 7.0 for Windows
■
Safari 1.0 software for Macintosh
These browser requirements are not necessarily minimum standards, but they are the minimum
tested environments. Other, untested browsers might also provide access to the HP Toolbox screens.
The HP Toolbox is supported only for Windows 98 and later operating systems (Windows Me,
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003). You must have performed a complete
software installation in order to use the HP Toolbox.
Technology background information
41
When the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer is connected both through a network using an
HP Jetdirect card and through a local parallel or USB connection, the network connection takes
precedence. On a network connection, bidirectional communication is supported through a TCP/IP
connection. When the product is connected using both a parallel and a USB connection, the parallel
connection takes precedence, and the USB connection is disconnected.
Installing HP Toolbox
To install HP Toolbox, perform a custom installation and select hp LaserJet toolbox from the Setup
dialog.
Software description
NOTE It is necessary to install HP Toolbox for each product, even when HP Toolbox is
currently in use for other products.
Uninstalling HP Toolbox
NOTE This feature will become available after product introduction.
You can uninstall HP Toolbox without uninstalling the rest of the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430
print driver software. To uninstall HP Toolbox, follow these steps:
1
Click Start.
2
Click Programs.
3
Click HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 and select Uninstall hp LaserJet Toolbox. The
uninstall dialog will appear.
To view the HP Toolbox
To open the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 Toolbox, on the Start menu, point to Programs,
point to hp LaserJet 2410 2420 2430, and then click hp LaserJet toolbox.
The HP Toolbox opens in your Web browser. The HP Toolbox software contains four tabs:
■
the Status tab
■
the Troubleshooting tab
■
the Alerts tab
■
the Documentation tab
These tabs are on local browser screens that are installed when you install the HP Toolbox, and you
do not need an Internet service provider to view them.
The HP Toolbox also contains an area with links to the HP Web site. While you do not need to have
Internet access to open and use the HP Toolbox, you must have Internet access in order to gain
access to the sites that are associated with the links in the Other Links area.
If your computer is connected to the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer through a network,
you can bookmark the URL of the HP Toolbox so that you can return to it quickly in the future.
42
2
Software description
The HP Toolbox Frame
Each screen in the HP Toolbox has a frame that contains a top banner, four category tabs, a leftaligned navigation menu bar, and a main-content area. Selecting one of the category tabs causes
the corresponding left-aligned navigation bar to appear. The left-aligned navigation menu includes
links to the content that is appropriate for that tab. The main-content area shows information and
options in response to selections that you make on an HP Toolbox screen.
■
Top banner
■
Status tab
■
Troubleshooting tab
■
Alerts tab
■
Documentation tab
■
Other Links
Software description
See the following sections for more information about each tab or area:
Top banner
The top banner has an HP logo. Next to the HP logo, the title of the page appears followed by the
product name and a copyright notice. The top banner is the same for all of the HP Toolbox Web
pages. The HP logo contains a link to the HP Web site (www.hp.com).
Status tab
The Status tab, with the Device Status setting selected, is shown in the following illustration.
NOTE Because HP EWS is not supported for HP LaserJet 2410 and 2420 (base model)
printers, the Toolbox Status tabs is also not available for these printers. Only the
Troubleshooting, Alerts, and Documentation tabs will appear.
Technology background information
43
Software description
Figure 2-7 Toolbox Status tab
The Status tab provides the following options:
44
■
Device Status. This screen shows the percentage of life remaining for each consumable, the
status and configuration information for the input trays and output bins, and the accessories that
are installed on the product.
■
Supplies Status. This screen shows the levels remaining for all consumables and the HP part
numbers for each consumable. It is helpful to have the part numbers available when it is time to
order supplies.
■
Print Info Pages. Print the configuration page and various other information pages that are
available for the product, such as the configuration page, the Supplies Status page, and the
Menu Map.
■
toolbox Links. Select a device, view current alerts, or view the HP Toolbox Web site in text-only
format (without graphics).
■
Other Links. For information about these links, see Links to off-product solutions in the HP
Embedded Web Server section of this guide.
2
Software description
Troubleshooting tab
■
Print Quality Tools
■
Maintenance
■
Error Messages
■
Paper Jams
■
Supported Media
■
Printer Pages
Software description
The navigation bar on the Troubleshooting tab contains links to the information pages of the
product. (Some of these pages are also available from other sources, such as the HP Embedded
Web Server or the product itself.) From the Troubleshooting tab, you can view the following screens:
NOTE Netscape users must download a plug-in so that product management features can
operate correctly. A link and instructions are provided in the Other Links section. After you
click a link, a pop-up window appears that provides information and instructions about how to
locate this plug-in.
Print Quality Tools
The Print Quality Tools screen, shown in the following illustration, provides options for general
troubleshooting and Print Quality Troubleshooting Pages.
Figure 2-8 Troubleshooting tab – Print Quality Tools
Technology background information
45
Maintenance
The Maintenance tab is shown in the following illustration.
Software description
Figure 2-9 Troubleshooting tab – Maintenance page
The Maintenance screen contains information about managing and replacing print cartridges.
Error Messages
The Interpreting control panel message screen, which appears when you click Error Messages
and then select Interpreting control-panel messages, is shown in the following illustration.
46
2
Software description
Software description
Figure 2-10 Troubleshooting tab – Interpreting control-panel messages
The Interpreting control panel messages screen lists messages that might appear in the control
panel on the product or in the toolbox.
NOTE This illustration is provided as an example only. The complete screen is not shown.
Paper Jams
The Paper jams screen is shown in the following illustration.
Technology background information
47
Software description
Figure 2-11 Troubleshooting tab – Paper Jams page
Click the Typical jam locations on the Paper Jam Option screen to see the internal paper path and
potential jam locations.
Supported Media
The Supported Media screen is shown in the following illustration.
48
2
Software description
Software description
Figure 2-12 Troubleshooting tab – Supported Media page
The Supported Media screen has instructions for ordering product parts, accessories and supplies.
Printer Pages
The Printer Pages screen is shown in the following illustration.
Technology background information
49
Software description
Figure 2-13 Troubleshooting tab – Printer Pages
The Printer Pages screen shows a list of useful information pages that the product generates, with a
description of the purpose of each page. You can also print the pages directly from this screen.
Alerts tab
The Alerts tab is shown in the following illustration.
50
2
Software description
Software description
Figure 2-14 Alerts tab
The navigation bar on the Alerts tab contains links to the information pages for the product. Some of
these pages are also available from other sources, such as the embedded Web server or the product
itself. From this section, you can view the following screens:
■
Set up Status Alerts
■
Administrative Settings
The Set up Status Alerts page allows you to turn on or off alert messages, which will notify you
when the product has a problem printing.
When any of these alert messages appears on the users's screen, it includes a check box that allows
the user to turn off that particular type of alert message. For example, if a supply alert is displayed,
the user can check the check box to disable all future supply alerts. If the user later wants to turn
these alerts back on, they will need to come to the Alerts tab to do so.
The Administrative Settings screen, allows you to change the rate at which the product is checked
for alerts.
Documentation tab
The Documentation tab is shown in the following illustration.
Technology background information
51
Software description
Figure 2-15 Documentation tab – Install Notes page
The navigation bar on the Documentation tab contains links to these information sources:
■
Install Notes. Contains specific installation instructions and information regarding your product.
■
User Guide. Contains information about product usage, warranty, specifications, and support.
The HTML format (for Windows-based computers only) allows you to search easily for specific
topics and jump between topics.
The User Guide is also available in .PDF file format, which can be printed by page or by chapter,
or you can print the entire document. The printed document is formatted as a traditional book.
Linking to the HP Embedded Web Server
To gain access to the HP Embedded Web Server, click the Device Settings button in the upper right
of any HP Toolbox screen. You can also open a browser window and type in the HP Jetdirect IP
address.
NOTE Because HP EWS is not supported for HP LaserJet 2410 and 2420 (base model)
printers, the link to the embedded Web server will not be functional for these printer models.
The HP Toolbox Device Status option on the Status tab is shown in the following illustration.
52
2
Software description
Software description
Figure 2-16 Status tab with Device Settings button
For additional information and a copy of the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide, go to
www.hp.com/support/lj2410 for the HP LaserJet 2410 printer, www.hp.com/support/lj2420 for the HP
LaserJet 2420 printer, or www.hp.com/support/lj2430 for the HP LaserJet 2430 printer
Other Links
This section contains links that connect you to the Internet. These links appear on the left
navigational bar throughout the HP Toolbox screens. You must have Internet access in order to use
any of these links. If you use a dial-up connection and did not connect when you first opened the
HP Toolbox, you must connect before you can visit these Web sites. Connecting might require that
you close the HP Toolbox and reopen it.
HP Instant Support.This link connects you to a set of dynamic Web resources that you can use to
solve specific problems and determine additional services that might be available for your product.
Specific status and configuration information about the product is retained and directed to the Solve
a Problem Web site, which offers targeted support content and messages to help resolve problems
as quickly as possible.
Product Registration. Click this link to connect to a screen where you can register your
HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer.
Order Supplies. Click this link to connect to an ordering screen where you can order genuine HP
supplies, such as print cartridges and print media.
Product Support. This link connects you with an HP product-support screen from which you can
search for information, contact the HP customer care home page, or find additional resources for
your product.
Technology background information
53
HP Web Jetadmin
Use HP Web Jetadmin and a Web browser to manage HP Jetdirect connected products within your
intranet. HP Web Jetadmin is a browser-based management tool, and should be installed only on a
single network-administration server. It can be installed and run on Red Hat Linux; SuSE Linux;
Windows NT 4.0 Server and Workstation; Windows 2000 Professional, Server, and Advanced
Server; Windows XP Professional, and Windows Server 2003 systems.
To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and for the latest list of supported host systems,
go to www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin
Software description
When installed on a host server, any client can use HP Web Jetadmin through a supported Web
browser (such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 and 6.0 or Netscape Navigator 7.0).
HP Web Jetadmin has the following features:
■
Task-oriented user interface that provides configurable views for network managers
■
User profiles that can be customized to let network administrators include only the function that is
being viewed or used
■
Routing of instant e-mail notification of hardware failure, low supplies, and other product
problems to different people
■
Remote installation and management from anywhere, using only a standard Web browser
■
Advanced automatic discovery of peripherals on the network without manually typing information
about each product into a database
■
Simple integration into enterprise-management packages
■
Capacity to find peripherals based on parameters such as the Internet protocol (IP) address,
color capability, and model name
■
Capacity to organize peripherals into logical groups, with an option that provides virtual office
maps for easy navigation
■
Capability to manage and configure multiple products at one time.
The following table lists the availability of HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer remote
management and status tools by operating system.
NOTE In the following table, "98/Me" refers to Windows 98 and Windows Me; "4.0" refers to
Windows NT 4.0; "2000" refers to Windows 2000; "XP" refers to Windows XP; and "XP 64"
refers to 64-bit drivers for Windows XP.
Table 2-4 Availability of remote management and status tools
Component
54
98/Me
4.0
2000/XP
XP 64
OS/2
Mac
UNIX
Linux
HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430
plug-in for Web
x
x
Device Storage Manager for Web
x
x
x
x
Preconfiguration plug-in for Web
x
x
x
x
x
2
Software description
The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printing-system software CD provides the following link to
download the latest version of the HP Web Jetadmin software: www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin.
Click support on the main screen in the installer CD Browser, and then click hp web jetadmin. The
following table shows the supporting operating systems and hardware for HP Web Jetadmin.
Protocols
Compatible operating systems
■
TCP/IP
■
IPX/SPX
■
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional, Windows Server,
and Windows Advanced Server
■
Microsoft Windows XP Professional with service pack 1
and Windows Server 2003
■
Microsoft Windows NT Server and Workstation with
service pack 3 or later
■
Red Hat Linux 9.0
■
SuSE Linux v. 9.0
Shared print queue creation support
■
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional, Server and
Advanced Server
■
Microsoft Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003
■
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 Server and Workstation
■
HP-UX® 11.0
■
Red Hat Linux 9.0
■
Solaris 7 and 8
■
SuSE Linux 9.0
■
Novell NetWare 5.1 and 6.0 (IPX only) that uses
Netware Client 4.9 (or that uses HP Web Jetadmin only
on a Microsoft Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 system)
Supported products
All HP and non-HP products that are connected through HP
Jetdirect print servers, and standard Management
Information Base-compliant (MIB-compliant) third-party
network-connected products
Supported browsers
■
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0, for Windows only
■
Netscape 7.1 (English) for Linux only
Technology background information
55
Software description
Table 2-5 HP Web Jetadmin support
Bluetooth
Bluetooth®* wireless technology is a low-power, short-range radio technology that can be used to
wirelessly connect computers, printers, personal digital assistants (PDAs), cell phones, and other
devices.
* Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under
license.
Software description
Because Bluetooth wireless technology uses radio signals, devices do not have to be in the same
room, office, or cubicle and do not require an unobstructed line of sight in order to communicate. This
wireless technology increases portability and efficiency within business networks.
The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer can use a Bluetooth adapter (hp bt1300) to
incorporate Bluetooth wireless technology. The adapter is available for either USB or parallel
connections. The adapter has a 10-meter line-of-site operation range in the 2.5 GHz ISM band and
can achieve data transfer rates up to 723 Kbps. The device supports the following Bluetooth profiles:
■
Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile (HCRP)
■
Serial Port Profile (SPP)
■
Object Push Profile (OPP)
■
Basic Imaging Profile (BIP)
■
Basic Printing Profile (BPP) with XHTML-Print
Remote firmware update
The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers feature remote firmware update (RFU) capability.
The method for downloading remote firmware updates from the Web site is similar to that used to
download the latest printing-system software and print drivers.
The process for remotely upgrading firmware involves three steps:
1
Determine the current level of firmware that is installed on the printer.
2
Go to the HP Web site and download the latest firmware to your computer.
3
Download the new firmware to the product.
Determining the current level of firmware
To determine the current level of firmware, view the configuration page. To print a configuration
page, follow these instructions.
56
1
Press the SELECT button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press the SELECT button.
3
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION.
4
Press the SELECT button to print the configuration page.
5
Look in the "Printer Information" section on the configuration page for the firmware date code.
The firmware date code looks something like this: 20031002 07.000.0.
2
Software description
Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site
For support information about downloading new firmware from the Web, go to www.hp.com/go/
lj2410_firmware for the HP LaserJet 2410 printer, www.hp.com/go/lj2420_firmware for the HP
LaserJet 2420 printer, or www.hp.com/go/lj2430_firmware for the HP LaserJet 2430 printer.
NOTE If the firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random-access
memory (NVRAM), any menu settings that are changed from the default settings will return to
default settings. The settings must be changed again if you want them to be different from the
defaults. Examples of settings that are affected in this way are tray types, default symbol sets,
and Web-access alerts.
The elapsed time for an update depends on the I/O transfer time, as well as the time that it takes for
the product to reinitialize. The I/O transfer time depends on a number of things, including the speed
of the host computer that is sending the update and the I/O method (parallel or network). The
reinitialization time depends on the specific hardware configuration of the product, such as the
number of EIO devices installed, the presence of external paper-handling devices, and the amount of
memory that is installed.
If the remote firmware update process is interrupted before the firmware is downloaded (while
RECEIVING UPGRADE appears on the control-panel display), the firmware file must be sent again.
If power is lost during the flash dual inline memory module (DIMM) update (while PERFORMING
UPGRADE appears on the control-panel display), the update is interrupted and the message
RESEND UPGRADE appears (in English only) on the control-panel display. The update must now
be sent only by a computer that is attached to the parallel port of the product.
Finally, any print jobs that are ahead of the .RFU job in the queue are printed before the update is
processed.
Use one of the following methods to update your product firmware.
Remote firmware update by using FTP through a browser
Complete the following steps to update the product firmware by using file transfer protocol (FTP)
through a browser.
NOTE The following instructions can be used on Windows or Macintosh operating systems.
1
Take note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO-Jetdirect page. The EIO-Jetdirect page is the
second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining
the current level of firmware.
2
Open a browser window.
3
In the address line of the browser, type ftp://<IPADDRESS>, where <IPADDRESS> is the TCP/
IP address of your product. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type
FTP://192.168.0.90
4
Locate the downloaded .RFU file for the product.
5
Drag and drop the .RFU file onto the PORT1 icon in the browser window.
Technology background information
57
Software description
The product can receive an .RFU update to the firmware when the product is in a READY state. The
product waits for all of the I/O channels to become idle before performing the update.
NOTE The product automatically restarts the firmware to activate the update. At the end of
the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network connection
If the product uses a direct network connection, use file transfer protocol (FTP) to update your
firmware. Complete the following steps for your operating system.
Windows operating systems
Software description
1
Take note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO Jetdirect page. The HP Jetdirect page is the second
page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining the
current level of firmware.
NOTE Before connecting to the product, make sure that the product is not in Sleep
mode. Also make sure that any error messages are cleared from the control-panel display.
2
Open a command window on your computer.
3
Type ftp <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90,
type ftp 192.168.0.90.
4
Press Enter on the keyboard.
5
When prompted for the user name, press Enter.
6
When prompted for the password, press Enter.
7
Type bin at the command prompt.
8
Press Enter. The message 200 Type set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in
the command window.
9
Type put <FILENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file that was downloaded
from the Web, including the path. For example, type put C:\LJ\2410FW.RFU and then press
Enter.
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path
in quotation marks. For example, type put "c:\My Documents\LJ\2410fw.rfu" .
The following series of messages appears in the command window:
●
200 PORT command successful
●
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection
●
226 Ready
●
226 Processing Job
●
226 Transfer complete
After these messages appear, a message containing transfer-speed information appears.
58
2
Software description
10 The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take about
five minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer.
NOTE The product automatically restarts the firmware to activate the update. At the end
of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
11 At the command prompt, type bye to exit the FTP command.
12 At the command prompt, type exit to return to the Windows interface.
1
Take note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO-Jetdirect page. The EIO-Jetdirect page is the
second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining
the current level of firmware.
2
Open a Terminal window on your Macintosh. You can find the Terminal application on the
computer hard drive in the Applications/Utilities folder.
3
Type FTP <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS> For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90,
type FTP 192.168.0.90
4
Press Enter on the keyboard.
5
When prompted for a user name and password, press Enter.
6
Type put <path>, where <path> is the location where the .RFU file was downloaded from the
Web, including the path. For example, type put /username/desktop/2410fw.rfu and then
press Enter.
Software description
Macintosh operating systems
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path
in quotation marks. For example, type put "/user name/desktop/2410FW.RFU".
To ensure that the entire path to the .RFU file is placed in the put command, type put and
a space, and then drag and drop the .RFU file onto the terminal window. The complete
path to the file is automatically placed after the put command .
7
The download process begins and the firmware is updated. This can take about five minutes. Let
the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer.
NOTE The product automatically restarts the firmware to activate the update. At the end
of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
Remote firmware update through a local Windows port
If the product is connected through a local port (parallel), then you can send the .RFU file directly to
the product by using a COPY command from a command prompt or an MS-DOS window. At the
command prompt, perform the following steps for your operating system.
Technology background information
59
Windows 98 or Windows Me
1
From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type:
Mode lpt1:,,p
NOTE If the product is attached to a parallel port other than LPT1, then substitute the
correct LPT port number in the mode command.
2
Press Enter on the keyboard. The response you receive should be similar to these examples:
Software description
> LPT1 Not Rerouted
> Resident portion of MODE loaded
> Infinite retry on parallel printer time-out
3
At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>, where <FILENAME> is the
name of the .RFU file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate
product port (such as LPT1). For example, type C:\>copy /b c:\2410fw.rfu lpt1
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path
in quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\2410fw.rfu"
lpt1
4
Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages that are described in Printer messages during the
firmware update appear on the control panel.
NOTE The product automatically restarts the firmware to activate the update. At the end
of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
60
5
Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of
the current update.
6
Type exit at the command prompt to close the command window.
2
Software description
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
The .RFU file can be sent directly to the product by typing a copy command at a command prompt
or in an MS-DOS window.
At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME> , where <FILENAME> is
the name of the .RFU file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate
printer port (such as LPT1). For example, type C:\>copy /b c:\2410fw.rfu lpt1
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path
in quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\2410fw.rfu"
lpt1
2
Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages described in the section Printer messages during
the firmware update appear on the control panel.
NOTE The product automatically restarts the firmware to activate the update. At the end
of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
3
At the command prompt, type exit to close the command window.
Remote firmware update through a Windows network
If the product is shared on a Windows network, follow these instructions.
1
From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b <FILENAME> \
\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file
(including the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the product is
being shared, and <SHARENAME> is the product share name. For example, type C:\>copy /b
c:\2410fw.rfu \\your_server\your_computer
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path
in quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\2410fw.rfu" \
\your_server\your_computer
2
Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages that are described in Printer messages during the
firmware update appear on the control panel. The message 1 file(s) copied appears on the
computer screen.
NOTE The product automatically restarts the firmware to activate the update. At the end
of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
Remote firmware update for UNIX systems
For UNIX systems, any command method that delivers the .RFU file to the product is acceptable,
including the following:
At the command prompt, type cp /home/yourmachine/FILENAME /dev/parallel>, where </home/
yourmachine/FILENAME> is the location of the .RFU file.
NOTE The product automatically restarts the firmware to activate the update. At the end of
the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
Technology background information
61
Software description
1
Remote firmware update by using Fetch (Mac OS 9.x only)
For Mac OS 9.x, a shareware program called Fetch provides FTP control for a put command.
Download and install the program from download.com.com/3000-2151-10182446.html.
Complete the following steps to update the product firmware by using Fetch.
Software description
1
Start the program by clicking on the Fetch icon.
2
Type the IP address of the product in the Host: box.
3
Click the Put Files button and browse to the location of the .RFU file.
4
Double-click the file to select it and download it to the product. A confirmation message appears
in the main window.
5
Click OK.
NOTE The product automatically restarts the firmware to activate the update. At the end
of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
Remote firmware update by using the HP LaserJet Utility (Mac OS 9.x only)
Complete the following steps to update the firmware by using the HP LaserJet Utility.
1
Make sure that you have the tools and files that are necessary for the update. You will need the
HP LaserJet Utility and the .RFU file, which is the firmware file for the product.
The HP LaserJet Utility can be found on the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printing-system
software CD-ROM that came with the product. If you do not have the CD-ROM, you can obtain
the HP LaserJet Utility by downloading the latest product installer from www.hp.com.
The firmware file (.RFU file) can be downloaded from www.hp.com/go/lj2410_firmware for the
HP LaserJet 2410 printer, www.hp.com/go/lj2420_firmware for the HP LaserJet 2420 printer, or
www.hp.com/go/lj2430_firmware for the HP LaserJet 2430 printer.
See Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site for more information.
After you have the firmware file and the HP LaserJet Utility, you are ready to begin the update
process.
62
2
Open the HP LaserJet Utility.
3
Click Select Printer and locate the product that you would like to update on the network. Select
the product on the right side of the dialog box, and click OK. An information dialog box for the
HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer appears.
4
On the left side of the information dialog box, click Files. A dialog box appears where you can
select a file to be downloaded to the product.
5
Click Select File.
2
Software description
6
Locate the .RFU file on your hard disk, and click the file name to highlight it. Click Select. The
Files dialog boxes update to show the .RFU file under File to download.
7
Click Download. The HP LaserJet Utility starts downloading the file to the product. A progress
bar shows how much of the file has been downloaded. While the file is downloading, the
RECEIVING UPGRADE message appears on the control-panel display on the product. After the
file has downloaded to the product, the PERFORMING UPGRADE message appears on the
control-panel display.
Software description
NOTE The product automatically restarts the firmware to activate the update. At the end
of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
Remote firmware update by using the LPR command
NOTE This remote firmware update method is for use in Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003.
Complete the following steps to update the firmware by using the LPR command.
1
From a command window, type lpr -P <IPADDRESS> -S <IPADDRESS> -o l <FILENAME> OR- lpr -S <IPADDRESS> -Pbinps <FILENAME>, where <IPADDRESS> can be either the
TCP/IP address or the hostname of the product, and where <FILENAME> is the filename of
the .RFU file.
NOTE The parameter (-o l) consists of a lowercase "O", not a zero, and a lowercase "L",
not the numeral 1. This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode.
2
Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages described in the section Printer messages during
the firmware update appear on the control panel.
NOTE The product automatically restarts the firmware to activate the update. At the end
of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
3
Type exit at the command prompt to close the command window.
Remote firmware update through HP Web Jetadmin
This procedure requires that you install HP Web Jetadmin V7.8 or later on your computer. Complete
the following steps to update a single product through HP Web Jetadmin after downloading the .RFU
file from the HP Web site.
1
Start HP Web Jetadmin.
2
Type the TCP/IP address or IP host name of the product in the Quick Device Find field, and
then click Go. The product Status window opens.
3
Open the Device Management folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate to
the Device Lists folder.
4
Expand the Device Lists folder and select All Devices. Locate the product that you want to
update in the list of products, and click to select it.
5
Locate the drop-down box for Device Tools in the upper-right corner of the window. Select
Update Printer Firmware from the choose action list.
Technology background information
63
6
If the name of the .RFU file is not listed in the All Available Images dialog box, click Browse in
the Upload New Firmware Image dialog box and navigate to the location of the .RFU file that
you downloaded from the Web at the start of this procedure. If the filename is listed, select it.
7
Click Upload to move the .RFU file from your hard drive to the HP Web Jetadmin server.
8
Refresh the browser.
9
Select the .RFU file from the Printer Firmware Update drop-down menu.
Software description
10 Click Update Firmware. HP Web Jetadmin sends the selected .RFU file to the product. The
messages that are described in Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
NOTE The product automatically restarts the firmware to activate the update. At the end
of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel.
HP Web Jetadmin V7.8 and later can also be used to perform multiple or unattended installations.
Complete the following steps for multiple or unattended installations.
1
Start HP Web Jetadmin.
2
Create a device group. A simple way to do this is to follow these steps:
a. Click Device Management, and then click All Devices.
-orb. Shift-click to select products that you want to be included in the group, and then click OK.
-orc. When prompted, type a name for the new device group, and then click OK.
3
To modify several products in a group, click the group name, and then click Open.
4
The drop-down menu for Device Group Tools appears on the right side of the window. Scroll if
necessary to view it.
5
In the Device Group Tools drop-down box, select an action. Type in the appropriate
information. Click Return to Device Group when finished.
Printer messages during the firmware update
Three messages appear during a normal update process.
Table 2-6 Update messages
64
Printer message
Explanation
RECEIVING UPGRADE
This message appears from the time the product recognizes the beginning of an .RFU
update until the time the product has verified the validity and integrity of the .RFU update.
PERFORMING UPGRADE
This message appears while the product is actually reprogramming the firmware.
INITIALIZING
This message appears from the time the product has finished reprogramming the DIMM
until the product reinitializes.
2
Software description
NOTE To verify that the firmware update succeeded, print a new configuration page from the
control panel and verify that the firmware date code on the configuration page has changed.
Troubleshooting a firmware update
The following table lists the causes and results of possible interruptions to the firmware update.
Cause
Result
The job was cancelled from the control panel.
No update has occurred.
A break in the I/O stream occurred during send (for
example, the parallel cable was removed).
No update has occurred.
A power cycle occurred during the RECEIVING UPGRADE
process.
No update has occurred.
A power cycle occurred during the PERFORMING
UPGRADE process.
No update has occurred. Resend the update through a
parallel port.
A power cycle occurred during the INITIALIZING process.
The update has been completed.
Software description
Table 2-7 Troubleshooting a firmware update
Print jobs that are sent to the product while an update is in process do not interrupt the update.
The following table lists possible reasons for the failure of a remote firmware update and the
corrective action that is required for each situation.
Table 2-8 Troubleshooting a firmware update failure
Reason for firmware update failure
Corrective action
The .RFU file is corrupted.
The product recognizes that the file is corrupted and rejects the update.
Download the file again and send the new file to the product. Download the file
from www.hp.com/go/lj2410_firmware for the HP LaserJet 2410 printer,
www.hp.com/go/lj2420_firmware for the HP LaserJet 2420 printer, or
www.hp.com/go/lj2430_firmware for the HP LaserJet 2430 printer.
The wrong product is contained in
the .RFU file.
The product recognizes the printer mismatch and rejects the update. Download
the correct file and send it to the product. Download the file from www.hp.com/go/
lj2410_firmware for the HP LaserJet 2410 printer, www.hp.com/go/
lj2420_firmware for the HP LaserJet 2420 printer, or www.hp.com/go/
lj2430_firmware for the HP LaserJet 2430 printer.
The upgrade was interrupted.
See Troubleshooting a firmware update.
A flash hardware failure occurred.
Although it is extremely unlikely, the product might have a hardware failure. Call
technical support to address the problem (see the flyer that came with the
product for a local telephone support list).
NOTE All HP LaserJet products leave the factory with the most recent firmware version
installed. If a remote firmware update fails, the .RFU file must be sent over a parallel port
connection.
Technology background information
65
Printing print-ready documents from a command line
Documents in the following file formats can be printed by using a command line. That is, they do not
need to be opened in a software program that supports the file format (such as the Adobe Acrobat or
Acrobat Reader programs for .PDF files), but can be sent directly to the product using a command
line.
Software description
■
HP LaserJet Printer Control Language (.PCL)
■
Portable Document Format (.PDF)
■
Postscript (.PS)
■
Text (.TXT)
Use one of the following methods to send print-ready files to your product.
NOTE The examples that are used in this section are for printing .PDF documents.
However, any print-ready file type can be substituted.
Print-ready file printing by using FTP through a browser
Complete the following steps to print print-ready files from a command line by using FTP through a
browser.
NOTE The following instructions can be used on Windows or Macintosh operating systems.
1
Take note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO Jetdirect page. The Jetdirect page is the second
page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining the
current level of firmware.
2
Open a browser window.
3
In the address line of the browser, type ftp://<IPADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP
address of your product is 192.168.0.90, type FTP 192.168.0.90
4
Locate the print-ready file for the product.
5
Drag and drop the print-ready file onto the PORT1 icon in the browser window.
Print-ready file printing by using FTP on a direct network connection
If the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer uses a direct network connection, use file transfer
protocol (FTP) to print a print-ready file. Complete the following steps for the operating system.
Windows operating systems
66
1
Take note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO Jetdirect page. The Jetdirect page is the second
page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining the
current level of firmware.
2
Open a command window on your computer.
2
Software description
Type ftp <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90,
type ftp 192.168.0.90
4
Press Enter on the keyboard.
5
When prompted for the user name, press Enter.
6
When prompted for the password, press Enter.
7
Type bin at the command prompt.
8
Press Enter. The message 200 Types set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in
the command window.
9
Type put <FILENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready file to be printed,
including the path. For example, type put C:\LJ\SAMPLE_DOC.PDF, and then press Enter.
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path
in quotation marks. For example, type put "C:\MY DOCUMENTS\LJ\SAMPLE_DOC.PDF"
The following series of messages appears in the command window:
200 PORT command successful
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection
226 Ready
226 Processing Job
10 Your print-ready file prints.
Macintosh operating systems
1
Take note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO Jetdirect page. The Jetdirect page is the second
page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining the
current level of firmware.
2
Open a Terminal window on your Macintosh. You can find the Terminal application on the
computer hard drive in the Applications/Utilities folder.
3
Type FTP <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90,
type FTP 192.168.0.90
4
Press Enter on the keyboard.
5
When prompted for a user name and password, press Enter.
6
Type put <path>, where <path> is the location where the print-ready file was downloaded from
the Web. For example, type put /username/desktop/SAMPLE_DOC.PDF, and then press Enter.
Technology background information
67
Software description
3
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path
in quotation marks. For example, type put "/user name/desktop/SAMPLE_DOC.PDF"
To ensure that the entire path to the print-ready file is placed in the put command, type
put and a space and then click and drag the print-ready file onto the terminal window. The
complete path to the file is automatically placed after the put command.
7
Your print-ready file prints.
Software description
Print-ready printing by using a local Windows port
To print from the command line by using a local Windows port, follow the instructions in this section
for your operating system.
Windows 98 or Windows Me
1
From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type Mode lpt1:,,p
NOTE If the product is attached to a parallel port other than LPT1, then substitute the
proper LPT port number in the mode command.
2
Press Enter on the keyboard. The response you receive should be similar to these examples:
> LPT1 Not Rerouted
> Resident portion of MODE loaded
> Infinite retry on parallel printer time-out
3
At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>, where <FILENAME> is the
name of the print-ready file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the
appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example, at the c:\> command prompt, type copy /
b c:\SAMPLE_DOC.pdf lpt1
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path
in quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents
\SAMPLE_DOC.pdf"
68
4
Press Enter on the keyboard. The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel,
and the job prints.
5
At the command prompt, type exit to close the command window.
2
Software description
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
The print-ready file can be sent directly to the product by typing a copy command at a command
prompt or in an MS-DOS window.
At a command prompt, type copy/b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>, where <FILENAME> is the
name of the print-ready file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the
appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example, type C:\>copy /b c:\SAMPLE_DOC.pdf
lpt1
2
Press Enter on the keyboard.
Software description
1
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path
in quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents
\SAMPLE_DOC.pdf". The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel,
and the job prints.
3
At the command prompt, type exit to close the command window.
Print-ready file printing in a Windows network
If the product is shared on a Windows network, complete the following steps.
1
From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b <FILENAME> \
\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready
file (including the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the
product is being shared, and <SHARENAME> is the product share name. For example, type C:
\>copy /b c:\SAMPLE_DOC.pdf \\your_server\sharename
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path
in quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents
\SAMPLE_DOC.pdf" \\your_server\sharename
2
Press Enter on the keyboard. The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel,
and the job prints. The message 1 file(s) copied appears on the computer screen.
Print-ready file printing in UNIX systems
For UNIX systems, any command method that delivers the print-ready file to the product is
acceptable, including the following:
At the command prompt, type cp </home/yourmachine/FILENAME/ dev/parallel>, where </
home/yourmachine/FILENAME> is the location of the print-ready file.
Print-ready file printing by using Fetch (Mac OS 9.x only)
For Mac OS 9.x, a shareware program called Fetch provides FTP control for a put command.
Download and install the program from download.com.com/3000-2151-10182446.html.
Technology background information
69
Complete the following steps to print print-ready files by using Fetch.
1
Start the program by clicking the Fetch icon.
2
Enter the IP address of the product in the Host: box.
3
Click the Put Files button and browse to the location of the print-ready file.
4
Double-click the file to select it and download it to the product. A confirmation message appears
in the main window.
5
Click OK.
Software description
File printing by using the HP LaserJet Utility (Mac OS 9.x only)
Complete the following steps to print a print-ready file by using the HP LaserJet Utility.
1
Make sure that you have the tools and files necessary for the update. You will need the
HP LaserJet Utility and the print-ready file that you want to print.
The HP LaserJet Utility can be found on the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printing-system
software CD that came with the product. If you do not have the CD, you can obtain the
HP LaserJet Utility by downloading the latest product installer from www.hp.com.
After you have the HP LaserJet Utility and you know the location of the print-ready file that you
want to print, you are ready to begin the command-line printing process.
2
Open the HP LaserJet Utility.
3
Click Select Printer and locate the product that you would like to upgrade on the network.
4
Select the product on the right side of the dialog box, and click OK. An information dialog box for
the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer appears.
5
On the left side of the information dialog box, click Files. A dialog box appears where you can
select a file to be downloaded to the product.
6
Click Select File.
7
On your hard disk, locate the print-ready file that you want to print, and click the file name to
highlight it. Then click Select. The Files dialog box updates showing the .print-ready file that you
want to print under File to download.
8
Click Download.
The HP LaserJet Utility starts downloading the file to the product. A progress bar keeps you
updated on how much of the file has been downloaded. While the file is downloading, the
PROCESSING JOB message appears on the control-panel display on the product, and the printready file prints.
Print-ready file printing by using the LPR command
NOTE This command-line printing method is for use in Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003.
70
2
Software description
Complete the following steps to print a print-ready file by using the LPR command.
1
Take note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO Jetdirect page. The Jetdirect page is the second
page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining the
current level of firmware.
2
From a command window, type lpr -P IPADDRESS -S IPADDRESS -o l FILENAME
NOTE The parameter (-o l) consists of a lowercase "O", not a zero, and a lowercase "L",
not the numeral 1. This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode.
3
The file prints, but no further messages appear in the command prompt window.
4
Type exit at the command prompt to close the command window.
Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems
The following tables detail the software features that are available for each driver type and for each
supported operating system that the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer supports. The
printing-system drivers for Windows 98, Windows 98, and Windows NT 4.0 are the HP Traditional
PCL 5e Driver, HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver, and PS Emulation Driver. The printing-system drivers
for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 are the new HP unidrivers, with a user
interface look and feel that is consistent across the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, HP PCL 5e Unidriver, and
PS Emulation Unidriver.
For more information about the HP traditional PCL 6, PCL 5e, and PS emulation drivers, see HP
traditional print drivers for Windows. For more information about the HP PCL 6, PCL 5e, and PS
emulation unidrivers, see HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows.
Job stream output
Table 2-9 Driver support for job stream output feature
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
6
PCL
6
Postscript
PCL 6 support
x
x
x
PCL 5e pass-through
support
x
x
x
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PS 3 emulation
x
x
x
PS 1, 2 emulation
x
x
x
Technology background information
x
71
Software description
lpr -S <IPADDRESS> -Pbinps <FILENAME>, where IPADDRESS can be either the TCP/IP
address or the host name of the product, and where FILENAME is the file name of the printready file.
PJL/PJL Encoding
Table 2-10 Printer Job Language (PJL) and PJL encoding
Software description
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
Postscript
PJL support
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
7-bit Encoding for PJL
(a-z, A-Z, 0-9)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
8-bit Encoding for PJL
(chars 32-255)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
UTF-8 encoding for
PJL (Unicode to 8-bit)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Job tracking
Table 2-11 Driver support for job tracking
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PCL
6
PCL
5e
Postscript
PRN file driver
identification
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Job accounting
information
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Job accounting
enhancements (UUID)
PS
emulation
Reliable Time - born on
date (PJL DMINFO)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Born on Date (PJL
TIMESTAMP)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Sending user name
with every job
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
72
PS
emulation
x
2
Software description
Connectivity
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
Postscript
Parallel (direct connect)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Network – TCP/IP
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Network - AppleTalk
PAP
Software description
Table 2-12 Driver support for connectivity features
x
x
USB (direct connect)
x
x
x
USB (direct connect)
via 1284.4 (HP
DOT4/7.1.3)
x
x
x
x
x
x
USB (direct connect)
via 7.1.2 (Apple USB
Print)
x
Wireless 802.11
x
Rendezvous
x
Bidirectional communication
Table 2-13 Driver support for bidirectional communication features
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PCL
6
PCL
5e
Postscript
EAC
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Status messages
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Parallel (direct connect)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Network - TCP/IP
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
PS
emulation
Network - AppleTalk
PAP
PS
emulation
x
x
USB (direct connect)
x
x
x
Update Now
x
x
x
Technology background information
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
73
Table 2-13 Driver support for bidirectional communication features (continued)
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PCL
6
PCL
5e
Postscript
Language Monitor1
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
PS
emulation
PS
emulation
MasterMon, a pseudo-language monitor that is used for all HP LaserJet products for the duplex communication channel with
bidirectional communication products and to insert PJL commands into the job stream. It loads TCPMON for TCP/IP ports.
1
Software description
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Table 2-14 Driver support for HP Driver Preconfiguration
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PCL
6
PCL
5e
Postscript
HP Driver
Preconfiguration
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Feature lockout
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Enterprise
Autoconfiguration (EAC)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Continuous export
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
DMC macro automation
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
PS
emulation
PS
emulation
x
Bundle support
Table 2-15 Bundle support
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PCL
6
PCL
5e
Postscript
Assign Bundle support
in Installer
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Printer bundle in UI
74
PS
emulation
PS
emulation
x
2
Software description
Tray and paper assignment
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
6
Postscript
Assign paper size to tray x
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Assign paper type to tray
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
Software description
Table 2-16 Tray and paper assignment
Installable options
Table 2-17 Driver support for installable options
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
Postscript
Duplexing unit
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Manual duplex enable
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Total memory
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
DWS (available
memory)
Additional source trays
x
x
Font DIMM Installer
x
x
Mopier enabled
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Job storage enabled
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Technology background information
x
75
UI features
Table 2-18 Driver support for UI features
Software description
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
Postscript
UI tabs ("panels" in
Macintosh)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
UI extensions
x
x
x
Page preview images
x
x
x
Printer image bitmaps
with hot spots
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Paper size dimensions
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
About . . .
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Accessibility/Disability
(JAWS)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Accessibility
architecture
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Help features
Table 2-19 Driver support for Help features
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
Postscript
What's this Help (F1)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Help button
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Bubble Help
MS Windows "?" Help
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Constraint Help
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
76
2
Software description
Quick Sets
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PCL
6
PCL
5e
Postscript
Print Task Quick Sets
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
User Defined Quick Sets x
x
x
x
x
x
x
PS
emulation
PS
emulation
Software description
Table 2-20 Driver support for quick sets
x
Paper Sizes
Table 2-21 Driver support for paper sizes
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
Postscript
Paper Sizes
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
User Defined Custom
Paper
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Edg-to-Edge Laser
Media Types
Table 2-22 Driver support for media types
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PCL
6
PCL
5e
Postscript
User Defined Media
Types
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Combined Media Types
& Sources in program
(always NO driver UI
switch)
x
x
x
Combined Media Types
& Sources in program
Technology background information
PS
emulation
x
x
x
PS
emulation
x
x
x
77
Table 2-22 Driver support for media types (continued)
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
6
PCL
6
PS
emulation
Postscript
x
x
x
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
5e
(optional driver UI
switch)
Software description
Combined Media Types
& Sources in program
(in driver UI)
Job storage
Table 2-23 Driver support for job storage features
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh1
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
Postscript
Proof and hold
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Private job
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Job name
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
User name
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
PIN
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Job storage pop-up
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Automatic job and user
name
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Job storage override
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Quick Copy
Stored Job
1
78
x
x
x
Job Storage features are available only in Mac OS 9.x. They are not available for Mac OS X.
2
Software description
Print-quality and resolution
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PCL
6
PCL
5e
Postscript
Print-quality options
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Print quality - custom
options recall
Economode
x
x
x
Print optimizations
x
x
Halftoning
x
x
x
Halftoning - Custom
x
x
x
Rendering mode
(automatic)
PS
emulation
x
x
x
Send graphics as vector
x
x
x
Send graphics as raster
x
x
x
x
x
Send page as raster
PS
emulation
Software description
Table 2-24 Print-quality and resolution features
x
x
x
Use HP MEt / Use
More Memory
Manually Print on 2nd
Side / Print on
REt (Laser)
x
x
x
Scale patterns
(WYSIWYG)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Reordering Options
Table 2-25 Driver support for reordering options
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PCL
6
PCL
5e
Postscript
Page Order (reordering
for job)
x
x
x
Correct Order for Rear
Bin
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Technology background information
PS
emulation
PS
emulation
79
Table 2-25 Driver support for reordering options (continued)
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
6
PCL
6
Postscript
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
Correct Order for
Straight Paper Path
Software description
Correct Order for Rear
Output
Correct Order for Front
Output
Resizing options
Table 2-26 Resizing options
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PCL
6
PCL
5e
Postscript
Print Document On
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Scale to Fit
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Allow Scaling from
Large Paper
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
% of Normal Size
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
PS
emulation
PS
emulation
Other document options
Table 2-27 Other document options
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
Postscript
Orientation (Portrait/
Landscape)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Rotate by 180 degrees
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Number of copies
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
80
x
2
Software description
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
Postscript
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
Ignore Application
Collation
Collate
x
x
x
Collate - feature in
driver UI
Collate through mopy
PS
emulation
x
x
x
x
Mirror image / mirrored
output
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Software description
Table 2-27 Other document options (continued)
Watermarks
Table 2-28 Driver support for watermarks feature
1
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh1
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
Postscript
Watermarks on/off
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
First page only
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Custom watermark
definition
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Watermark angle
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Watermark font name
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Watermark font color
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Watermark font shading
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Watermark font size
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Watermark font style
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Locally defined
watermarks
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Mac OS 8.5 through 9.x only; not supported by Mac X or later.
Technology background information
81
Alternative source/paper type
Table 2-29 Driver support for alternate source/paper type feature
Software description
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
Postscript
All pages the same
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Front cover (blank front
cover inserted)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
First page
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Other pages
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Last page
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Back cover (blank back
cover inserted)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Front cover form feeder
(PI Front Cover)
Back cover form feeder
(PI Back Cover)
Printing destination
Table 2-30 Driver support for printing destination feature
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
Postscript
Main bin
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
82
2
Software description
Finishing Options
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
Postscript
Auto Duplex / Print on
Both Sides
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Manual Duplex
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Long Edge / Short
Edge (Flip On)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Mixed Duplex and
Simplex in single job
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Pages per Sheet (N-up)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Page Borders On/Off
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Page Order (N-Up)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Booklet Printing
(Layout in SW)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Booklet Target Size
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Software description
Table 2-31 Driver support for finishing options
Smart Duplexing Single Page Jobs
Smart Duplexing - Odd
Page Jobs
Font support
Table 2-32 Font support
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
PCL
6
PCL
5e
PS
emulation
Postscript
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
PCL
5e
General device font
support
Font substitution
x
x
Arabic, Cyrillic,
Hebrew, Greek device
Send TrueType as
Bitmap
x
x
x
Technology background information
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
83
Table 2-32 Font support (continued)
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
Driver type
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
HP traditional driver
Macintosh
Driver
PCL
6
PCL
6
PCL
6
Postscript
PCL
5e
TrueType Fonts (UI
option)
Print Text as Black
PS
emulation
PCL
5e
x
x
x
x
PS
emulation
PCL
5e
x
x
PS
emulation
x
x
x
x
Software description
Postscript-specific features
Table 2-33 Driver support for postscript-specific features
Operating system
Windows XP
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
Postscript
Driver
PS emulation
PS emulation
PS emulation
Postscript
Postscript memory
x
x
x
Output protocol
x
x
x
Send CTRL-D before each job
x
x
x
Send CTRL-D after each job
x
x
x
Convert gray text to postscript gray
x
Convert gray graphics to postscript gray
x
Add euro currency symbol
x
Job timeout
x
x
x
Wait timeout
x
x
x
Minimum font size to download as outline
x
x
Minimum font size to download as bitmap
x
x
Postscript language level
x
x
x
Send postscript error handler
x
x
x
Negative output
x
x
x
Postscript language level
x
x
x
Send postscript error handler
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Printing Preferences
x
Mirrored output
Negative output
Output options
Optimize for speed
84
2
Software description
Table 2-33 Driver support for postscript-specific features (continued)
Windows XP
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 98, Me
Macintosh
HP unidriver
HP traditional driver
Postscript
Driver
PS emulation
PS emulation
PS emulation
Postscript
Optimize for portability
x
x
x
Encapsulated postscript (EPS)
x
x
x
Archive format
x
x
x
Levels of gray
x
x
x
Fit to page
x
x
x
Outline
x
x
x
Bitmap
x
x
x
Native TrueType
x
x
x
x
Software description
Operating system
TrueType font download option
Technology background information
85
Software description
86
2
Software description
3
HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Introduction
■
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver features. This section describes
the HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e drivers for Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0.
■
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver (PS Emulation Driver) features. This section
describes the PS Emulation Driver for Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0.
You can control print jobs from several places: the product control panel, the software program, and
the driver user interface. Generally, for features that are common to two or more of these places (for
instance, you can select the media input tray from any of them), settings that are established in the
software program take precedence over print-driver settings. Print-driver settings override product
control-panel settings.
This chapter contains information about the following topics:
Introduction
●
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
●
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features
87
HP traditional drivers
This chapter describes the features of the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 traditional print drivers.
The chapter contains the following sections:
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
When you install the print drivers by using the printing-system installer in Windows 98 or
Windows Me, the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver is installed by default. The HP Traditional PCL 5e
Driver can be installed by using the Add Printer wizard. When you install the print drivers in
Windows NT 4.0, you must use the Add Printer installation method to install the HP Traditional PCL 6
Driver or the HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver.
This section describes the options that are available on each tab of the HP traditional PCL 6 and
PCL 5e driver Document Default print-driver interface and on some of the tabs of the HP Traditional
PCL 6 Driver and HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver Properties print-driver interface.
This section also describes differences between the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and the
HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver
Access to print drivers
Depending on the operating system on which you are installing the print drivers, several different
ways are available to gain access to the print drivers and different print-driver interfaces.
To gain access to the print-driver settings from within most software programs, click File, click Print,
and then click Properties. These driver settings apply only while that software program is open.
HP traditional drivers
Access to print drivers in Windows NT 4.0
In Windows NT 4.0, you can gain access to the Document Defaults... driver tabs and the
Properties driver tabs. The settings that you make on these driver tabs control print-job output.
Document Defaults... driver tabs
In Windows NT 4.0, click Start, select Settings, and then click Printers. Right-click the product
name, and then click Document Defaults... to gain access to all of the Document Default... printdriver tabs, which are the same set of driver tabs that the software program controls. These driver
settings change the default settings that are used across all software programs.
The following Document Defaults... print-driver tabs are available in Windows NT 4.0:
■
Finishing tab
■
Effects tab
■
Paper tab
■
Job Storage tab
■
Basics tab
The HP driver tabs are indicated by the HP logo appearing in the lower-left corner of the driver tab.
Only HP tabs are documented in this STR.
88
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Properties driver tabs
In Windows NT 4.0, click Start, select Settings, and then click Printers. Right-click the product
name, and then click Properties to gain access to all Properties print-driver tabs. The following
Properties driver tabs are available in Windows NT 4.0:
■
General
■
Ports
■
Scheduling
■
Sharing
■
Security
■
NT Forms
■
Configure
NOTE Only the NT Forms tab and the Configure tab are described in this guide. See the
Properties tabs section in this chapter.
In Windows 98 and Windows Me, click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers. Right-click the
product name, and then click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs. The settings that you
make on these driver tabs control print-job output. The following print-driver tabs are available in
Windows 98 and Windows Me:
■
General
■
Details
■
Color Management
■
Sharing
■
Finishing
■
Effects
■
Paper
■
Job Storage
■
Basics
■
Configure
Help system
The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and the HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver include a full-featured Help
system to provide assistance with printing and configuration options.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
89
HP traditional drivers
Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me
What's this? Help
What's this? Help is supported in Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0. You can gain
access to What's this? Help messages in any of the following ways:
■
Right-click a control and then click What's this?. A pop-up Help window appears.
■
Click the ? button at the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an
arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up
Help window for that feature appears.
■
Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.
Context-sensitive Help
When you press the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message
appears.
Incompatible Options messages
HP traditional drivers
Incompatible Options settings (constraint) messages are unsolicited messages that appear in
response to specific actions that you take. These messages alert you to selections that are illogical
or impossible given the capabilities of the product or the current settings of other controls. For
example, if you click Print on Both Sides and then change the media type to Transparency, a
message appears asking you to resolve this conflict.
Figure 3-1 A typical constraint message with an OK button
Whenever a constraint message appears with the OK or Cancel button, the interpretation of the
button is as follows:
■
Clicking OK accepts the change that was just made, and the driver then resets the conflicting
control to a setting that is compatible with the new value.
■
Clicking Cancel rejects the change that was just made, and the control returns to its previous
value.
Bubble Help
Bubble Help features a graphical icon that resembles a cartoon speech bubble with a lowercase "i" in
it, representing the international symbol for information. The following illustration shows a Bubble
Help icon on a driver tab.
90
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
HP traditional drivers
Figure 3-2 A property page with a Bubble Help icon
The bubble typically appears next to a control that is unavailable, although it can also accompany an
available control if an important note concerning its use is available within the Help. Moving the
pointer over the bubble changes the arrow to a gloved hand, which indicates that the area
underneath the pointer is selectable. When the bubble is selected by using either the mouse or the
keyboard, a message box appears that contains a brief explanation about why the control is disabled
and what can be done to enable it. If the control is not disabled, the message is a tip or a precaution
that you should be aware of when using that particular feature.
Finishing tab features
Use the Finishing tab to print booklets and control the media output. The following illustration shows
the Finishing tab.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
91
HP traditional drivers
Figure 3-3 The default appearance of the Finishing tab
The Finishing tab contains the following controls:
■
Print Task Quick Sets group box
■
Document Options group box
■
Document preview image
■
Print Quality group box
Print Task Quick Sets
The first group box in the upper portion of the Finishing tab is Print Task Quick Sets. Any change
to the Print Task Quick Sets group box that is made on the Finishing tab affects the Print Task
Quick Sets group boxes on all of the Document Defaults driver tabs (the Effects tab, Paper tab,
Job Storage, Basics tab) because they are all the same control.
Use the Print Task Quick Sets setting to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all of the other print driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset by network-administrator
92
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
settings or user-defined printing specifications (such as media size, pages per sheet, and so on). The
Print Task Quick Sets control does not appear on the driver Properties tabs.
By default, the Print Task Quick Sets menu is set to Type new Quick Set name here. When you
change any of the default settings on any of the Document Defaults driver tabs and you want to
save the configuration as a print task quick set, highlight the words Type new Quick Set name here,
type the name that you want for your new print task quick set, and then click Save. The print task
quick sets are saved in the system registry. To delete a print task quick set, select it in the drop-down
menu and click Delete.
NOTE Administrators can predefine print task quick sets for their users. These administrator
print task quick sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but usually cannot
be modified by users. Users can also define print task quick sets for their own use. Userdefined print task quick sets are described later in this section.
You can store a maximum of 25 print task quick sets on a particular system. If you attempt to save
too many, a message box appears that reads, "There are too many Print Task Quick Sets defined.
Please delete some before adding new ones."
■
Default Print Settings
■
User Guide Print Settings
Default Print Settings
When you select Default Print Settings, nearly all of the settings are restored to the combination
that existed after the driver was installed (the original settings). However, if the attribute combinations
that are associated with watermark definitions, custom media sizes, or the other quick sets have
been changed or deleted, the original settings for those items are not restored.
The following table shows the default settings for Print Task Quick Sets. See HP Driver
Preconfiguration for information about preconfigurable driver settings.
Table 3-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer
Driver feature
Feature setting location
Default values for
U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets
Preconfigurable1
Print on Both Sides
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Off
Yes
Flip Pages Up
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Unavailable; Off when
first activated
Yes
Booklet Printing
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Unavailable; Off when
first activated
Yes
Pages per sheet
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
1
Yes
Print page borders
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Unavailable; Off when
first activated
Yes
Page order
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Unavailable; Right
then Down when first
activated
Yes
Print Quality
Finishing tab, Print Quality group box
Faster Printing
Yes
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
93
HP traditional drivers
The following settings are available in the Print Task Quick Sets drop-down menu:
Table 3-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer (continued)
HP traditional drivers
Driver feature
Feature setting location
Default values for
U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets
Preconfigurable1
Print document on
Effects tab, Fit to Page group box
Off - print on the size
that is specified on the
Paper tab
Yes
% of normal size
Effects tab, Fit to Page group box
100
Yes2
Scale to fit
Effects tab, Fit to Page group box
Unavailable; On when
first activated
Yes
Watermarks
Effects tab, Watermarks group box
(none)
Yes
First Page Only check
box
Effects tab, Watermarks group box
Unavailable; Off when
first activated
Yes
Current watermarks
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box (Click
Edit for Watermark Details.)
(none)
Yes2
Watermark message
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box (Click
Edit for Watermark Details.)
(none)
Yes2
Watermark message
angle
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box (Click
Edit for Watermark Details.)
Diagonal
Yes2
Watermark message
angle (angle)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box (Click
Edit for Watermark Details.)
Unavailable unless
Angle option is
selected; 52 (degrees)
when activated
Yes
Watermark font name
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font
Attributes group box
Arial
Yes2
Watermark font color
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font
Attributes group box
Gray
Yes
Watermark font shading Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font
Attributes group box
Very Light
Yes2
Watermark font size
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font
Attributes group box
80
No
Watermark font style
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font
Attributes group box
Regular
Yes
Use different paper/
covers
Paper tab, Paper Options group box
Off - all of the pages
use the same media
No
Size is:
Paper tab, Paper Options group box
Letter
Yes
Source is:
Paper tab, Paper Options group box
Automatically Select
Yes
Type is:
Paper tab, Paper Options group box
Unspecified
Yes
Unlabeled group box
Job Storage tab
Status message about
the destination of the
job
No
Job storage mode
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box
Off
No
Proof and Hold
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box
Available, not selected
No
Private Job
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box
Available, not selected
No
PIN to print
Job Storage tab, PIN group box
Unavailable unless
Private Job is selected
No
94
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
1
2
Driver feature
Feature setting location
Default values for
U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets
Preconfigurable1
Windows user name
Job Storage tab, User Name group box
Unavailable unless a
Job Storage option
has been selected;
selected when
activated
No
Job name
Job Storage tab, Job Name group box
Unavailable unless a
Job Storage option
has been selected;
Automatic selected
when activated
No
Display Job ID when
printing
Job Storage tab, Job Notification Options group
box
Unavailable unless a
Job Storage option
has been selected;
selected when
activated
No
Copy
Basics tab, Copies group box
1
Yes
Portrait
Basics tab, Orientation group box
On
Yes
Landscape
Basics tab, Orientation group box
Off
Yes
Rotate by 180 degrees
Basics tab, Orientation group box
Off
Yes
About
Basics tab
HP traditional drivers
Table 3-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer (continued)
No
Preconfigurable by using one of the HP Preconfiguration tools. For more information, see HP Driver Preconfiguration, or go to
www.hp.com/support/lj2410 for the HP LaserJet 2410 printer, www.hp.com/support/lj2420 for the HP LaserJet 2420 printer, or
www.hp.com/support/lj2430 for the HP LaserJet 2430 printer.
Not supported in Windows 98 and Windows Me.
User Guide Print Settings
The User Guide Print Settings option provides a Print Task Quick Set for optimal printing of the
HP LaserJet 2400 Series User Guide.
When you select User Guide Print Settings, all of the settings are restored to the default settings,
except for the following settings:
■
Print on Both Sides is set to ON
■
Flip Pages Up is set to ON
■
Pages per Sheet is set to 2
■
Page Order is set to Right then Down
Document Options
The Document Options group box contains the following controls:
■
Correct Order for Rear Bin check box
■
Print on Both Sides check box
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
95
■
Flip Pages Up check box
■
Booklet Printing drop-down menu
■
Pages Per Sheet drop-down menu
■
Print Page Borders check box
■
Page Order drop-down menu
Correct Order for Rear Bin
The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers have a door in the back that can be opened to allow
the paper to go straight out the back of the printer. This bin can be used to minimize curl and avoid
jams with heavier paper, such as cardstock. This check box orders the pages correctly for this rear
bin so that they come out in the right order. This feature is disabled if automatic duplexing is enabled.
Print on Both Sides
The default setting for the Print on Both Sides option is off (not selected). Print on Both Sides is
available when the following conditions exist:
■
Type is: on the Paper tab is set to any type except Labels, Transparency, or Envelope.
HP traditional drivers
NOTE Print on Both Sides (Manually) is available for Cardstock 164 x 200 g/m2.
■
Size is: is set to any size except Envelope #10, Envelope #DL, Envelope #C5, Envelope
Monarch, or Envelope B5.
When Paper Size is set to Letter, Legal, or A4, selecting Print on Both Sides makes the Booklet
Printing option available.
Automatically printing on both sides
The duplexing unit in the product prints on two sides of a sheet when the Print on Both Sides option
is specified in the print job. The HP LaserJet 2420d, 2420dn, and 2430dtn printer models come with
a duplexing unit installed.
To achieve the best print quality when printing on the second side of the page, the product needs to
make adjustments to its print modes. When you select a media type, you are, in effect, instructing the
product to use a group of settings, such as fuser temperature and print speed, to produce the best
possible quality. This group of settings is known as a mode or print mode, and a different print mode
is used with each media type. Print-mode adjustments are automatic when the duplexing unit is used.
Manually printing on both sides
Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box to print on the second side of the media for
the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420n, 2430t and 2430tn printer models, which do not have a duplexing unit
installed. Also select Print on Both Sides (Manually) on the other HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and
2430 printer models for media types that are not available when using the automatic duplexing unit,
such as cardstock and thick media.
NOTE To make the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box available in the document
options, select the Allow Manual Duplexing check box on the Configure tab in the
Properties print-driver tabs. See Paper Handling Options in this chapter.
96
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Manually printing on the second side of a page is available when you are using the HP Traditional
PCL 6 Driver or the HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver. The PS Emulation Driver does not support the
manual duplexing feature. If a duplexing unit is installed and manual duplexing is enabled in the
driver, the printer automatically duplexes media types that are supported by automatic duplexing
(Letter, A4, Legal, 8.5 x 13, and Executive (JIS) only), and forces manual printing on both sides for
media types that are not supported.
■
Plain
■
Preprinted
■
Letterhead
■
Prepunched
■
Bond
■
Recycled
■
Colored
■
Rough
HP traditional drivers
It is important to select the media type that corresponds to the media you are using for the print job.
The following media types have different print modes when you manually print on the second side:
Cardstock media can be manually printed on the second side, but there is no change to the print
mode. Transparencies and labels should not be manually printed on the second side.
To print a multiple-page document, follow these steps:
1
Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box.
2
Click OK. The even-number pages of the document print.
3
When the control panel shows the MANUALLY FEED OUTPUT STACK message, insert the
stack of media (on which the even-number pages have been printed) as indicated in the
following figure.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
97
HP traditional drivers
Figure 3-4 Print on Both Sides Instructions
When you have completed the steps that appear in the dialog box, the second half of the print job
prints on the back side of the stack of media. The driver does not require the application to
specifically support odd- and even-page printing, because the driver coordinates this function.
Flip Pages Up
The Flip Pages Up check box, which is available only when Print on Both Sides is selected, is
used to specify the duplex-binding option. By default, the Flip Pages Up check box is not available.
The following table demonstrates the results of selecting this box, depending on the media
orientation that is selected on the Basics tab.
Table 3-2 Page orientation
Orientation (Basics tab)
Flip Pages Up selected
Flip Pages Up not selected
Portrait
Short-edge binding
Long-edge binding
Landscape
Long-edge binding
Short-edge binding
When Print on Both Sides is selected, the document preview image changes to show a spiral
binding along either the left edge or the top edge of the page. In addition, a folded-over corner
appears in the lower-right portion of the preview image, indicating that printing occurs on the back
side. An arrow on the folded-over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they
were bound together.
Short-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by flipping over like the pages of a note pad.
Long-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by turning like the pages of a book.
98
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Booklet Printing
The Booklet Printing drop-down menu is visible when Print on Both Sides is selected and a
supported media size is selected in the Size is: drop-down menu on the Paper tab. The Booklet
Printing drop-down menu offers choices that are based on the current media size. The default
setting is Off. The other settings have the following format, where [paper size] depends on the
media size that is set on the Paper tab.
■
[paper size] (Left Binding)
■
[paper size] (Right Binding)
When you select [paper size] (Left Binding) or [paper size] (Right Binding), the document
preview image changes to show the location of the binding. If you change the Pages per Sheet
setting manually to 4, 6, 9, or 16 pages per sheet, the booklet setting is disabled. See the Pages per
Sheet section of this document for more information.
■
Print on Both Sides (on the Finishing tab) is selected.
■
% of Normal Size (on the Effects tab) is 100.
■
Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is 1.
■
Size is (on the Paper tab) is set to Letter, Legal, or A4.
HP traditional drivers
The Booklet Printing drop-down menu appears only when the following conditions exist:
If any of these conditions is not met (except the first), a Bubble Help appears next to Booklet
Printing to tell you why it is disabled.
Book and Booklet Printing
The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer supports both book and booklet printing.
A book is a print job that consists of at least two pages and that can have a different media type for
the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, or back cover. Use the Front Cover, First Page,
Other Pages, Last Page, or Back Cover settings on the Paper tab (available when you select the
Use Different Paper/Covers check box) to select different printing options for the book.
A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet that can be folded into a
booklet that is half the size of the media type. Use the Booklet Printing drop-down menu on the
Finishing tab to control booklet settings.
Printing a Booklet
Complete the following steps to print a booklet in most software programs.
1
In the software program, click File, click Print, and then click Properties.
2
Click the Finishing tab.
3
Select the Print on Both Sides check box.
4
In the Booklet Printing drop-down menu, select the type of booklet printing that you want. The
booklet printing type consists of the media size and the location of the binding (for example,
Letter [Left binding]).
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
99
5
Click OK in the print driver.
6
Click OK in the print dialog box to print.
HP traditional drivers
Figure 3-5 Printing a booklet
Printing a Book
You can print a book in which the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, and back cover have
different media types. For more information, see Paper tab features in this chapter.
Pages per Sheet
Use the Pages per Sheet option to select the number of pages that you want to print on a single
sheet. If you choose to print more than one page per sheet, the pages appear smaller and are
arranged on the sheet in the order that they would otherwise be printed. The Pages per Sheet dropdown menu provides six settings:
100
■
1 page per sheet (this is the default)
■
2 pages per sheet
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
■
4 pages per sheet
■
6 pages per sheet
■
9 pages per sheet
■
16 pages per sheet
When you select an option other than 1 page per sheet, booklet printing is unavailable.
Print Page Borders
Related controls that are indented beneath the Pages per Sheet edit box are Print Page Borders
and Page Order, which become active when Pages per Sheet is greater than 1.
Print Page Borders sets a line around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define
the borders of each logical page.
Page Order
■
Right, then Down
■
Down, then Right
■
Left, then Down
■
Down, then Left
HP traditional drivers
The Page Order drop-down menu contains four selections:
The document preview image changes to reflect alterations in these settings, as shown by the
examples in the following illustration.
Figure 3-6 Page-order images
■
2 pages per sheet
■
4 pages per sheet
■
6 pages per sheet
■
9 pages per sheet
■
16 pages per sheet
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
101
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Finishing, Effects, Paper, and
Basics tabs.
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview
image. When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes
from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by
clicking on the image. The dimensions label that appears below the preview image reflects the
selected page size. The horizontal dimension is always first, so the order of the numbers reverses
when the orientation changes. Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units.
Print Quality group box
The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 print driver Print Quality group box on the Finishing tab
provides options that control output settings and font settings.
The default setting for Print Quality is Faster Printing. This is the fastest printing option, but prints
with slightly lower quality than the Best Quality option. The Faster Printing setting uses a resolution
of 300 dpi for the HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver and 600 dpi for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver.
Select the Best Quality option to print documents at the optimal resolution for your product. This
option provides the best print quality but will print slightly slower than the Faster Printing option.
HP traditional drivers
To use the Custom print quality setting, click the Details button. Clicking the Details button opens
the Print Quality Details dialog box. The Print Quality Details dialog box has different options
depending on the driver that you are using. After you have made changes in the Print Quality
Details dialog box, the Custom option is selected in the Print Quality group box.
The EconoMode check box can be selected in conjunction with any of the print quality settings.
When you select EconoMode, the product uses less toner on each page. Using this option might
extend the life of your print cartridge and can lower the cost per page, but the option also reduces
print quality. Using the EconoMode feature with non-HP print cartridges can result in spillage or
product damage.
Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
The Print Quality Details dialog box provides the options for print-quality settings in the
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver as shown in the following illustration.
102
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Figure 3-7 Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
■
Current Setting group box
■
Font Settings group box
■
Output Settings group box
Current Setting
The Current Setting group box contains a status message indicating which print quality setting is
currently in use. When you make a change in the Print Quality Details dialog box, the setting
changes from This is the "Faster Printing" setting (or This is the “Best Quality” setting) to This
is a "Custom" setting.
Font Settings
In the Font Settings group box, the only available option is Send TrueType as Bitmaps, which
provides an alternative for software programs that cannot easily use TrueType fonts for special
graphic purposes, such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The Send TrueType as Bitmaps check box
is not selected (clear) by default. If you select this option, the driver sends TrueType fonts to the
product as outlines, which retains the standard format (outlines) of the fonts.
Output Settings
The Output Settings group box contains controls for resolution and pattern scaling, and to print all
text as black.
The following are the default values for the Output Settings:
■
Resolution: FastRes 1200 is selected
■
Resolution Enhancement Technology (REt) is On
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
103
HP traditional drivers
The following options are available:
■
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) is selected
■
Print all Text as Black is not selected
Resolution
Resolution refers to the number of dots per inch (dpi) used to print the page. As resolution is
increased, the quality (clarity and visual appeal) of print on the page is improved. However, higher
resolution can also result in longer printing times. The following resolution options are available for
the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers:
■
ProRes 1200 (180 lpi): Prints using a resolution of 1200 x 1200 with 180 lines per inch (lpi). This
prints slower than other resolutions, but has the best print quality.
■
ProRes 1200 (141 lpi): Prints using a resolution of 1200 x 1200 with 141 lines per inch (lpi). It
prints slower than other resolutions, but has the best print quality.
■
FastRes 1200: Prints using a resolution of 1200 x 600. It is faster than full 1200 x 1200
resolution, but has a slightly lower print quality.
■
600 dpi: Prints using standard 600 dpi resolution.
HP traditional drivers
Resolution Enhancement technology (REt)
REt refines the print quality of characters by smoothing out jagged edges that can occur on the
angles and curves of a printed image. It is On by default. Select Off if graphics, particularly scanned
images, are not printing clearly.
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG)
Use the Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) feature to address the moiré effect that is created when certain
programs encounter certain patterns. Use this feature to turn off the pattern scaling. What you lose is
WYSIWYG with patterns, but the printed result might look better. The feature works only with
programs that use vector hatch patterns. This option is selected by default.
Print all Text as Black
The Print All Text as Black feature is not selected by default. When the feature is selected, the
driver prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed as
black, except for white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing reverse
typeface against a dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page, nor
does it affect any text that is part of a graphic.
Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver
The default print quality setting for the HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver is “Best Quality” rather than
“Faster Printing.” The Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver provides
the options for print-quality settings in as shown in the following illustration.
104
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
HP traditional drivers
Figure 3-8 Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver
The following options are available:
■
Current Setting group box
■
Graphics Settings group box
■
Font Settings group box
■
Output Settings group box
Current Setting
The Current Setting group box contains a status message indicating which print quality setting is
currently in use. When you make a change in the Print Quality Details dialog box, the setting
changes from This is the "Best Quality" setting (or This is the “Faster Printing” setting) to This
is a "Custom" setting.
Graphics Settings
The Graphics Settings group box in the HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver has settings for the graphicsrendering mode. The following Rendering Mode: option buttons are available:
■
Automatic. This is the default setting.
■
Send Graphics as Vector. Select this setting to send graphics to the product as a combination
of HP Graphics Language, V2 (HP-GL/2) and raster images. This setting might produce higherquality output.
■
Send Graphics as Raster. Select this setting to send all graphics to the product as images
composed of individual dots. This setting might improve printing speed in some cases.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
105
■
Send Page as Raster. Select this setting to send all graphics and text (TrueType fonts) to the
product as images composed of individual dots. Use Send Page as Raster if you are
experiencing problems with overlapping text and graphics. With this setting, the Send TrueType
as Bitmaps option has no effect.
Font Settings
In the Font Settings group box, the only available option is Send TrueType as Bitmaps, which
provides an alternative for software programs that cannot easily use TrueType fonts for special
graphic purposes, such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The Send TrueType as Bitmaps check box
is not selected (clear) by default. If you select this option, the driver sends TrueType fonts to the
product as outlines, which retains the standard format (outlines) of the fonts.
Output Settings
The Output Settings group box contains controls for resolution, pattern scaling, and printing all text
as black.
The default values for the Output Settings are as follows:
HP traditional drivers
■
Resolution: 600 dpi is selected
■
Resolution Enhancement Technology (REt) is On
■
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) is selected
■
Print all Text as Black is not selected
Resolution
Resolution refers to the number of dots per inch (dpi) used to print the page. As resolution is
increased, the quality (clarity and visual appeal) of print on the page is improved. However, higher
resolution may also result in longer printing times. The following resolution options are available in
the HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver:
■
300 dpi
■
600 dpi
Resolution Enhancement technology (REt)
REt refines the print quality of characters by smoothing out jagged edges that can occur on the
angles and curves of a printed image. It is On by default. Select Off if graphics, particularly scanned
images, are not printing clearly.
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG)
Use the Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) feature to address the moiré effect that is created when certain
programs encounter certain patterns. Use this feature to turn off the pattern scaling. What you lose is
WYSIWYG with patterns, but the printed result might look better. The feature works only with
programs that use vector hatch patterns. This option is selected by default.
106
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Print all Text as Black
The Print All Text as Black feature is not selected by default. When the feature is selected, the
driver prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed as
black, except for white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing reverse
typeface against a dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page, nor
does it affect any text that is part of a graphic.
Effects tab features
HP traditional drivers
The Effects tab is used to create unique media effects such as scaling and watermarks. The
following illustration shows the Effects tab.
Figure 3-9 Effects tab
The Effects tab contains the following controls:
■
Print Task Quick Sets group box
■
Fit to Page group box
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
107
■
Document preview image
■
Watermarks group box
Print Task Quick Sets
The Print Task Quick Sets control is used to store the current combination of driver settings that are
found on all of the other Document Defaults driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by
the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet.
For more information, see Finishing tab features.
Fit To Page group box
The Fit To Page group box contains the following controls:
■
Print Document On setting
■
Scale to Fit check box
■
% of Normal Size setting
Print Document On
HP traditional drivers
Use Print Document On to format the document for one media size, and then print the document on
a different media size, with or without scaling the page image to fit the new media size.
The Print Document On control is disabled by either of the following conditions:
■
% of Normal Size is not 100.
■
Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1.
When Print Document On is selected, the drop-down menu shows the media sizes on which you
can print. The list contains all of the standard media sizes that are supported by the selected media
source, and any custom size that you have created. When Print Document On is selected, Scale to
Fit is automatically selected. Clear this check box if you do not want your document reduced or
enlarged to fit on the selected media size.
Scale to Fit
The Scale to Fit option specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit the
target media size. By default, Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected. If the
setting is turned off, then the document page images will not be scaled, and are instead centered at
full size on the target media. If the document size is larger than the target media size, then the
document image is clipped. If the document size is smaller, then it is centered within the target
media. The following illustration shows preview images for a document formatted for Legal-size
media with the Print Document On option selected, and the target size specified as Letter.
108
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Figure 3-10 Preview images - Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right)
When the size for which the document is formatted (that is, the logical size) differs from the target
size, the document preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical
page in relation to the target page size.
The % of Normal Size option provides a slider bar for scaling the percentage setting. The default
setting in the entry box is 100 percent of the normal size. The normal size is defined as the media
size that is selected within the driver or what the driver receives from the software program (if the
software program does not negotiate the media size with the driver). The driver scales the page by
the appropriate factor and sends it to the printer.
The limits of the range are from 25 percent to 400 percent, and any values outside the range are
adjusted to those limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the Tab key
is pressed or another control is selected).
Any change to the scale also changes the document preview image, which increases or decreases
from the upper-left corner of the preview.
The slider bar controls the scale directly. The value in the edit box changes as the scroll bar indicator
is dragged, and the document preview image is updated to the new image scale. Each click on the
scroll bar arrows increases or decreases the scale by one percent. Each click on the slider bar
affects the scale by 10 percent.
You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the scroll bar indicator at the default Windows
resolution; use the scroll bar indicator to approximate the value that you want, and then use the scroll
bar arrows to refine the value. Or, type the value into the entry box.
The following settings disable % of Normal Size:
■
Print Document On (on the Effects tab) is selected.
■
Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1.
Watermarks
Use the Watermarks feature to select a watermark, create your own custom watermarks (text only),
or edit an existing watermark.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
109
HP traditional drivers
% of Normal Size
The Watermarks group box contains the following controls:
■
Watermarks drop-down menu
■
First Page Only check box
■
Edit button (opens the Watermark Details dialog box)
Watermarks drop-down menu
The following watermarks are preset in the driver:
■
(None)
■
Confidential
■
Draft
■
SAMPLE
The drop-down menu shows alphabetically-sorted watermarks that are currently available on the
system, plus the string "(none)", which indicates that no watermark is selected. This is the default
setting. Any watermark that is selected from this list appears in the document preview image.
HP traditional drivers
First Page Only
When First Page Only is selected, the watermark is printed only on the first page of the document.
The First Page Only check box is not available when the current watermark selection is "(none)".
Watermarks are applied to logical pages. For example, when Pages per Sheet is set to "4" and First
Page Only is turned off, four watermarks appear on the physical page (one on each logical page).
Edit
Click Edit, and the Watermark Details dialog box appears. The following illustration shows the
Watermark Details dialog box.
110
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
The dialog box shows a document preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark
and controlling the message angle and the font attributes.
The Watermark Details dialog box contains the following controls:
■
Current Watermarks
■
Watermark Message
■
Message Angle
■
Document preview image
■
Font Attributes
Current Watermarks
The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks, both predefined
watermarks that are available in the driver and any new watermarks that you have created.
To create a new watermark, click New. The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks list
and in the Watermark Message edit box as Untitled until you name it.
To name the new watermark, type the selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit box.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
111
HP traditional drivers
Figure 3-11 Watermark Details dialog box
To delete a watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list and click Delete.
NOTE You can have no more that 30 watermarks in the Current Watermarks list at one
time. When you reach the limit of 30 watermarks, the New button is disabled, and a Bubble
Help message appears that explains why the button is disabled and how to make it available.
To edit an existing watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list. If you change
the Watermark Message for that watermark, you are, in effect, creating a new watermark.
Watermark Message
The Watermark Message is also the name that identifies the watermark in the Current Watermarks
list, except when more than one watermark has the same message. For example, you might want
several different watermarks with the message DRAFT, each in a different font or size. When this
occurs, the string is appended with a space, a pound sign, and a number (for example, Draft #2).
When a number is added, the number two is used first, but if the resulting name is also in the list,
then the number increases until the name is unique.
Message Angle
HP traditional drivers
Use the controls in the Message Angle group box to print the watermark in a diagonal, horizontal, or
angle (custom) orientation to the text on the page. The default is Diagonal. All three settings
automatically center the watermark string within the page; the selection of a particular setting affects
only the angle of the string placement. Diagonal places the text along a line that spans the lower-left
to upper-right corners of the page.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Watermark Details dialog box.
The document preview image changes to reflect the modifications that you make in the Watermark
Details dialog box.
Font Attributes
Use the controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the shading, size, and style
of the font.
The Font Attributes group box contains the following controls:
■
Name
■
Color
■
Shading
■
Size
■
Style
Name
The Name drop-down menu lists TrueType fonts that are currently installed on the system. The
default is language-dependent.
112
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Color
The Color drop-down menu contains a single setting: Gray.
Shading
■
Lightest
■
Very Light (default)
■
Light
■
Medium Light
■
Medium
■
Medium Dark
■
Dark
■
Very Dark
■
Darkest
Size
Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu. The default point size is languagedependent. The default point size for preset watermarks is language-dependent.
Style
The choice of Regular, Bold, Italic, and Bold Italic is available from the Style drop-down menu.
The default Style setting for new and current watermarks is Regular.
Default settings
The default settings for new watermarks are Arial font, Gray color, Very Light shading, 80 points,
and Regular style. The default settings for preset watermarks are Arial font, Gray color, Very Light
shading, and Bold style. The default font name and point size for preset watermarks are languagedependent, and vary.
Click OK to accept all of the changes that have been made in the Watermark Details dialog box.
Clicking Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark, and then
select a different watermark or click New, all of the changes made to the previous watermark are
saved, and only the current, unsaved changes can be canceled.
Paper tab features
Use the Paper tab to specify the size, type, and source of the media. You can also use this tab to
indicate different paper-selection choices for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, and
back cover of the document. The following illustration shows the Paper tab.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
113
HP traditional drivers
The default Shading setting for new and preset watermarks is Very Light. The following range of
shades is available from the Shading drop-down menu:
HP traditional drivers
Figure 3-12 Paper tab
The Paper tab contains the following controls:
■
Print Task Quick Sets group box
■
Paper Options group box
■
Document preview image
■
printer image
Print Task Quick Sets
The Print Task Quick Sets control is used to store the current combination of driver settings that
appear on all of the other Document Defaults driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset (by
the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet.
For more information, see Finishing tab features.
114
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Paper Options
Figure 3-13 Paper Options group box (default)
The appearance of the Paper Options group box changes when the Use Different Paper/Covers
check box is selected. For convenience, the settings in the Paper Options group box are described
in the following order:
■
Size is
■
Source Is
■
Type is
■
Custom
■
Use Different Paper/Covers
Size is
The Size is: setting is a drop-down menu that lists all of the supported media sizes.
NOTE When you move the mouse over the dimensions label, the mouse cursor changes
from an arrow to a gloved hand. Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and
metric units.
You can specify size for all of the settings in the Paper Options group box. When you set the media
size in the driver, the entire print-job output uses that media size. That is, if the print job uses Lettersize media, any option that you select from the available Use Different Paper/Covers options must
also use Letter-size media.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
115
HP traditional drivers
The settings that are specified in the Paper Options group box on the Paper tab apply to all of the
pages of the document. The following illustration shows the Paper Options group box and the
selections that are available by default.
Because driver settings are overridden by media-size settings in most software programs, it is
generally best to use the driver to set media size only for software programs that lack a media-size
setting, such as NotePad, or when you are producing a book or a booklet that does not require
different media sizes.
NOTE Certain software programs can override the size command and specify different
media sizes within a single document.
For information about media sizes, see the Media attributes section of this guide.
Use Different Paper/Covers
When the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected and different options are configured,
the Size is:, Source is:, and Type is: drop-down menus change, offering a variety of options. For
more information, see Use Different Paper/Covers.
Source Is
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source
trays depends on the product accessories. Any optional source trays that are installed through the
Configure tab also appear here.
The Source is: drop-down menu can contain the following options:
HP traditional drivers
■
Automatically select
■
Manual Feed in Tray 1
■
Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose tray)
■
Tray 2 (250-sheet tray)
■
Tray 3 (500-sheet tray)
The default setting is Automatically Select. When this setting is selected, the HP LaserJet 2410,
2420, and 2430 printer uses the source tray that supports the media size that you have selected. If
you select a source tray other than Automatically select, make sure that the correct media size is
loaded in the source tray. For more information about media sources, see the Media attributes
section of this guide.
Type is
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and
2430 printer supports. When you use the default setting, Unspecified, the product uses the default
media type, which is usually Plain.
The following standard types appear in the lists:
116
■
Unspecified
■
Plain
■
Preprinted
■
Letterhead
■
Transparency
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
■
Prepunched
■
Labels
■
Bond
■
Recycled
■
Color
■
Cardstock (164 to 200 g/m2 or 43 to 53 lb.)
■
Envelope
■
Light (60 to 75 g/m2 or 16 to 20 lb.)
■
Rough
The default setting is Unspecified, and the program selects the media type. If you select a different
setting, make sure that the correct media type is loaded in the tray that you selected in the Source
is: setting. For more information about media types, see the Media attributes section of this guide.
Custom
HP traditional drivers
The Custom Paper Size dialog box appears when you click the Custom button on the Paper tab.
The following illustration shows the initial appearance of the Custom Paper Size dialog box.
NOTE The Custom button is not available when Use Different Paper/Covers is selected
and any setting other than First Page is also selected.
Figure 3-14 Custom Paper Size dialog box
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
117
When the Custom Paper Size dialog box appears, the drop-down menu in the Name group contains
one of two things, depending on the current paper-size selection on the Paper tab:
■
If the paper-size selection is a previously defined custom size, then the drop-down menu
contains the name of that custom size.
■
If the paper-size selection is a standard media size, then the drop-down menu shows the default
name Untitled for a custom media size.
NOTE In Windows 98 and Windows Me, two names for the same size media can coexist (for
example, "big" and "BIG" can both be used as names for custom-size media measuring 8.4
inches by 11 inches). In Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, and Windows XP, both uppercase
and lowercase names can be used, but they cannot be used to name the same media size.
The new name is compared only against the list of user-defined custom media-size names, and not
against the standard media-size names.
The complete set of titles for this button and the specific characteristics that determine its title and
capabilities are discussed in the Save, Delete, or Rename section.
Name
HP traditional drivers
The Name drop-down menu shows the name of the custom media size that was selected most
recently. Use the Name drop-down menu to select from the list of currently defined custom media
sizes, or to type a new name for a custom media size.
The name that appears in the Name drop-down menu is one of three things, depending on the
following conditions:
■
If a saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu and the other
controls in the dialog box have not been changed since, then the Name drop-down menu shows
the name of the last selected custom media size.
■
If the width or height controls have been changed since a custom size was selected or saved, or
if a saved media size has just been deleted, then the Name drop-down menu shows the default
name of "Untitled."
■
If a new name has been typed into the Name drop-down menu for the purpose of saving a new
size or renaming an existing size, then that new name will remain in the drop-down menu until a
saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu.
If you type a new name into the Name drop-down menu, but then do not click the Save button, you
should be able to change the width and height values without losing the name. However, if a saved
media-size name is selected from the drop-down menu, any unsaved name or size values are lost
without warning, and replaced by the values of the selected custom media size.
118
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Save, Delete, or Rename
■
Save is the button title whenever the height and width values have been changed since the most
recent save action or since the selection of an existing custom media size. Clicking the button
causes the name in the Name drop-down menu to be compared against each of the saved
names. If a duplicate is found, a dialog box appears, asking if it is okay to replace the existing
item. If you click Yes, the old item is updated with the new values. If you click No, the driver
returns to the Custom Paper Size dialog box, where you can type a different name. The new
name is compared only against the list of user-defined custom media names, and not against the
standard media-size names. Whenever the command button has the Save title, it is the default
button.
■
Delete is the button title whenever the name of an existing (previously saved) custom media size
appears in the Name drop-down menu, such as immediately after selecting an item from the
drop-down menu or clicking the Save button. Clicking the Delete button causes the saved
custom media size to be deleted, after which the Name drop-down menu changes to Untitled,
the height and width controls are unchanged, and the button title changes to Save.
■
Rename is the button title when you type something into the Name drop-down menu after
selecting an existing custom media size from the drop-down menu. If no duplicate is found, then
the name of the stored custom media size changes to match the contents of the Name dropdown menu.
The following table illustrates the relationships between the Name drop-down menu, the command
button, and the actions that take users from one state to another.
Table 3-3 Name drop-down menu text strings
State
Drop-down menu
contents
Button label
Action
Next state
1
Untitled
Save
Click Save.
3
Type something into the Name drop-down menu.
2
Change the width or height values.
1
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu.
3
Click Save.
3
Type something into the Name drop-down menu.
2
Change the width or height values.
2
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu.
3
Click Delete.
1
Type something into the Name drop-down menu.
4
Change the width or height values.
1
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu.
3
Click Rename (when the name is unique).
3
Click Rename (when the name is a duplicate).
4
Type something into the Name drop-down menu.
4
2
3
4
<user-typed text>
<name of saved item>
<user-typed text>
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
Save
Delete
Rename
119
HP traditional drivers
The dynamic command button located next to the Name drop-down menu has three possible labels:
Save, Delete, and Rename.
Table 3-3 Name drop-down menu text strings (continued)
State
Drop-down menu
contents
Button label
Action
Next state
Change the width or height values.
2
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu.
3
Custom size (width and height controls)
The width and height values can be changed either by typing numeric strings into the edit boxes, or
by using the up and down arrows.
Any entry that is greater than the maximum limits of the width and height control is rounded down to
the maximum valid entry, while any entry that is smaller than the minimum limits of the width and
height control is rounded up to the minimum valid entry. See Custom width and height control limits.
If units are in millimeters, the custom media-size range minimum is the limit rounded up to the
nearest whole millimeter. The custom media-size range maximum is the limit rounded down to the
nearest whole millimeter. Any non-numerical entry reverts to the last valid entry. Width and height
entries are validated when the focus has changed.
HP traditional drivers
The resolution of each control is one millimeter or one-tenth of an inch, depending on the current
measurement units. Clicking the up and down arrows increases or decreases the current value by
the increment amount (within the allowed range of values). The computer determines the rate at
which the values change.
Unit indicator labels change dynamically to indicate inches or millimeters, depending on the
measurement units the driver is currently using. To change measurement units, click the dynamic
measurement-units button (either Use Inches or Use Metric).
Custom width and height control limits
The minimum media size for the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer is 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5
inches) and the maximum is 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches). The following table summarizes
media size limits for each media-handling device.
Table 3-4 PCL 6 custom media sizes
Tray
Dimensions
Minimum
Maximum
Tray 1 (multipurpose)
Width
76.2 mm (3 inches)
215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
Height
127.0 mm (5 inches)
355.6 mm (14 inches)
Width
Custom sizes not supported
Custom sizes not supported
Height
Custom sizes not supported
Custom sizes not supported
Width
Custom sizes not supported
Custom sizes not supported
Height
Custom sizes not supported
Custom sizes not supported
Width
Custom sizes not supported
Custom sizes not supported
Height
Custom sizes not supported
Custom sizes not supported
Tray 2 (250-sheet)
Tray 3 (500-sheet)
Duplexing unit
120
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Paper and envelope icons
The paper and envelope icons visually define width and height.
Dynamic measurement units
Use the dynamic measurement-units button to toggle the unit of measurement between standard
(inches) and metric (millimeters) units of measurement. The label on this button is dynamic,
depending on the measurement units that are in use. If the custom size currently shows the
measurements in inches, the button is labeled Use Millimeters. If the custom size currently shows
the measurements in millimeters, the button is labeled Use Inches. Click the button to switch
measurement-unit types.
Close
The Close button closes the Custom Paper Size dialog box according to the logic in the following
table. In all cases, any custom media sizes that are successfully saved (and not renamed or deleted)
while the dialog box is open will remain in the Size is: drop-down menu on the Paper tab. The
following table lists options that appear when you click the Close button.
If the drop-down menu contains
And the button says
Then this happens when the Close
button is clicked
Untitled
Save
The dialog box closes, but you lose the
changes that were not saved.
The current media size remains the
same as it was when the Custom
button was clicked.
<user-typed text>
Save
The dialog box closes, but you lose the
changes that were not saved.
The current media size remains the
same as it was when the Custom
button was clicked.
<name of saved item>
Delete
The dialog box closes, and the current
media size is set to that which was last
shown in the drop-down menu.
<user-typed text>
Rename
The dialog box closes, but you lose the
changes that were not saved.
The current media size remains the
same as it was when the Custom
button was clicked.
Use Different Paper/Covers
You can print books that are comprised of different media types using the Use Different Paper/
Covers options.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
121
HP traditional drivers
Table 3-5 Close dialog box text strings
When you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box, the following settings can appear in
the group box, along with associated options:
■
Front Cover
■
First Page
■
Other Pages
■
Last Page
■
Back Cover
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the size that you selected in the First Page settings and the Size is:
driver setting becomes unavailable for all of the other Use Different Paper/Covers options.
Therefore, the First Page settings are described first in the following sections.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select
remain configured until you close the software program.
Each option for the Use Different Paper/Covers setting is described in the following sections.
First Page
HP traditional drivers
Use the First Page option to select an alternative media size, type, or source for the first page of a
document. The following illustration shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you
select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box. The First Page setting is selected by default.
Figure 3-15 First Page options
122
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
The following are the First Page options:
■
Size is: drop-down menu
■
Source is: drop-down menu
■
Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: driver setting for the first page applies to the entire print job. When this is set, the setting
becomes unavailable for all the other Use Different Paper/Covers options.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source
trays depends on the product accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed through the
Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the Source
Is section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is: in the Type
is section of this chapter.
Use the Front Cover options to include a blank or preprinted front cover on a document, or to
include a front cover from a source tray that is different from the one that is used for the remainder of
the document.
The following illustration shows the Front Cover setting and options.
Figure 3-16 Front Cover options
The following are the Front Cover options:
■
Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
■
Source is: drop-down menu
■
Type is: drop-down menu
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
123
HP traditional drivers
Front Cover
When you select Front Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check
box to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down
menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Front Cover option.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a front cover to the document. The
list of source trays depends on the product accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed
through the Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see
theSource Is section of this chapter.
TheType is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more
information about the Type is:drop-down menu settings, see the Type is: in the Type is section of
this chapter.
Other Pages
Use the Other Pages options to select an alternative media source (or the same source as First
Page) for the other pages of the document.
The Other Pages setting and options are shown in the following illustration.
HP traditional drivers
Figure 3-17 Other Pages options
The following are the Other Pages options:
■
Source is: drop-down menu
■
Type is: drop-down menu
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source
trays depends on the product accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed through the
Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the Source
Is section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is: in the Type
is section of this chapter.
124
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Last Page
Figure 3-18 Last Page options
The following are the Last Page options:
■
Source is: drop-down menu
■
Type is: drop-down menu
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source
trays depends on the product accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed through the
Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the Source
Is section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is: in the Type
is section of this chapter.
Back Cover
Use the Back Cover options to include a blank or preprinted back cover on a document.
The following illustration shows the Back Cover setting and options.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
125
HP traditional drivers
Use the Last Page options to select an alternative media type or source for the last page of a
document. The following illustration shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you
select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box.
Figure 3-19 Back Cover setting
The following are the Back Cover options:
HP traditional drivers
■
Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
■
Source is: drop-down menu
■
Type is: drop-down menu
When you select Back Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check
box to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down
menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Back Cover option.
NOTE The Back Cover options are not available when the Booklet Printing Layout setting
is enabled on the Finishing tab. The back cover setting is unavailable, because this page
would otherwise be printed in the middle of a booklet.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a back cover to the document. The
list of source trays depends on the product accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed
through the Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see
the Source Is section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the Type is: in the Type is section of
this chapter.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of all of the Document Defaults driver
tabs except the Job Storage tab. For more information about the document preview image, see the
Finishing tab features section of this chapter.
126
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Product image
The bitmap image in the lower-right portion of the Paper tab represents the current physical
configuration of the product and corresponds to its configuration data. It should look the same as the
image that appears in the same location on the Configure tab in the printer Properties dialog.
On the Paper tab, the product image contains hot spots where you can select a media source. When
you use the mouse to move the pointer over a hot spot, the arrow reverts to a gloved hand. The
current media source tray, whether selected from the drop-down menu or from a product image hot
spot, is highlighted on the product image. The following points are worth noting:
■
The Automatically Select setting in the Source is: drop-down menu does not have a
corresponding area to highlight in the product image. Selecting other settings in this menu
highlights the corresponding part in the product image.
■
Selecting the area that represents a tray in the image always selects the corresponding tray in
the Source is: option. Manual Feed in Tray 1, which is available from the Source is: drop-down
menu, cannot be selected by selecting the image.
■
On the Paper tab, only source trays have product image hot spots and can be highlighted.
Job Storage tab features
HP traditional drivers
You can store print jobs in the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer memory for printing at a
later time. These job-storage features are described in the following sections.
The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if Job Storage is enabled. To support jobstorage features for complex jobs, or if you often print complex graphics, print postscript (.PS)
documents, or use many downloaded fonts, HP recommends that you install additional memory.
Added memory also gives you more flexibility in supporting job storage features. A minimum total
memory of 80 MB is required to use Job Storage features.
After additional memory is installed, the driver must be configured to reflect the changes in the
product. If bidirectional communication is enabled in your environment, the Update Now feature can
be used to update the drivers. For more information, see the Configure tab features in this chapter.
To configure the drivers manually after installing additional memory, follow these steps:
1
Click Start, select Settings, and then click Printers.
2
Right-click the product name, click Properties, and then click the Configure tab.
3
Under Other Options, click More....
4
If additional memory has been installed, change the setting in the Total Memory: drop-down
menu. If you select a minimum of 80 MB, this also selects the Job Storage Enabled check box.
5
Click OK to make the job-storage features available.
NOTE To disable Job Storage, click Start, select Settings, and then click Printers. Rightclick the product name, click Properties, click the Configure tab, click More..., and then click
to clear the Job Storage Enabled check box in the More Configuration Options box. When
Job Storage is disabled, the Job Storage tab is not visible.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
127
If Job Storage is enabled, two Job Storage Mode settings are available on the Job Storage tab:
■
Proof and Hold
■
Private Job
Job Storage tab
The following illustration shows the Job Storage tab.
HP traditional drivers
Figure 3-20 Job Storage tab
The Job Storage tab contains the following controls:
128
■
Print Task Quick Sets group box
■
Status group box (unlabeled)
■
Job Storage Mode group box
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
■
PIN group box
■
Job Notification Options group box
■
User Name group box
■
Job Name group box
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all other Document Defaults driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the
administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For
more information, see Finishing tab features.
Status group box
The unlabeled group box on the Job Storage tab contains a status message about the destination of
a print job. The status information changes depending on the selections that are made on the Job
Storage tab.
Job Storage Mode
HP traditional drivers
Use the Job Storage Mode options on the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer to store
documents at the product and then control their printing at the product control panel.
The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers offer the following Job Storage Mode options:
■
Off
■
Proof and Hold
■
Private Job
These options and the settings that control them are described in the following sections.
Off
When selected, this option turns the Job Storage feature off (it is disabled), which means that the
print job will not be stored in the product.
Proof and Hold
To use the Proof and Hold option, Job Storage must be enabled, and the product must have a
minimum total memory of 80 MB.
When selected, this option stores the print job in memory and prints only the first copy of the job,
allowing you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining
copies of the print job at the product control panel. You can set the number of proof-and-hold print
jobs that can be stored in the product at the control panel.
After it is released for printing, the proof-and-hold job is immediately deleted from the product. If
more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. Proof-and-hold jobs
are deleted if you turn off the product.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
129
NOTE The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 proof-and-hold jobs.
The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the
default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held
document.
Private Job
To use the Private Job option, Job Storage must be enabled, and the product must have a minimum
total memory of 80 MB.
When you select Private Job, the print job is sent to the product, but is not printed until you request
the job at the product control panel. Selecting Private Job activates the PIN group box. The print job
can be printed only after you type the correct PIN at the control panel. After the job is printed, the job
is deleted from the product. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential
documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing.
After it is released for printing, the private job is immediately deleted from the product. If more copies
are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. Private jobs are deleted if you turn
off the product.
Using a PIN for Private Job
HP traditional drivers
The Private Job option can be secured by a four-digit personal identification number (PIN). You
must type in this number at the product control panel before the product can print the job.
The group box labeled PIN is usually inactive. It becomes active when you select the Private Job
option.
The Private Job/PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters (0 though 9). If
you type non-numeric characters, they are removed immediately. The text field does not allow you to
type in more than four characters. The field temporarily accepts fewer than four digits in the string,
but when the edit field loses focus, the zeroes pad the left end until the PIN contains exactly four
digits. The default initialized value for the PIN is 0000 for Private Job.
PIN
The PIN group box is usually inactive. The option within the PIN group box, PIN to Print, is activated
if you select Private Job. If selected, you must type in the PIN number at the product control panel in
order to print the job. For more information, see Using a PIN for Private Job.
Job notification
Clicking a job storage mode selection causes the Job Notification Options group box to become
available. The Display Job ID when printing check box is selected by default. The Display Job ID
when printing option causes a pop-up dialog box to appear when the job-storage print job is printed.
The dialog box shows the user name and job name that are associated with the stored print job, as
well as the product name, port, and location.
130
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
User Name
Use the User Name settings to help identify the job at the product control panel. The following are
the User Name settings:
■
Windows User Name. This option associates your Windows user name with the stored print job.
The Windows user name automatically appears in the text field below the User Name options.
■
Custom. Use this option to type a custom name for the stored print job. When you click the
Custom radio button, the text field below the option becomes available. The User Name field
can contain no more than 16 characters.
Job Name
If Custom is selected but no job name is specified, as soon as the focus is removed from the control
(that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another control is selected), the empty string is replaced with
<Automatic>. In those languages for which <Automatic> cannot be translated without the use of
invalid characters, the driver uses a string of three dashes. The acceptable characters for job name
and user name vary for each operating system. The string must be of a length and type that can
appear on the product control-panel display.
Use the If Job Name Exists drop-down box to choose whether a duplicate job name should have a
number appended to it, or whether it should overwrite an existing job with the same name that has
already been sent to the printer.
Using Job Storage features when printing
To use Job Storage features when printing, follow these steps:
1
Click File and then click Print from the software program. The Print dialog box appears.
NOTE Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without Job
Storage features.
2
Click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears.
3
Click the Job Storage tab.
4
Select one of the job-storage options (described previously) by clicking the appropriate option
button, and then complete any required fields.
5
Click OK.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
131
HP traditional drivers
Use the text box in the Job Name group box to specify a name to identify the job at the product
control panel. The Automatic option is the default selection. It uses a default job name for the stored
print job. The file name of the print job is used if it is available to the print driver. Otherwise, the
software program name or a time stamp is used for the job name. If you would like to enter a custom
name, select Custom and type the custom job name in the text box. The Job Name text box can
contain no more than 16 characters.
Releasing a Job Storage print job
After you send a print job that uses the Job Storage feature, you can release the job to print from
the product control panel.
1
Press the SELECT button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus. RETRIEVE JOB is
highlighted.
2
Press the SELECT button.
3
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to your User Name, and then press the SELECT button.
4
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to the Job Name, and then press the SELECT button.
PRINT is highlighted.
5
Press the SELECT button.
6
If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press the up and down buttons to select the first digit of
the PIN, and then press the SELECT button. The number in the product control-panel display
changes to an asterisk. Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with step 7.
HP traditional drivers
7
Press the up and down buttons to select the number of copies to print.
8
Press the SELECT button to print the job.
Deleting a Job Storage print job
Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the product hard disk. You can do this from the
product control panel.
1
Press the SELECT button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus. RETRIEVE JOB is
highlighted.
2
Press the SELECT button.
3
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to your User Name, and then press the SELECT button.
4
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to the Job Name, and then press the SELECT button.
5
Press the up and down buttons to select DELETE.
6
If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press the up and down buttons to select the first digit of
the PIN, and then press the SELECT button. The number in the product control-panel display
changes to an asterisk. Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with step 7.
7
Press the SELECT button to delete the job.
The stored print job is deleted and the product returns to the READY state.
Basics tab features
The Basics tab provides options for setting the number of copies to be printed and for the orientation
of the print job. You can also use it to retrieve information about the driver.
132
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
HP traditional drivers
Figure 3-21 Basics tab
The Basics tab contains the following controls:
■
Print Task Quick Sets group box
■
Copies group box
■
Orientation group box
■
Document preview image
■
About button
Print Task Quick Sets
The Print Task Quick Sets control is available on all of the Document Default driver tabs (the
Finishing, Effects, Paper, Job Storage, and Basics tabs). The feature is used to store the current
combination of driver settings that appear on all other tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset
(by the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per
sheet. For more information, see the Finishing tab features section of this chapter.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
133
Copies
Use the Copies option to specify the number of copies to print.
The number of copies that you request appears in the Copies group box. You can select the number
by typing in the box or by using the up and down arrows to the right of the text box. Valid entries are
numbers from 1 to 9999 for the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer. The copies value will not
advance from the maximum number (9999) to 1 when the up arrow is used, or change from 1 to the
maximum number (9999) when the down arrow is used. When you click another group box or leave
the Basics tab, invalid entries into the edit box (such as non-numerical input, numbers less than 1, or
numbers greater than the maximum allowed) are changed to the last valid value that appeared in the
box. The default number of copies is 1.
Because you can set the number of copies that you want from some software programs, conflicts
between the software program you are using and the driver can arise. In most cases, the software
program and the driver communicate, so that the number of copies set in one location (such as the
program) will appear in the other (such as the driver). For some programs, this communication does
not take place, and the copies values are treated independently. For these programs, setting 10
copies in the program and then setting 10 copies in the driver will result in 100 copies (10 x 10) being
printed. It is recommended that you set the number of copies in the program, wherever possible.
Orientation
HP traditional drivers
Orientation refers to the layout of the image on the page, and does not affect the manner in which
media is fed into the product. You can specify the orientation of the print job. The three available
orientations are portrait, landscape, and rotated. The default orientation is Portrait.
NOTE Nearly all software programs establish the orientation for the printed page, so the
page orientation in the driver is useful only for the few software programs that do not set an
orientation.
The Orientation group box contains three options:
■
Portrait. The top edge of the document is the shorter edge of the media.
■
Landscape. The top edge of the document is the longer edge of the media.
■
Rotate by 180 degrees. This creates a landscape or portrait orientation in which the image is
rotated 180 degrees. This setting is useful for printing prepunched media.
You can toggle orientation between portrait and landscape by clicking the document preview image.
If you select the Rotate by 180 degrees check box, no change occurs in the document preview
image.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of all of the Document Defaults driver
tabs except Job Storage. For more information about the document preview image, see Finishing
tab features.
About
When you click the About button on the Basics tab, or you click the HP logo on any of the driver
Document Defaults tabs, the About This Driver dialog box appears. To close the About box, click
134
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
HP traditional drivers
OK, press Esc, press Alt + F4, or press Enter. The following figure shows the About This Driver
dialog box. The information it contains varies according to driver, date, and version.
Figure 3-22 About This Driver dialog box
The About This Driver dialog box provides the following information:
■
Printer name
■
Driver name
■
Print driver version number
■
Copyright information
■
Driver Extensions (if any)
■
Configuration Status
The product name, the driver name, the print-driver version number, and the copyright information
appear at the top of the About This Driver dialog box.
The Driver Extensions group box lists the driver extensions, if any.
The Configuration Status group box indicates whether the driver was autoconfigured, whether
administrator preferences were set, the date the driver was last configured, and whether the
configuration is default or user-defined.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
135
Properties tabs
The Properties tabs contain information about and options for configuring the product.
NT Forms tab features
NOTE The NT Forms tab is in the Properties dialog for the print driver.
To gain access to the Properties tabs, click Start on the Window task bar, click Settings, and
then click Printers. Right-click the product name, and then click Properties.
The NT Forms tab appears only in the Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 operating environment. The NT
Forms tab (like the Configure tab) can be viewed only from the Properties window. The following
illustration shows the NT Forms tab.
HP traditional drivers
Figure 3-23 NT Forms tab
Use the NT Forms tab to specify which media sizes and types are loaded in each of the available
source trays. This constrains the choices that are available in the Size and Type lists on the Paper
tab in the Document Defaults section of the driver.
136
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
The NT Forms tab contains a single group box (the Form/Tray Assignments group box), which
contains the following controls:
■
The Available Trays drop-down menu contains all the trays that are specified on the Configure
tab.
■
The This Tray Contains/Size (Forms) drop-down menu contains a list of standard media sizes
that the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers support, as well as any custom forms that
are defined in the Paper tab.
■
The This Tray Contains/Type drop-down menu lists all of the media types that the HP LaserJet
2410, 2420, and 2430 printers support.
■
The Clear All button removes all the size and type constraints on the Paper tab in the
Document Defaults section of the driver.
1
Select the appropriate tray from the Available Trays drop-down menu.
2
Use the This Tray Contains/Size (Forms) drop-down menu to select the media size (or form)
that is loaded in that tray.
3
Use the This Tray Contains/Type drop-down menu to select the media type that is configured
for the tray.
4
Repeat steps 1 through 3 for the remaining trays.
5
Click OK to enable your settings, or, if necessary, click the Clear All button to reconfigure all of
the trays and remove the size and type constraints that have been imposed on the Paper tab.
HP traditional drivers
Configuring the trays
Configure tab features
The Configure tab is in the Properties section of the print driver.
To gain access to the Properties tabs, click Start on the Window task bar, click Settings, and then
click Printers. Right-click the product name, and then click Properties.
The Configure tab is also available when the driver is opened from the Printers folder by clicking
Properties. When you open the driver from within a program, the Configure tab is not visible (with a
few exceptions, such as when using Excel 5.0 or Corel® Chart 4.0).
Use the Configure tab to tell the driver about the product hardware configuration. If bidirectional
communication is enabled in a supported environment, configure the settings on this tab by clicking
the Update Now button. If your environment does not support bidirectional communication, the
Update Now button is unavailable, so you must manually configure the options on this tab.
When opened from the Printers folder, the Configure tab appears as shown in the following
illustration.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
137
HP traditional drivers
Figure 3-24 Configure tab
The Configure tab contains the following controls:
■
Printer Model group box
■
Paper Handling Options group box
■
Other Options group box
■
Automatic Configuration group box
■
Product image
Printer Model
In the Printer Model group box, the driver title depends on the product model being used. Selection
of any model from the Printer Model drop-down menu makes the appropriate changes to other
configuration options on the tab.
The Printer-Model setting automatically changes to User-Configured whenever you manually
change any of the device Configure tab settings.
The list of models and the changes they produce are described in the table below.
138
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Table 3-6 Printer model bundles
Model
Duplexer
Mopier
Enabled
Other Options (in the More
Configuration Options dialog
box)
500-Sheet
Paper Tray
Job Storage
DWS
Total Memory
3.0
32 MB
x
3.0
48 MB
x
6.0
64 MB
x
6.0
64 MB
HP LaserJet
2410 or
HP LaserJet
2420 printer
HP LaserJet
2420d printer
x
HP LaserJet
2420n printer
HP LaserJet
2420dn printer
x
HP LaserJet
2430t printer
x
x
3.0
48 MB
HP LaserJet
2430tn printer
x
x
3.0
64 MB
x
x
14.0
64 MB
HP LaserJet
2430dtn printer
x
If it is installed and working, the bidirectional mechanism will detect the correct model and update the
configuration accordingly, either during installation or when you select Update Now on the
Configure tab. However, the product model name shown in the Printer Model text box does not
change.
Paper Handling Options
The Paper Handling Options group box contains the following controls:
■
Duplexing Unit check box
■
Allow Manual Duplexing check box
■
Mopier Enabled check box
■
Optional Paper Sources drop-down menu
Duplexing Unit
The HP LaserJet 2420d, 2420dn, and 2430dtn printer models are equipped with automatic 2-sided
printing (duplexing), which allows you to print on both sides of supported media. Automatic two-sided
printing is not supported for certain media types, including transparencies, labels, envelopes, and
cardstock.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
139
HP traditional drivers
Paper Handling Options
NOTE The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer supports smart duplexing. The
product uses the smart duplexing feature to detect information on both sides of the print job
pages and only runs the pages through the duplexing unit if printable information appears on
the second side of the page.
Allow Manual Duplexing
Select Allow Manual Duplexing to print on both sides of any size and most types of media (except
transparencies, envelopes, and labels). To use this feature, you must reinsert the media stack into
the input tray to print the second side. The product pauses while you make this adjustment.
Mopier Enabled
The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated
copies from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases performance and
reduces network traffic by transmitting the job to the product once, and then storing it. The remainder
of the copies are printed at the fastest speed. All documents that are printed in mopier mode can be
created, controlled, managed, and finished from the computer, which eliminates the extra step of
using a photocopier.
The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers support the transmit-once mopying feature when the
product has a minimum total memory of 80 MB, and the Mopier Enabled setting on the Configure
tab is on.
HP traditional drivers
Mopier mode and collation
Mopying and collating print jobs are independent but closely related functions. The print driver
performs mopying, which is the ability to send multiple original print jobs to the product. Collating is
controlled by using either the print driver or the document software program. The mopying mode is
selected by default in the driver, and can be disabled by clearing the Mopier Enabled selection on
the Configure tab to disable the feature.
You can control collation through the print driver by selecting or clearing the Ignore Application
Collation check box in the More Configuration Options dialog box that appears when you click the
More... button on the Configure tab. You can clear the check box, which is available only when the
Mopier Enabled setting on the Configure tab is selected, to allow the software program to control
collation.
To receive uncollated multiple copies of a print job with the mopier enabled, you must clear the
Ignore Application Collation check box and make sure that the software program collation feature
is not selected.
The following table shows the relation between Mopier Enabled settings and collation settings in the
software program and the driver. The first three columns show the settings; the last column,
"Expected result" shows how a three-page print job would appear.
Table 3-7 Driver Mopier mode and collation settings
140
Mopier Enabled
Application collation
Ignore Application
Collation
Expected result
Not selected
Not selected
Not available
3 copies uncollated
Not selected
Selected
Not available
3 copies collated
Selected
Not selected
Not selected
3 copies uncollated
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Table 3-7 Driver Mopier mode and collation settings (continued)
Mopier Enabled
Application collation
Ignore Application
Collation
Expected result
Selected
Not selected
Selected
3 copies uncollated
Selected
Selected
Not selected
3 copies collated by printer
Selected
Selected
Selected
3 copies collated by printer
Optional Paper Sources
The Optional Paper Sources drop-down menu lists optional media source trays. The list of
available source trays varies depending on your product , its input accessories, and the product
configuration settings on the Configure tab.
For the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer, the following settings are available in the
Optional Paper Sources drop-down menu:
■
(None). This is the default setting.
■
HP 500-Sheet Input tray
The Other Options group box contains a single More... command button. Clicking the More... button
opens the More Configuration Options dialog box.
More configuration options
When you click the More... button under Other Options, more configuration options are available.
The More Configuration Options dialog box is shown in the following illustration.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
141
HP traditional drivers
Other Options
HP traditional drivers
Figure 3-25 More Configuration Options dialog box
The More Configuration Options dialog box contains the following controls:
■
Storage group box
■
Fonts group box
■
Include Types in Application Source List check box
■
Alternative letterhead mode check box
■
Ignore Application Collation check box
■
Printer Memory group box
■
Allow Scaling from Large Paper check box
Storage
The Storage group box contains the Job Storage Enabled check box. If your product has a
minimum of 80 MB of memory, limited job-storage options are available. When job storage is
enabled, the product can store print jobs so that you can gain access to those print jobs later at the
product control panel.
Fonts
The Fonts group box contains a Font Card(s) check box and a corresponding Configure button.
Selecting the Font Card(s) check box tells the driver that a Font card is installed, and that stored
data about the fonts on the card is available. When the check box is selected, the Configure button
is enabled. Click the Configure button to open the Configure Font Card(s) dialog box. If the Font
142
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
HP traditional drivers
Card(s) check box was not selected when you opened the More Configuration Options dialog box,
selecting that check box automatically opens the Configure Font Cards dialog box.
Figure 3-26 Configure Font Cards dialog box
Use the Configure Font Cards dialog box to perform the following tasks:
■
Add up to two font cards by clicking the Add button.
■
Specify a unique font-card name.
■
Select specific font card data files that contain lists of fonts on specified cards.
■
Select one or more installed cards in the Installed Font Cards list. The list to the right (Fonts)
shows all of the fonts that are available on the selected card(s).
■
Enable or disable one or more of the selected font(s).
Complete the following steps to configure a font card:
1
Make sure that the font card is installed correctly.
2
Click Add. The Add Font Card dialog box appears.
3
Click Browse. The Font Card Files dialog box appears.
4
Find and select the appropriate Printer Cartridge Metrics (PCM) file that came with the font card.
5
Click OK.
6
If you want to, you can specify a Font Card Name in the Add Font Card dialog box.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
143
7
Click OK. The selected .PCM file appears in the Installed Font Cards list. Select the .PCM file
to see a list of available fonts in the Fonts list.
8
Click OK to close the Add Font Card dialog box. The fonts on the card should now be available
on the system.
NOTE When using font cards with the HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e drivers: To install
screen fonts that match the font card, use the .HPB file that is specifically designed to work
with that card. If no screen fonts exist for the card, use the .PCM file that is specifically
designed to work with that card.
Include types in application source list
When the Include types in application source list check box is selected, all media types (such as
light media and transparencies) are available from the Source is: list on the Paper tab. When you
are in a software program, you can open the Paper tab by clicking Print from the File menu, and
then clicking Properties.
Alternative letterhead mode
HP traditional drivers
Under normal operation, the product prints duplex jobs with a different orientation than single-sided
jobs. This becomes a problem when printing on letterhead, because the user has to switch the
orientation of the letterhead media if they need to go back and forth between duplex and single-sided
jobs. Alternative letterhead mode solves this problem.
When selected, this option enables you to always load letterhead or pre-printed paper in the same
way for all print jobs, whether you are printing duplex or single-sided jobs. To use it, load the paper
as you would for a duplex letterhead job. (This is the exact opposite of how you would load the paper
for a single-sided letterhead job. See the User Guide for details.) If the printer tray has an icon that
indicates to load the paper either face-up or face-down, load the paper the opposite of the orientation
shown. When Alternative Letterhead Mode is on, both single-sided and double-sided jobs will print
the correct way, without having to change the orientation of the letterhead or pre-printed media.
Ignore Application Collation
This setting overrides collation options that are selected in a software program print options. When
Ignore Application Collation is selected, the print driver collates in the most appropriate way for the
print job. The performance of this feature depends on the software program that you are using.
Printer memory
The Total Memory group box shows the total amount of memory that is physically installed in the
product. The default values for total product memory are based on the product you have installed.
Total product memory is updated through a successful bidirectional query, or can be set manually. In
environments where bidirectional communication is unavailable, you can verify that the Total
Memory setting is correct by printing a configuration page. To print a configuration page, see
Determining the current level of firmware.
The Driver Work Space (DWS) value shows the amount of memory that is available for keeping track
of fonts that are downloaded from the driver. The driver deletes downloaded fonts if it has exceeded
the available memory value. The (DWS) value is a dynamic value that varies depending on the
specific configuration of the product. An accurate (DWS) value optimizes driver performance.
The HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e drivers automatically configure the (DWS) value in
Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0 environments that support bidirectional
communication. Use the (DWS) option to specify the amount of work-space memory that is available
144
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
to the product. To manually set the (DWS) value, print a configuration page and find the DWS value
in the Memory section of the page. Then, click the More... button on the Configure tab, and type the
DWS value in the (DWS) field of the More Configuration Options dialog box.
To print a configuration page, see Determining the current level of firmware.
Allow Scaling from Large Paper
Use the Allow Scaling from Large Paper check box to print from media sizes that are larger than
those that the product supports. When this check box is selected, you can select these larger paper
sizes from the Size Is: drop-down menu on the Paper tab, and the print jobs are automatically
scaled to a size that the product does support.
Automatic configuration
If you have modified the configuration of the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer since
installation, click the Update Now button to automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver.
For more information about the print driver's automatic configuration feature, see the Driver
Configuration section of this guide.
If the Update Now button is not available, select the appropriate configuration options on the
Configure tab.
HP traditional drivers
Printer image
The bitmap image in the lower-right portion of the Configure tab represents the current physical
configuration of the product according to the driver configuration data. It should have the same
appearance as the image in the same location on the Paper tab.
NOTE The product image shown on the Configure tab might differ from your HP LaserJet
2410, 2420, and 2430 printer, depending on the installed accessory devices.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver features
145
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features
When you install the printing-system software in Windows 98 or Windows Me, the HP Traditional
PCL 6 Driver is installed by default. The HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver and the PS Emulation Driver
can be installed by performing a Custom Installation. When you install the print drivers in
Windows NT 4.0, you must use the Add Printer install method to install the PS Emulation Driver.
Depending on the operating system that you are using when you install the print drivers, different
methods are available to gain access to the print drivers and different print-driver interfaces.
This section describes the options that are available on each tab of the PS Emulation Driver
Document Default interface and on one of the tabs of the PS Emulation Driver Properties
interface. It also shows the tabs that are available on the PS Emulation Driver interface for
Windows 98 and Windows Mee.
NOTE The information and illustrations in this section reflect the PS Emulation Driver when
the computer is running Windows NT 4.0. The PS Emulation Driver looks significantly different
for computers that are running Windows 98 and Windows Me.
Access to print drivers
HP traditional drivers
Depending on the operating system that you are installing the print drivers on, there are different
ways to gain access to the print drivers and different print-driver interfaces.
To gain access to the print-driver settings from within most software programs, click File, click Print,
and then click Properties. These driver settings apply only while the software program is open.
Access to print drivers in Windows NT 4.0
In Windows NT 4.0, you can gain access to the Document Default driver tabs and the Properties
driver tabs. The settings that you make on these driver tabs control print job output.
To gain access to the print-driver settings from within most software programs, click File, click Print,
and then click Properties. These driver settings apply only while the software program is open.
You can also control the Document Default print drivers directly from the Printers folder. In
Windows NT 4.0, click Start, select Settings, click Printers, right-click the product name, and then
click Document Defaults... to gain access to the same set of driver tabs that the software program
controls. These driver settings change the default settings used across all software programs.
The following Document Default print driver tabs are available in Windows NT 4.0:
■
Page Setup tab
■
Advanced tab
■
Job Storage tab
NOTE If your product has a minimum of 80 MB of memory, the Proof and Hold and
Private Job options are available.
146
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Properties driver tabs
In Windows NT 4.0, click Start, select Settings, and then click Printers. Right-click the product
name, and then click Properties to gain access to all Properties print-driver tabs. The following
Properties print-driver tabs are available in Windows NT 4.0:
■
General
■
Ports
■
Scheduling
■
Sharing
■
Security
■
Device Setting
NOTE Only the Device Setting tab is described in this guide.
Access to print-driver settings in Windows 98 and Windows Me
PS 3 emulation support for the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430
printer
A set of 92 postscript soft fonts is included with the printing-system software. If you want to
permanently install the fonts in the product, postscript fonts are also available from HP in an optional
font DIMM. The PS emulation maintains full compatibility with Adobe PostScript when postscript
fonts are purchased from Adobe.
Users of Adobe-licensed programs might also have the right to use the Adobe PostScript print
drivers from Adobe with the HP LaserJet PostScript 3 emulation PPD, which is available on the
HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer software CD or from the HP Web site. When using the
Adobe PostScript print driver, users must comply with all Adobe licensing agreements, as stated on
the Adobe Web site at www.adobe.com/support/downloads/license.html.
See the Font support section of this guide for a list of the additional fonts.
Help system
The PS Emulation Driver includes the following Help systems to provide assistance with printing and
configuration options.
NOTE Bubble Help, a feature of HP traditional PCL drivers, is not available in the
PS Emulation Driver.
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features
147
HP traditional drivers
In Windows 98 and Windows Me, click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers. Right-click the
product name, and then click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs.
What's this Help
In Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0, What's this? Help is supported. You can gain
access to What's this? Help messages in any of the following ways:
■
Right-click a control and then click What's this?. A pop-up Help window appears.
■
Click the ? button at the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an
arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up
Help window for that feature appears.
■
Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.
Context-sensitive Help
When you press the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message
appears.
Page Setup tab features
The Page Setup tab controls media and finishing options for the HP PS Emulation Driver. The
following illustration shows the Page Setup tab.
HP traditional drivers
Figure 3-27 Page Setup tab
148
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
The Page Setup tab contains the following controls:
■
Paper Size drop-down menu. Click this to specify the media size (form). The list of available
forms matches those that the product supports.
■
Paper Source drop-down menu. Use these settings to select a tray. The default setting is
Automatically Select.
■
Copy Count spin box. Use this box to specify the number of copies.
■
Orientation group box. The settings in this group box specify how the document is positioned on
the page.
■
Print on Both Sides (Duplex Printing) group box. The settings in this group box specify
whether or not the print job is double-sided. It only appears if the duplexer is installed.
Advanced tab features
HP traditional drivers
The Advanced tab controls the settings for output, graphics, and product features. The following
illustration shows the Advanced tab.
Figure 3-28 Advanced tab
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features
149
The Advanced tab contains the following controls:
■
Paper/Output settings (advanced control over the options that are available on the Page Setup
tab)
■
Graphic settings (including resolution, scaling, and TrueType font controls)
■
Document Options settings (including product features and postscript options)
Paper/Output
The following Paper/Output settings are available:
■
Paper Size
■
Orientation
■
Paper Source
■
Copy Count
■
Print on Both Sides (Duplex Printing)
HP traditional drivers
These settings are also available on the Page Setup tab. For more information, see Page Setup tab
features.
Graphic
The following Graphic settings are available:
■
Resolution. Resolution refers to the number of dots per inch (dpi) used to print the page. As
resolution is increased, the quality (clarity and visual appeal) of print on the page is improved.
The default setting is 600 dpi.
■
Scaling. Use this setting to reduce or enlarge documents by a specified percentage. When you
enlarge a document, only the portion of the document that fits on the page will print. The default
setting is 100%.
■
TrueType Font. The default setting is Substitute with Device Font. The other available setting
is Download as Softfont. Use this setting when your document has overlapping text and
graphics.
Document Options
The following Document Options settings are available:
150
■
Page Layout (N-up) Option
■
PostScript Options
■
Printer Features
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Page Layout Option
The Page Layout (N-up) Option specifies whether the N-up printing feature is enabled. The
following settings are available:
■
Normal (One-up). This is the default setting.
■
Two-up (1x2). The print job prints two pages per sheet.
■
Four-up (2x2). The print job prints four pages per sheet.
■
Six-up (2x3). The print job prints six pages per sheet.
■
Nine-up (3x3). The print job prints nine pages per sheet.
■
Sixteen-up (4x4). The print job prints 16 pages per sheet.
PostScript Options
The following are the settings for PostScript Options:
■
PostScript Output Options offers the following settings:
■
Optimize for Speed. This is the default setting.
■
Optimize for Portability. Use this setting to create a file that conforms to the Adobe
Document Structuring Conventions (ADSC). Each page of the document will be a selfcontained object. This is useful, for instance, if you want to create a PostScript file and print it
on a different product.
■
Encapsulated PostScript (EPS). Use this setting to include the file as an image in another
document that is to be printed from a different program.
■
Archive Format. Use this setting to create a PostScript file that you can use later.
TrueType Font Download Option offers the following settings:
■
Automatic (default )
■
Outline
■
Bitmap
■
Native TrueType
■
The PostScript Language Level specifies which PostScript language level to use, from 1 to the
highest level that your product supports. Some products support multiple levels. It is usually best
to select the highest level that is available, because a higher language-level provides more
features. In some instances, however, you would still use level 1. For example, if you are printing
a file to disk and that file will be printed by someone who has a level-1 printer, you would need to
select level 1. The PostScript Language Level spin box offers settings 1 through 3.
■
Send PostScript Error Handler specifies whether a PostScript error handler message is sent. If
you want the product to print an error page when an error occurs in the print job, click Yes.
■
Mirrored Output specifies mirrored print output. Click Yes to print a mirror image of your
document by reversing the horizontal coordinates.
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features
151
HP traditional drivers
■
■
Negative Output specifies negative output. Click Yes to print a negative of the image by
reversing the values for black and white.
Printer Features
The following Printer Features options are available:
■
■
Collate
■
On (turn off in application)
■
Off (default)
EconoMode
■
■
False (default)
■
Fit to Page
HP traditional drivers
■
■
152
True
■
Prompt User (default)
■
Nearest Size and Scale
■
Nearest Size and Crop
■
Letter
■
A4
Levels of Gray
■
Printer's current settings
■
Enhanced
■
Standard
Watermark. The following settings are available:
■
None (default)
■
Draft
■
Company Confidential
■
Company Proprietary
■
Company Private
■
Confidential
■
Copy
■
Copyright
■
File Copy
■
Final
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
■
For Internal Use Only
■
Preliminary
■
Proof
■
Review Copy
■
Sample
■
Top Secret
■
Urgent
■
Custom
Watermark (pages per sheet)
■
1
■
>= 2
Watermark Font
■
Courier Bold
■
Helvetica Bold (default)
■
Times Bold
■
Watermark Size. Settings for the watermark size range from 24 points to 90 points. 48 points is
the default.
■
Watermark Angle. Settings for the watermark angle range from 90 degrees to -90 degrees in 15degree intervals. A 45-degree angle is the default.
■
Watermark Style
■
■
Narrow Outline
■
Medium Outline (default)
■
Wide Outline
■
Wide Halo Outline
■
Filled
Watermark Intensity
■
Darkest
■
Darker
■
Dark
■
Medium Dark
■
Medium (default)
■
Medium Light
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features
153
HP traditional drivers
■
■
■
■
Light
■
Lighter
■
Lightest
Print Watermark
■
No (default)
■
All Pages
■
First Page Only
Job Storage tab features
Use the job storage feature to store print jobs in the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer
memory for printing at a later time. These job-storage features are described in the following sections.
HP traditional drivers
The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if Job Storage is enabled. To support jobstorage features for complex jobs, or if you often print complex graphics, print postscript (.PS)
documents, or use many downloaded fonts, HP recommends that you install additional memory.
Added memory also gives you more flexibility in supporting job storage features. A minimum total
memory of 80 MB is required to use Job Storage features.
After additional memory is installed, the driver must be configured to reflect the changes in the
product.
Bidirectional communication is not supported in Windows 98, Windows Me, or Windows NT 4.0, the
operating environments that support the PS Emulation Driver. The driver must therefore be updated
manually.
To configure the driver manually after installing additional memory, follow these steps:
1
Click Start, select Settings, and then click Printers.
2
Right-click the product name, click Properties, and then click the Device Settings tab.
3
If additional memory has been installed, select Printer Memory: under Installable Options, and
then select the option that matches the amount of memory installed.
4
Click OK to make the printer job-storage features available.
NOTE To disable Job Storage, click Start, select Settings, and then click Printers. Rightclick the product name, click Properties, click the Device Settings tab, select Job Storage:,
and then select Disabled in the Change 'Job Storage' Setting dialog box that appears.
When Job Storage is disabled, the Job Storage driver tab is not visible.
Job Storage tab
The following illustration shows the Job Storage tab.
154
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
HP traditional drivers
Figure 3-29 Job Storage tab
The Job Storage tab contains the following controls:
■
Status group box (unlabeled)
■
Job Storage Mode group box
■
Job Identification group box
Status group box
The unlabeled group box on the Job Storage tab contains a status message about the destination of
a print job. The status information changes depending on the selections that are made on the Job
Storage tab.
Job Storage Mode
Use the Job Storage Mode options on the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers to store
documents at the product and then control their printing at the product control panel. This feature is
intended to provide greater flexibility, convenience, security, and cost savings.
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features
155
The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers offer the following Job Storage Mode options:
■
Off
■
Proof and Hold
■
Private Job
These options and the settings that control them are described below.
Off
When selected, this option turns the Job Storage feature off (it is disabled), which means that the
print job will not be stored in the product.
Proof and Hold
To use the Proof and Hold option, Job Storage must be enabled, and the product must have a
minimum total memory of 80 MB.
When selected, this option stores the print job in memory and prints only the first copy of the job,
allowing you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining
copies of the print job at the control panel. You can set the number of proof-and-hold print jobs that
can be stored in the product at the control panel.
HP traditional drivers
After it is released for printing, the proof-and-hold job is immediately deleted from the product. If
more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second
proof-and-hold job to the product with the same user name and job name as an existing proof-andhold job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing
job. Proof-and-hold jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.
NOTE The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proofand-hold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu,
and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the
oldest held document. Also, a document that has the same user and job name as one that is
already stored on the hard disk will overwrite the existing document.
Private Job
To use the Private Job option, Job Storage must be enabled, and the product must have a minimum
total memory of 80 MB.
When you select Private Job, the print job is sent to the product, but is not printed until you request
the job at the product control panel. Selecting Private Job activates the Job Identification group
box. The print job can be printed only after you type the correct PIN at the control panel. After the job
is printed, the job is deleted from the product. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or
confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing.
After it is released for printing, the private job is immediately deleted from the product. If more copies
are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second private job that
has the same user name and job name as an existing private job (and you have not released the
original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job, regardless of the PIN. Private jobs are
deleted if you turn off the product.
156
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Using a PIN for Private Job
The Private Job option can be secured by a four-digit personal identification number (PIN). You
must type in this number at the product control panel before the product can print the job.
The group box labeled Job Identification is usually inactive. It becomes active when you select the
Private Job option.
The Private Job/PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters (0 though 9). If
you type non-numeric characters, they are removed immediately. The text field does not allow you to
type in more than four characters. The field temporarily accepts fewer than four digits in the string,
but when the edit field loses focus, the zeroes pad the left end until the PIN contains exactly four
digits. The default initialized value for the PIN is 0000 for Private Job.
Job Identification
■
User Name text box
■
Job Name text box
■
PIN text box
User Name
Use the User Name text box to help identify the job at the product control panel. The Windows user
name automatically appears in the User Name text box. To enter a custom user name, type the
custom user name in the text box. The User Name text box can contain no more than 16 characters.
Job Name
Use the Job Name text box to specify a name to identify the job at the product control panel. This
text box uses Untitled as the default job name associated with the stored print job. The file name of
the print job is used if it is available to the print driver. Otherwise, the software program name or a
time stamp is used for the job name. To enter a custom name, type the custom job name in the text
box. The Job Name text box can contain no more than 16 characters.
When the dialog box is closed, or as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the
Tab key is pressed or another control is selected), an empty string is replaced with UNTITLED. In
those languages for which UNTITLED cannot be translated without the use of invalid characters, the
driver uses a string of three dashes. The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for
each operating system. The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the product
control-panel display.
PIN
The box labeled PIN is usually inactive.
After selecting the Private Job option, you must type in the PIN number at the product control panel
in order to make the job print. For more information, see Using a PIN for Private Job.
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features
157
HP traditional drivers
The Job Identification group box contains the following controls:
Using Job Storage features when printing
To use Job Storage features when printing, follow these steps:
1
Click File and then click Print from the software program. The Print dialog box appears.
NOTE Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without Job
Storage features.
2
Click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears.
3
Click the Job Storage tab.
4
Select one of the job-storage options (described previously) by clicking the appropriate option
button, and then complete any required fields.
5
Click OK.
Releasing a Job Storage print job
After you send a print job that uses the Job Storage feature, you can release the job to print from
the product control panel.
HP traditional drivers
1
Press the SELECT button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus. RETRIEVE JOB is
highlighted.
2
Press the SELECT button.
3
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to your User Name, and then press the SELECT button.
4
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to the Job Name, and then press the SELECT button.
PRINT is highlighted.
5
Press the SELECT button.
6
If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press the up and down buttons to select the first digit of
the PIN, and then press the SELECT button. The number in the product control-panel display
changes to an asterisk. Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with step 7.
7
Press the up and down buttons to select the number of copies to print.
8
Press the SELECT button to print the job.
Deleting a Job Storage print job
Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the product. You can do this from the product
control panel.
158
1
Press the SELECT button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus. RETRIEVE JOB is
highlighted.
2
Press the SELECT button.
3
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to your User Name, and then press the SELECT button.
4
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to the Job Name, and then press the SELECT button.
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
5
Press the up and down buttons to select DELETE.
6
If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press the up and down buttons to select the first digit of
the PIN, and then press the SELECT button. The number in the product control-panel display
changes to an asterisk. Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with step 7.
7
Press the SELECT button to delete the job.
The stored print job is deleted and the product returns to the READY state.
Device Settings tab
The Device Settings tab is in the Properties for the print driver in Windows NT 4.0. In Windows 98
and Windows Me, a tab with similar options and settings is called the Device Options tab.
To gain access to the print driver Properties, click Start on the Window task bar, select Settings,
and then click Printers. Right-click the product name, and then click Properties.
When opened from the Printers folder, the Device Settings tab appears, as shown in the following
illustration.
NOTE The illustration below shows the Device Settings tab in Windows NT 4.0. The
appearance of the equivalent tab in Windows 98 follows this illustration.
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features
159
HP traditional drivers
The Device Settings tab communicates information about the hardware configuration to the print
driver. The Device Settings tab appears when you open the driver from the Printers folder by
selecting and right-clicking the printer, and then clicking Properties for the driver. When the driver is
opened from within a software program, the Configure tab is usually not visible.
HP traditional drivers
Figure 3-30 Device Settings tab in Windows NT 4.0
The following illustration shows the Device Options tab in Windows 98.
160
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
HP traditional drivers
Figure 3-31 Device Options tab in Windows 98
NOTE Changes that you make to the Device Settings tab are not reflected in the
Document Defaults settings until the modified device settings have been applied. For
example, the duplexing unit will not appear until you modify the Configure tab, apply the
settings, and then re-open Document Defaults.
The Device Settings tab contains the following options:
■
Form to Tray Assignment
■
Font Substitution Table
■
PostScript Configure
■
Installable Options
Form to Tray Assignment
Many products support more than one source of media, such as upper and lower trays. You can
assign a form (which defines the media size and margins) to each of your product media sources.
When a form is matched to a source, you can select the form when you print from your software
programs. The product prints from the tray to which that form is assigned.
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features
161
Network administrators can use the Form to Tray Assignment setting to specify, in the driver, the
media size that is loaded into each available input tray. The use of forms constrains the choices that
are available in the media-size list on the Advanced tab in the Document Defaults driver tabs. This
constraint prevents (or reduces the likelihood of) tying up the product with media-mount messages
that occur when users request sizes or types that are not available.
The trays listed in the Form to Tray Assignment setting include standard trays and optional
accessory trays. Generally, items that are installed separately have a separate Installable Options
setting. For example, for the HP LaserJet 2430t printer, tray 3 is listed in both the Form to Tray
Assignment setting and the Installable Options setting.
The input trays listed here are also listed as media sources on the Page Setup tab.
Font Substitution Table
Clicking this option opens the font substitution table and makes available the options for changing
the TrueType-to-PostScript font mapping.
Postscript Configure
The following controls are available in the Postscript section of the PS Emulation Driver Device
Settings tab.
HP traditional drivers
Available PostScript Memory
This control specifies the amount of available postscript memory and provides a spin box for
changing this value. The available postscript memory is a subset of the product total physical
memory. It is usually best to set the postscript memory to match what is shown on the configuration
page. To print a configuration page, follow these steps:
1
Press the SELECT button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press the SELECT button.
3
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION.
4
Press the SELECT button to print the configuration page.
Output Protocol
This control specifies the protocol that the product uses for print jobs. The following options are
available:
■
ASCII (default)
■
TBCP
■
Binary
When you click ASCII, data is sent in ASCII format (7-bit), which might take longer to print but can be
sent through any I/O channel, such as a serial, parallel, or network port.
When you click TBCP (Tagged Binary Communications Protocol), all data except special control
characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial
communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format.
162
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
When you click Binary, all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The
binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending
data in ASCII format.
Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job
This control specifies whether the product will be reset at the beginning of every postscript
document. The default setting is No. Ctrl-D resets the product to its default setting to ensure that
previous print jobs do not affect the current print job. Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the
product is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a product
connected through parallel or serial ports, change No to Yes.
Send Ctrl-D After Each Job
This control specifies whether the product will be reset at the end of every postscript document. The
default setting is Yes. Ctrl-D resets the product to its default setting to ensure that future print jobs
are not affected by the current print job. Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the product is
connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a network printer, change
Yes to No.
This control specifies how long the document can take to get from the computer to the product before
the product stops trying to print the document. If you specify 0 seconds, the product continues trying
to print indefinitely. The default setting is 0 seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value
to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.
Wait Timeout
This control specifies how long the product waits to get more postscript information from the
computer. After the specified time passes, the product stops trying to print the document and prints
an error message. If you are trying to print a very complicated document, you might want to increase
this value. If you specify 0 seconds, the product waits indefinitely. The default setting is 300
seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.
Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline
This control specifies the minimum font size (in pixels) for which the driver downloads TrueType fonts
as outline (Type 1) fonts. A font smaller than the minimum setting is downloaded as a bitmap (Type
3) font. Use this option to fine-tune the Automatic setting for the TrueType Font Download option
on the Advanced tab in Document Defaults. The default setting is 100 pixels. You can use the spin
box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 pixels.
Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline
This control specifies the maximum font size (in pixels) for which the driver will download TrueType
fonts as bitmap (Type 3) fonts. A font larger than the maximum setting will be downloaded as an
outline (Type 1) font. Use this option to fine-tune the Automatic setting or override the Send
TrueType as Bitmap setting for the TrueType Font Download option on the Advanced tab in
Document Defaults. The default setting is 600 pixels. You can use the spin box to change this value
to a maximum of 32,767 pixels.
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features
163
HP traditional drivers
Job Timeout
Installable Options
This section provides information to configure the printing options that you can install for the
HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer. The following controls are available:
■
Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing)
■
Mopier Mode
■
Job Storage
■
Tray 3
■
Printer Memory
Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing)
The HP LaserJet 2420d, 2420dn, and 2430dtn printer models are equipped with automatic 2-sided
printing (duplexing), which allows you to print on both sides of supported media. Automatic 2-sided
printing is not supported for certain media types, including transparencies, labels, envelopes, heavy,
extra heavy, cardstock, and glossy film.
HP traditional drivers
NOTE The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer supports smart duplexing. The
product uses the smart duplexing feature to detect information on both sides of the print job
pages and only runs the pages through the duplexing unit if printable information appears on
the second side of the page.
Mopier Mode
The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated
copies from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases performance and
reduces network traffic by transmitting the job to the product once, and then storing it on the hard
disk. The remainder of the copies are printed at the fastest speed. All documents that are printed in
mopier mode can be created, controlled, managed, and finished from the computer, which eliminates
the extra step of using a photocopier.
The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer supports the transmit-once mopying feature when the
product has a minimum total memory of 80 MB, and the Mopier Mode: setting on the Device
Settings tab is Enabled.
Job Storage
If your HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer has a minimum of 80 MB of memory, limited jobstorage options are available. When job storage is enabled, the product can store print jobs so that
you can gain access to those print jobs later at the control panel.
Tray 3
This control specifies whether you have Tray 3, an additional 500-sheet media tray, installed on your
product. The default setting is Not Installed. In order to use Tray 3, you must change this setting to
Installed.
164
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Printer Memory
This option matches the setting to the amount of memory that is installed in the product. The driver
generates ranges of memory that can be selected, up to the maximum that the product can accept.
The driver can use this information to manage how the print driver uses the product memory.
HP traditional drivers
When a minimum total memory of 80 MB is installed, the Job Storage option and the Mopier Mode
are enabled in the print driver. The Job Storage option allows you to store print jobs, and then print
them later from the control panel. The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed
feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job.
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features
165
HP traditional drivers
166
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
4
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3
emulation unidrivers for Windows
Introduction
This chapter describes the features of the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer unidrivers. The
unidrivers include the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5e Unidriver, and the HP Postscript 3
Emulation Unidriver (the PS Emulation Unidriver) for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003.
HP unidrivers
You can control print jobs from several places: the product control panel, the software program's
Print dialog, and the driver user interface. Generally, for features that are duplicated in more than
one location (for instance, you can select the media input tray from any of them), settings that are
established in the software program take precedence over print-driver settings. Print-driver settings,
in turn, override product control-panel settings.
Introduction
167
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features
NOTE For a comparison of features between the HP unidrivers and HP traditional print
drivers in various operating systems, see the Driver-feature comparison in various operating
systems section of this guide.
When you install the print-system software in Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003, the HP PCL 6 Unidriver is installed by default. The HP PCL 5e Unidriver and
the PS Emulation Unidriver can be installed by performing a Custom Installation.
The following sections describe the options that are available on each tab of the HP PCL 6, PCL 5e,
and the PS emulation unidriver interface.
The sections also describe differences among the HP PCL 6, PCL 5e, and the PS emulation
unidrivers.
Access to print drivers
To gain access to driver settings from within most software programs, click File, click Print, and then
click Properties. The appearance and names of the driver tabs can vary, depending on the
operating system. These settings apply only while that software program is open.
You can also control the drivers directly from the Printers folder. These settings change the default
settings that are used across all software programs. To gain access to the Printers folder, click Start,
select Settings, and then click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP
Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP
Home). Right-click the product name, and then click Printing Preferences to gain access to the
same set of driver tabs that the software program controls.
NOTE If your printer has a minimum of 80 MB of memory, the Proof and Hold and Private
Job job-storage options are available.
If, after right-clicking the product name, you click Properties, you gain access to a different set of
tabs that control the driver behavior and driver connections.
Help system
HP unidrivers
The HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5e Unidriver, and the PS Emulation Unidriver include a fullfeatured Help system to provide assistance with printing and configuration options.
NOTE Bubble Help, a feature of HP traditional PCL 6and PCL 5e drivers, is not available in
the HP PCL 6, PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidrivers.
168
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
What's this? Help
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 support "What's this?" Help. You can gain
access to "What's this?" Help messages in any of the following ways:
■
Right-click a control and then click What's this?. A pop-up Help window appears.
■
Click the ? button in the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an
arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up
Help window for that feature appears.
■
Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.
Context-sensitive Help
When you click the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message
appears.
Incompatible Print Settings messages
Incompatible print settings (constraint) messages are unsolicited messages that appear in response
to specific actions that you take. These messages alert you that the selections are illogical or
impossible given the capabilities of the product or the current settings of other controls.
NOTE Constraint messages are limited for HP unidrivers. The HP unidrivers accept some
settings that are illogical or impossible for the product to perform. If you try to print with
incompatible settings, the printed documents might have unexpected results because the print
driver did not provide feedback that the settings were incompatible. If print jobs do not print as
expected, check the product documentation for the product capabilities.
HP unidrivers
In Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating environments, some
technically invalid print-driver configurations result in the appearance of warning messages.
Duplexing, for instance, is not possible when the Transparency media type is selected. The following
illustration shows an Incompatible Print Settings message.
Figure 4-1 An Incompatible Print Settings message
Clicking the Resolve all conflicts for me automatically option button and then clicking OK accepts
the change that was just made. The driver then resets the conflicting control to a setting that is
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features
169
compatible with the new value. If you want to keep the conflicting setting, click I will resolve the
conflict myself and then click OK.
NOTE If you select the Resolve all conflicts for me automatically option, the settings that
are selected by the driver to resolve the conflict may not correctly reflect the settings you
intended to use, and so may have unexpected results. It is best if you try to resolve the conflict
yourself.
Advanced tab features
You can use the Advanced tab to change the layout of printed pages. Use this tab to configure
special controls that are not commonly used, as well as to control features such as media size and
copies in the driver (although most current software programs support these features in the print
dialog box or through the software-program page settings). The following illustration shows the
Advanced tab.
HP unidrivers
Figure 4-2 The default appearance of the Advanced tab
170
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
The Advanced tab contains the following controls:
■
Paper/Output settings
■
Graphic settings
■
Document Options settings
Paper/Output
The Paper/Output settings contain the following controls:
■
Copy Count setting
■
Collated check box (appears when you select Copy Count)
Copy Count
This driver setting is useful for software programs that do not provide a copy count. If a copy count is
available in the software program, set the copy count in the software program. Copy Count specifies
the number of copies to print.
Because you can set the number of copies that you want from some software programs, conflicts
between the software program you are using and the driver can arise. In most cases, the software
program and the driver communicate, so that the number of copies set in one location (such as the
program) will appear in the other (such as the driver). For some programs, this communication does
not take place, and the copies values are treated independently. For these programs, setting 10
copies in the program and then setting 10 copies in the driver will result in 100 copies (10 x 10) being
printed. It is recommended that you set the number of copies in the program, wherever possible.
Collated
The Collated check box appears next to the Copy Count setting. The check box is selected, but is
not available. It becomes available and can be changed when the Copy Count setting is greater
than 1.
When collated, pages print consecutively for each copy of the document. When not collated, copies
of each page print together.
This setting is not synchronized with the collate setting in the software-program Print dialog box.
Settings in the software program override settings in the print driver. For instance, when using
Microsoft Word, the Collate check box in the Print dialog box is selected by default. However, in the
print driver, the Collated check box in the Advanced tab is not selected by default. The software
program setting takes precedence over the driver setting, and the printed output is collated by
default. To obtain uncollated printed output, clear the Collate setting in both the driver and the
software program. Similarly, if the Collated check box is selected in the driver, but the Collate
setting is not enabled in the software program, the printed output is uncollated.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features
171
HP unidrivers
The number of copies that you request appears in the Copy Count option. You can enter the
number by typing in the box or by using the up and down arrows to the right of the text box. Valid
entries are numbers from 1 to 9999 for the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer. The copies
value will not advance from the maximum number (9999) to 1 when the up arrow is used, or change
from 1 to the maximum number (9999) when the down arrow is used. When you click another group
box or leave the Advanced tab, invalid entries into the edit box (such as non-numerical input,
numbers less than 1, or numbers greater than the maximum allowed) are changed to the last valid
value that appeared in the box. The default number of copies is 1.
Graphic options
The Graphic section on the Advanced tab contains the True Type Font setting. The options for this
setting are Substitute with Device Font and Download as Softfont. Select Substitute with
Device Font (the default) to use equivalent printer fonts for printing documents that contain True
Type fonts. This will permit faster printing; however, you might lose special characters that the printer
font does not support. Select Download as Softfont to download True Type fonts for printing
instead of using printer fonts.
Document Options
The Document Options settings contain the following controls:
■
Advanced Printing Features
■
Print Optimizations
■
Printer Features
■
Layout Options
Advanced Printing Features
When the Advanced Printing Features setting is Enabled, metafile spooling is turned on and
Finishing tab options such as Page Order, Booklet Layout, and Pages per Sheet are available,
depending on your product. For normal printing, leave the Advanced Printing Features setting at
the default (Enabled). If compatibility problems occur, you can disable the feature. However, some
advanced printing features might still be available in the print driver, even though they have been
disabled. If you select an advanced printing feature in the print driver that has been disabled on the
Advanced tab, the feature is automatically re-enabled.
Print Optimizations
NOTE Print Optimization settings are available only in the HP PCL 6 and PCL 5eunidrivers.
They are not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver.
HP unidrivers
The default setting for Print Optimizations is Enabled. When this feature is enabled and your
document contains overlapping text and graphics, text placed on top of a graphic might not print
correctly. If the printed output is not correct, you can disable this feature. When disabled, print
optimization features, such as substituting device fonts for TrueType fonts and scanning for
horizontal and vertical rules, are turned off.
Printer Features
The following Printer Features are available:
172
■
Print All Text as Black
■
Send True Type as Bitmap (HP PCL 6 and PCL 5eunidrivers only)
■
REt
■
Alternative Letterhead Mode
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
Print All Text as Black
The Print All Text as Black feature is Disabled by default. When Enabled is selected, the driver
prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed as black,
except for white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing reverse
typeface against a dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page, nor
does it affect any text that is part of a graphic.
Send TrueType as Bitmap
NOTE The Send TrueType as Bitmap option is available only in the HP PCL 6 and PCL 5e
unidrivers. It is not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver.
Send True Type as Bitmap provides an alternative for those software programs that have trouble
using TrueType fonts for special graphic purposes such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The setting
is Disabled (off) by default. The TrueType fonts are first converted to bitmap soft fonts before
downloading. The Enabled setting causes the driver to send TrueType fonts to the product as
outlines, which retains the standard format (outline) of the fonts.
REt
Resolution Enhancement technology (REt) refines the print quality of characters by smoothing out
jagged edges that can occur on the angles and curves of a printed image. It is On by default. Select
Off if graphics, particularly scanned images, are not printing clearly.
Alternative Letterhead Mode
When this feature is selected, this you can always load letterhead or pre-printed paper in the same
way for all print jobs, whether you are printing duplex or single-sided jobs. To use it, load the paper
as you would for a duplex letterhead job. (This is the exact opposite of how you would load the paper
for a single-sided letterhead job. See the User Guide for details.) If the printer tray has an icon that
indicates to load the paper either face-up or face-down, load the paper in the opposite direction from
the orientation shown. When Alternative Letterhead Mode is on, both single-sided and doublesided jobs will print the correct way, without having to change the orientation of the letterhead or preprinted media.
NOTE Alternative Letterhead Mode is only necessary if the product has a duplexer installed.
Graphics Mode
NOTE The Graphics Mode option is available only in the HP PCL 5e Unidriver. It is not
available in the HP PCL 6 and HP PS emulation unidrivers.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features
173
HP unidrivers
Under normal operation, the product prints duplex jobs with a different orientation than single-sided
jobs. This becomes a problem when printing on letterhead, because the user has to switch the
orientation of the letterhead media if they need to go back and forth between duplex and single-sided
jobs. Alternative letterhead mode solves this problem.
Use the Graphics Mode feature to select one of the following settings:
■
Send Graphics as Vector. Select this setting to send graphics to the product as a combination
of HP Graphics Language, V2 (HP-GL/2) and raster images. This setting might produce higherquality output.
■
Send Graphics as Raster. Select this setting to send all graphics to the product as images
composed of individual dots. This setting might improve printing speed in some cases. It is the
default setting.
Layout Options
The Layout Option section contains the Page Order setting.
Page Order
Page Order specifies the order in which the pages of your document are printed. Front to Back
prints the document so that page 1 prints first. Back to Front prints the document so that page 1
prints last. The Back to Front setting is useful if you are printing to a face-up output bin to achieve
output in the correct order.
NOTE The page-ordering operation works on whole sheets of media rather than on
individual logical pages. Accordingly, if you set Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) to be
greater than one, the ordering of logical pages on a physical sheet does not change.
Paper/Quality tab features
Use the Paper/Quality tab to specify the size, type, and source of the media. You can also use this
tab to indicate different media-selection choices for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page,
and back cover of the document. The following illustration shows the Paper/Quality tab.
HP unidrivers
174
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
HP unidrivers
Figure 4-3 Paper/Quality tab
The Paper/Quality tab contains the following controls:
■
Print Task Quick Sets group box
■
Paper Options group box
■
Document preview image
■
Print Quality group box
Print Task Quick Sets
The first group box in the upper portion of the Paper/Quality tab is Print Task Quick Sets. Any
change to the Print Task Quick Sets group box that is made on the Paper/Quality tab affects most
of the Printing Preferences driver tabs (the Paper/Quality, Effects, Finishing, and Job Storage
tabs) because they are all the same control.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features
175
Use the Print Task Quick Sets setting to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all of the other print driver tabs (except the Advanced tab, where the setting is not available).
Print Task Quick Sets are either preset by network-administrator settings or user-defined printing
specifications (such as media size, pages per sheet, and so on). The Print Task Quick Sets control
does not appear on the driver Properties tabs.
NOTE Administrators can predefine print task quick sets for their users. These administrator
print task quick sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but usually cannot
be modified by users. Users can also define print task quick sets for their own use. Userdefined print task quick sets are described later in this section.
The following selections are available in the Print Task Quick Sets drop-down menu:
■
Default Print Settings
■
User Guide Print Settings
Default Print Settings
When you select Default Print Settings, nearly all of the settings are restored to the combination
that existed after the driver was installed (the original settings). However, if the attribute combinations
that are associated with watermark definitions, custom media sizes, or the other quick sets have
been changed or deleted, the original settings for those items are not restored.
Type a new Quick Set name here appears in the Print Task Quick Sets menu automatically if no
other driver settings have been changed since the driver was installed, or if all of the driver settings
match the original settings. Otherwise, the setting in the Print Task Quick Sets menu is the same
label that appeared when you last closed the printing Properties dialog box by clicking OK.
The following table shows the default settings for Print Task Quick Sets. See the HP Driver
Preconfiguration section for information about preconfigurable driver settings.
Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer
HP unidrivers
176
Driver feature
Feature setting location
Default values
for U.S. English
Print Task Quick
Sets
Default setting
for other
languages (if
different)
Correct Order
for Rear Bin
Finishing tab, Document Options
group box
Off
Yes
Print on Both
Sides
Finishing tab, Document Options
group box
Off
Yes
Flip Pages Up
Finishing tab, Document Options
group box
Unavailable; Off
when activated
Yes
Booklet Layout
Finishing tab, Document Options
group box
Unavailable; Off
when activated
Yes
Pages per Sheet Finishing tab, Document Options
group box
1
Yes
Print Page
Borders
Finishing tab, Document Options
group box
Unavailable; Off
when activated
Yes
Page Order
Finishing tab, Document Options
group box
Unavailable;
Right then
Yes
Preconfigurable1
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer (continued)
Driver feature
Feature setting location
Default values
for U.S. English
Print Task Quick
Sets
Default setting
for other
languages (if
different)
Preconfigurable1
Down when
activated
Orientation
Finishing tab, Orientation group box Portrait
Yes
Rotate by 180
degrees
Finishing tab, Orientation group box Off
Yes
Resizing
Options
Effects tab, Resizing Options
group box
Actual Size
Yes
Print document
on
Effects tab, Resizing Options
group box
Off - print on the
size specified in
the Paper/
Quality tab
Yes
Size to print on
Effects tab, Resizing Options
group box
Actual Size
Scale to Fit
Effects tab, Resizing Options
group box
Unavailable; Off
when activated
Yes
% of Normal
Size
Effects tab, Resizing Options
group box
Off
Yes
Watermarks
Effects tab
(none)
Yes
Watermarks
First Page Only
Effects tab, Watermarks group box
Unavailable; Off
when activated
Yes
Current
watermarks
Effects tab, Watermark Details
dialog box (Click Edit for
Watermark Details.)
(none)
Yes2
Watermark
Message
Effects tab, Watermark Details
dialog box (Click Edit for
Watermark Details.)
(none)
Yes2
Watermark
Message Angle
Effects tab, Watermark Details
dialog box (Click Edit for
Watermark Details.)
Diagonal
Yes2
Watermark
Message Angle
(angle)
Effects tab, Watermark Details
dialog box (Click Edit for
Watermark Details.)
Unavailable
unless the Angle
option is
selected; 52
(degrees) when
activated
Yes
Watermark
Font Name
Effects tab, Watermark Details
dialog box, Font Attributes group
box
Arial
Watermark
Font Color
Effects tab, Watermark Details
dialog box, Font Attributes group
box
Gray
Yes
Watermark
Font Shading
Effects tab, Watermark Details
dialog box, Font Attributes group
box
Very Light
Yes2
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features
Languagedependent
Yes
HP unidrivers
The default value
depends on
regional media
size.
Yes2
177
Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer (continued)
HP unidrivers
178
Driver feature
Feature setting location
Default values
for U.S. English
Print Task Quick
Sets
Default setting
for other
languages (if
different)
Watermark
Font Size
Effects tab, Watermark Details
dialog box, Font Attributes group
box
80
No
Watermark
Font Style
Effects tab, Watermark Details
dialog box, Font Attributes group
box
Regular
Yes2
Size is:
Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options
group box
Letter
Use Different
Paper/Covers
Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options
group box
Off - all of the
pages use the
same media
No
Source is:
Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options
group box
Automatically
Select
Yes
Type is:
Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options
group box
Unspecified
Yes
Print Quality
Paper/Quality tab, Print Quality
group box
FastRes 1200
Yes
EconoMode
(can save Print
Cartridges)
Paper/Quality tab, Print Quality
group box
Off
Yes
Unlabeled
group box
Job Storage tab
Status message
about the
destination of the
job
No
Job Storage
Mode
Job Storage tab, Job Storage
Mode group box
Off is selected
No
Proof and Hold
Job Storage tab, Job Storage
Mode group box
Available, not
selected
No
Private Job
Job Storage tab, Job Storage
Mode group box
Available, not
selected
No
Windows User
Name
Job Storage tab, User Name group
box
Unavailable
unless a Job
Storage option is
selected
No
Job Name
Job Storage tab, Job Name group
box
Unavailable
unless a Job
Storage option is
selected
No
PIN to Print
Job Storage tab, Require PIN
group box
Unavailable
unless a Job
Storage option is
selected
No
Display Job ID
when printing
Job Storage tab, Job Notification
Options group box
Unavailable
unless a Job
No
The default value
depends on
regional media
size.
Preconfigurable1
Yes
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer (continued)
Driver feature
Feature setting location
Default values
for U.S. English
Print Task Quick
Sets
Default setting
for other
languages (if
different)
Preconfigurable1
Storage option is
selected; On
when activated
If Job Name
Exists
1
2
Job Storage tab, Job Name group
box
Unavailable
unless a Job
Storage option is
selected
No
Preconfigurable by using one of the HP Preconfiguration tools. For more information, See HP Driver Preconfiguration, or
go to www.hp.com/support/lj2410 for the HP LaserJet 2410 printer, www.hp.com/support/lj2420 for the HP LaserJet 2420
printer, or www.hp.com/support/lj2430 for the HP LaserJet 2430 printer.
Not supported in Windows 98 and Windows Me.
User Guide Print Settings
The User Guide Print Settings option provides a Print Task Quick Set for optimal printing of the
HP LaserJet 2400 Series User Guide.
When you select User Guide Print Settings, all of the settings are restored to the default settings,
except for the following settings:
■
Print on Both Sides is set to ON
■
Flip Pages Up is set to ON
■
Pages per Sheet is set to 2
■
Page Order is set to Right then Down
By default, the Print Task Quick Sets menu is set to Type new Quick Set name here. When you
change any of the default settings on any of the Printing Preferences driver tabs and you want to
save the configuration as a print task quick set, highlight the words Type new Quick Set name here,
type the name you want for your new print task quick set, and then click Save. Print task quick sets
are saved in the system registry. To delete a print task quick set, select it from the drop-down menu
and click Delete.
NOTE Administrators can predefine print task quick sets for their users. These administrator
print task quick sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but usually cannot
be modified by users. Users can also define print task quick sets for their own use. Userdefined print task quick sets are described later in this section.
You can store a maximum of 25 print task quick sets on a particular system. If you attempt to save
too many, a message box appears that reads, "There are too many Print Task Quick Sets defined.
Please delete some before adding new ones."
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features
179
HP unidrivers
Type new Quick Set name here
Paper Options
The settings specified in the Paper Options group box on the Paper/Quality tab apply to all of the
pages of the document. The following illustration shows the Paper Options group box and the
selections that are available by default.
Figure 4-4 Paper Options group box
The appearance of the Paper Options group box changes when the Use Different Paper/Covers
check box is selected. For convenience, in this section the settings in the Paper Options group box
are described below in the following order.
HP unidrivers
■
Size is
■
Source Is
■
Type is
■
Use Different Paper/Covers
Size is
The Size is: setting is a drop-down menu that lists all of the supported media sizes.
When you move the mouse over the dimensions label, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a
gloved hand. Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units.
Because driver settings are overridden by media-size settings in most software programs, it is
generally best to use the driver to set media size only when you are printing from software programs
that lack a media-size setting, such as NotePad, or when you are producing a book or a booklet that
does not require different media sizes.
180
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
NOTE Certain software programs can override the size command and specify different
media sizes within a single document.
For information about media sizes, see the Media attributes section of this guide.
Custom
The Custom Paper Size dialog box appears when you click the Custom button on the Paper/
Quality tab. The following illustration shows the initial appearance of the Custom Paper Size dialog
box.
Name
Use the Name text box to type a new name for a custom media size.
The name that appears in the Name text box is one of three things, depending on the following
conditions:
■
If a saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu on the Paper/Quality
tab, then the Name drop-down menu shows the name of the selected custom media size.
■
If a standard media size has been selected on the Paper/Quality tab, then the Name drop-down
menu shows the default name of "Custom."
■
If a new name has been typed into the Name text box for the purpose of saving a new size or
renaming an existing size, then that new name will remain in the text box until the new size is
saved or the dialog box is closed.
If you type a new name into the Name text box, but then do not click the Save button, you should be
able to change the width and height values without losing the name. However, if you close the dialog
box without clicking the Save button, any unsaved name or size values are lost without warning.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features
181
HP unidrivers
Figure 4-5 Custom Paper Size dialog box
Paper size
The width and height values can be changed by typing numeric strings into the edit boxes in the
Paper Size group box.
Any entry that is greater than the maximum limits of the width and height control is rounded down to
the maximum valid entry, while any entry that is smaller than the minimum limits of the width and
height control is rounded up to the minimum valid entry.
Any non-numerical entry reverts to the last valid entry. Width and height entries are validated when
the focus has changed.
The resolution of the control is two decimal places for both millimeters and inches.
Units
To change measurement units, select one of the radio buttons in the Units group box (either Inches
or Millimeters).
Custom width and height control limits
The minimum media size for the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer is 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5
inches) and the maximum is 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches). The following table summarizes
media size limits for each media-handling device.
Table 4-2 PCL 6 custom media sizes
Tray
Dimensions
Minimum
Maximum
Tray 1 (multipurpose)
Width
76.2 mm (3 inches)
215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
Height
127.0 mm (5 inches)
355.6 mm (14 inches)
Width
Custom sizes not supported
Custom sizes not supported
Height
Custom sizes not supported
Custom sizes not supported
Width
Custom sizes not supported
Custom sizes not supported
Height
Custom sizes not supported
Custom sizes not supported
Width
Custom sizes not supported
Custom sizes not supported
Height
Custom sizes not supported
Custom sizes not supported
Tray 2 (250-sheet)
Tray 3 (500-sheet)
Duplexing unit
HP unidrivers
Use Different Paper/Covers
When the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected and different options are configured,
the Size is:, Source is:, and Type is: menus change, offering a variety of options. For more
information, see the Use Different Paper/Covers section in this chapter of the guide.
Source Is
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source
trays depends on the product accessories. Any optional source trays that are installed through the
Device Settings tab also appear here.
182
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
The Source is: drop-down menu can contain the following options:
■
Automatically select
■
Printer Auto Select
■
Manual Feed in Tray 1
■
Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose tray)
■
Tray 2 (250-sheet tray)
■
Tray 3 (500-sheet tray)
The default setting is Automatically Select. When this setting is selected, the HP LaserJet 2410,
2420, and 2430 printers use the source tray that supports the media size that you have selected. If
you select a source tray other than Automatically select, make sure that the correct media size is
loaded in the source tray. For information about media sources, see the Media attributes section of
this guide.
Type is
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all the media types that the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430
printers support. When you use the default setting, Unspecified, the printer uses the default media
type, which is usually Plain.
■
Unspecified
■
Plain
■
Preprinted
■
Letterhead
■
Transparency
■
Prepunched
■
Labels
■
Bond
■
Recycled
■
Color
■
Cardstock (164 to 200 g/m2 or 43 to 53 lb)
■
Envelope
■
Light (60 to 75 g/m2)
■
Rough
HP unidrivers
The following standard types appear in the lists:
The default setting is Unspecified, and the program selects the media type. If you select a different
setting, make sure the correct media type is loaded in the tray you selected in the Source is: setting.
For more information about media types, see the Media attributes section of this guide.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features
183
Use Different Paper/Covers
You can print books with different media types using the Use Different Paper/Covers options.
When you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box, the following settings can appear in
the group box, along with the associated options:
■
Front Cover
■
First Page
■
Other Pages
■
Last Page
■
Back Cover
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different
Paper/Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select
remain configured until you close the software program.
Each option for the Use Different Paper/Covers setting is described in the following sections.
Front Cover
Use the Front Cover options to include a blank or preprinted front cover on a document, or to
include a front cover from a source tray that is different from the one that is used for the remainder of
the document.
The following illustration shows the Front Cover setting and options.
HP unidrivers
184
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
Figure 4-6 Front Cover options
■
Size is: drop-down menu
■
Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
■
Source is: drop-down menu
■
Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes that you make to
the Size is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings made in other Use Different Paper/
Covers options.
When you select Front Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check
box to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down
menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Front Cover option.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a front cover to the document. The
list of source trays depends on the product accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed
through the Device Settings tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is:
setting, see the Source Is section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the Type is: in the Type is section of
this chapter.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features
185
HP unidrivers
The following Front Cover options are available:
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different
Paper/Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings you select
remain configured until you close the software program.
First Page
Use the First Page options to select an alternative media size, type, or source for the first page of a
document. The following illustration shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you
select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box.
HP unidrivers
Figure 4-7 First Page options
The following First Page options are available:
■
Size is: drop-down menu
■
Source is: drop-down menu
■
Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes that you make to
the Size is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings that you made in other Use Different
Paper/Covers options.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source
trays depends on the product accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed through the
Device Settings tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the
Source Is section of this chapter.
186
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is: in the Type
is section of this chapter.
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different
Paper/Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings you select
remain configured until you close the software program.
Other Pages
Use the Other Pages options to select an alternative media size, type, or source for the other pages
of the document.
HP unidrivers
The following illustration shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select
the Use Different Paper/Covers check box.
Figure 4-8 Other Pages options
The following Other Pages options are available:
■
Size is: drop-down menu
■
Source is: drop-down menu
■
Type is: drop-down menu
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features
187
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes that you make to
the Size is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings that you made in other Use Different
Paper/Covers options.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source
trays depends on the product accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed through the
Device Settings tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the
Source Is section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is: in the Type
is section of this chapter.
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different
Paper/Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings you select
remain configured until you close the software program.
Last Page
Use the Last Page options to select an alternative media size, type, or source for the last page of a
document. The following illustration shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you
select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box.
HP unidrivers
Figure 4-9 Last Page options
188
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
The following Last Page options are available:
■
Size is: drop-down menu
■
Source is: drop-down menu
■
Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes that you make to
the Size is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings that you made in other Use Different
Paper/Covers options.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is: in the Type
is section of this chapter.
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different
Paper/Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings you select
remain configured until you close the software program.
Back Cover
Use the Back Cover options to include a blank or preprinted back cover on a document, or to
include a back cover from a source tray that is different from the one used for the remainder of the
document.
HP unidrivers
The following illustration shows the Back Cover setting and options.
Figure 4-10 Back Cover setting
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features
189
The following Back Cover options are available:
■
Size is: drop-down menu
■
Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
■
Source is: drop-down menu
■
Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes that you make to
the Size is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings that you made in other Use Different
Paper/Covers options.
When you select Back Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check
box to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down
menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Back Cover option.
NOTE The Back Cover options are not available when the Booklet Printing Layout setting
is enabled on the Finishing tab. The back cover setting is unavailable, because this page
would otherwise be printed in the middle of a booklet.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a back cover to the document. The
list of source trays depends on the product accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed
through the Device Settings tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is:
setting, see the Source Is section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the Type is: in the Type is section of
this chapter.
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different
Paper/Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings you select
remain configured until you close the software program.
HP unidrivers
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Paper/Quality, Effects, and
Finishing tabs.
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview
image. When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes
from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by
clicking on the image.
Print Quality
The Print Quality group box contains the Print Quality drop-down box and the EconoMode check
box.
190
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
The default setting for Print Quality is FastRes 1200 for the HP PCL 6 print driver or 600 dpi for the
PCL 5e and PS emulation print drivers.
This setting controls resolution, which refers to the number of dots per inch (dpi) used to print the
page. As resolution is increased, the quality (clarity and visual appeal) of print on the page is
improved. However, higher resolution may also result in longer printing times. The following options
are available in the Print Quality drop-down box:
■
ProRes 1200 (180 lpi): Prints using a resolution of 1200 x 1200 with 180 lines per inch (lpi). This
prints slower than other resolutions, but has the best print quality.
■
ProRes 1200 (141 lpi): Prints using a resolution of 1200 x 1200 with 141 lines per inch (lpi). It
prints slower than other resolutions, but has the best print quality.
■
FastRes 1200: Prints using a resolution of 1200 x 600. It is faster than full 1200 x 1200
resolution, but has a slightly lower print quality.
■
600 dpi: Prints using standard 600 dpi resolution.
The EconoMode check box can be selected in conjunction with any of the print quality settings.
When you select EconoMode, the product uses less toner on each page. Using this option might
extend the life of your print cartridge and can lower the cost per page, but the option also reduces
print quality. Using the EconoMode feature with non-HP print cartridges can result in spillage or
printer damage.
Effects tab features
HP unidrivers
Use the Effects tab to create unique media effects such as scaling and watermarks. The following
illustration shows the Effects tab.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features
191
Figure 4-11 Effects tab
HP unidrivers
The Effects tab contains the following controls:
■
Print Task Quick Sets group box
■
Resizing Options group box
■
Document preview image
■
Watermarks group box
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined
printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the Paper/
Quality tab features section of this guide.
192
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
Resizing options
The Resizing Options group box consists of the following controls:
■
Actual Size (default)
■
Print Document On setting
■
Scale to Fit check box
■
% of Normal Size setting
Actual Size
Actual Size is the default setting. It prints the document without changing the document size.
Print Document On
Select the Print Document On radio button to format the document for one media size and then
print the document on a different media size, with or without scaling the image to fit the new media
size.
The Print Document On control is disabled by either of the following conditions:
■
The % of Normal Size value is not 100.
■
The Pages per Sheet value (on the Finishing tab) is not 1.
When Print Document On is selected, the drop-down menu shows the media sizes on which you
can print. The list contains all of the standard media sizes that are supported by the selected media
source and any custom sizes that you have created. When Print Document On is selected, Scale
to Fit is automatically selected. Clear this check box if you do not want your document reduced or
enlarged to fit on the selected media size.
The Scale to Fit check box specifies whether each formatted document-page image is scaled to fit
the target media size. By default, Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected. If
the setting is turned off, then the document page images will not be scaled, and are instead centered
at full size on the target media. If the document size is larger than the target media size, then the
document image is clipped. If it is smaller, then it is centered within the target media. The following
illustration shows preview images for a document formatted for Legal-size media with the Print
Document On check box selected, and the target size specified as Letter.
Figure 4-12 Preview images - Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right)
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features
193
HP unidrivers
Scale to Fit
When the size for which the document is formatted (that is, the logical size) differs from the target
size, the preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in
relation to the target page size.
% of Normal Size
The % of Normal Size option provides a slider bar to use for scaling the percentage setting. The
default setting in the entry box is 100 percent of normal size. Normal size is defined as the media
size that is selected within the driver or what the driver receives from the software program (if the
software program does not negotiate the media size with the driver). The driver scales the page by
the appropriate factor and sends it to the printer.
The limits of the range are from 25 percent to 400 percent, and any values outside the range are
adjusted to those limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the Tab key
is pressed or another control is selected).
Any change to the scale also changes the page preview, which increases or decreases from the
upper-left corner of the preview.
The slider bar controls the scale directly. The value in the edit box changes as the scroll bar indicator
is dragged, and the preview image is updated to the new image scale. Each click on the scroll bar
arrows increases or decreases the scale by one percent. Each click on the slider bar affects the
scale by 10 percent.
You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the scroll bar indicator at the default Windows
resolution; use the scroll bar indicator to approximate the desired value, and then use the scroll bar
arrows to refine the value.
The following settings disable % of Normal Size:
■
Print Document On (on the Effects tab) is selected
■
Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1
Document preview image
HP unidrivers
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of most Printing Preferences driver tabs
(the Paper/Quality, Effects, and Finishing tabs).
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview
image. When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes
from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by
clicking the document preview image.
Watermarks
Use the Watermarks feature to choose a watermark, create your own custom watermarks (text
only), or edit an existing watermark. The following watermarks are preset in the driver:
194
■
(none)
■
Confidential
■
Draft
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
■
SAMPLE
The drop-down menu shows alphabetically sorted watermarks that are currently available on the
system, plus the string "(none)", which indicates that no watermark is selected. This is the default
setting. Any watermark that is selected from this list appears in the preview image.
When the First Page Only check box is selected, the watermark is printed only on the first page of
the document. The First Page Only check box is disabled when the current watermark selection is
"(none)".
Watermarks are applied to logical pages. For example, when Pages per Sheet is set to "4" and First
Page Only is turned off, four watermarks appear on the physical page (one on each logical page).
HP unidrivers
Click Edit, and the Watermark Details dialog box appears.
Figure 4-13 Watermark Details dialog box
The dialog box shows a preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark and
controlling the message angle and font attributes.
Click OK to accept all of the changes that are made in the Watermark Details dialog box. However,
clicking Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark, and then
select a different watermark or click New, all of the changes made to the previous watermark are
saved, and only the current, unsaved changes can be canceled.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features
195
Current watermarks
The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks, both predefined
watermarks that are available in the driver and any new watermarks you have created.
To create a new watermark, click New. The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks list
and in the Watermark Message edit box as Untitled until you name it. The name that you type in
the Watermark Message field appears in the Current Watermarks group box in the Watermark
Details dialog box and in the Watermarks group box on the Effects tab.
To name the new watermark, type the selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit box.
To delete a watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list and click Delete. A
warning appears asking whether you are sure you want to delete the selected item. Click Cancel if
you want to keep the watermark. Click OK to delete the selected watermark.
NOTE You can have no more that 30 watermarks in the Current Watermarks list at one
time. When you reach the limit of 30 watermarks, the New button is disabled.
To edit an existing watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list. If you change
the Watermark Message for that watermark, you are, in effect, creating a new watermark.
Watermark Message
The Watermark Message is also the name that identifies the watermark in the Current Watermarks
list, except when more than one watermark has the same message. For example, you might want
several different watermarks with the message DRAFT, each with a different typeface or font size.
When this occurs, the string is appended with a space, a pound sign, and a number (for example,
Draft #2). When a number is added, the number two is used first, but if the resulting name is also in
the list, then the number increases until the name is unique (Draft #3, Draft #4, and so on).
Message Angle
HP unidrivers
Use the controls in the Message Angle group box to print the watermark in different orientations on
the page. The settings are Diagonal, Horizontal, or Angle (custom). The default is Diagonal. All
three settings automatically center the watermark string within the page; the selection of a particular
setting affects only the angle of the string placement. Diagonal places the text along a line that
spans the lower-left to upper-right corners of the page. Horizontal places the text along a line that
spans the mid-left and mid-right edges of the page. Angle places the text at the specified angle
across the page.
Font Attributes
Use the controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the shading, size, and style
of the font.
The Font Attributes group box contains the following controls.
196
■
Name drop-down menu
■
Color drop-down menu
■
Shading drop-down menu
■
Size spin box
■
Style drop-down menu
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
Name
The Name drop-down menu lists fonts that are currently installed on the system. The default is
language-dependent.
Color
The Color drop-down menu contains a single setting: Gray.
Shading
The default Shading setting for new and preset watermarks is Very Light. The following range of
shades is available from the Shading drop-down menu.
■
Lightest
■
Very Light (default)
■
Light
■
Medium Light
■
Medium
■
Medium Dark
■
Dark
■
Very Dark
■
Darkest
These values represent the intensity of the gray that is used. A choice of Light produces a lightly
saturated gray watermark. A choice of Lightest produces the lightest shade of watermark; Darkest
produces a black watermark.
Size
HP unidrivers
Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu. The default point size is languagedependent.
Style
The choice of Regular, Bold, Italic, and Bold Italic is available from the Style drop-down menu.
The default Style setting for new and preset watermarks is Regular.
Default settings
The default settings for new watermarks are Arial font, Gray color, Very Light shading, 80 points,
and Regular style. The default settings for preset watermarks are Arial font, Gray color, Very Light
shading, and Bold style. The default point size for preset watermarks is language-dependent, and
varies.
Finishing tab features
Use the Finishing tab to print booklets and control the media output. The following illustration shows
the Finishing tab.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features
197
Figure 4-14 Finishing tab
HP unidrivers
The Finishing tab contains the following controls:
■
Print Task Quick Sets group box
■
Document Options group box
■
Document preview image
■
Orientation group box
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined
printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the Paper/
Quality tab features section of this guide.
198
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
Document Options
The Document Options group box contains the following controls:
■
Correct Order for Rear Bin check box
■
Print on Both Sides check box
■
Flip Pages Up check box
■
Booklet Layout drop-down menu
■
Pages per Sheet drop-down menu
■
Print Page Borders check box
■
Page Order drop-down menu
Correct Order for Rear Bin
The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers have a door in the back that can be opened to allow
the paper to go straight out the back of the printer. This bin can be used to minimize curl and avoid
jams with heavier paper, such as cardstock. This check box orders the pages correctly for this rear
bin so that they come out in the right order.
Print on Both Sides
The default setting for the Print on Both Sides option is off (not selected). The Print on Both Sides
check box is always available, but selecting Print on Both Sides with the following media types or
sizes will cause the driver to display an Incompatible Print Settings message when the print job is
sent:
■
Media types: Labels, Transparency, or Envelope.
■
Media sizes: Envelope #10, Envelope B5, Envelope C5, Envelope DL, or Envelope Monarch.
Selecting Print on Both Sides also makes the Flip Pages Up and Booklet Layout options available.
Automatically printing on both sides
The duplexing unit in the product prints on two sides of a sheet when the Print on Both Sides option
is specified in the print job. The HP LaserJet 2420d, 2420dn, and 2430dtn printer models come with
a duplexing unit installed.
The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer supports smart duplexing. The smart duplexing
feature increases printing performance by not sending one-page print jobs or single-sided pages of a
duplexed print job through the duplexing unit even when the duplexing feature has been enabled in
the driver.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features
199
HP unidrivers
When the Print on Both Sides option is selected, a small warning icon will appear next to these
media types and sizes in the drop-down menus on the Paper/Quality tab, indicating the
incompatibility.
All media types support the smart duplexing feature, except for media types that cannot be printed
on both sides, such as labels and transparencies, and the following media types:
■
Prepunched
■
Preprinted
■
Letterhead
When the media type is set to Unspecified, the smart duplexing feature is disabled.
To achieve the best print quality when printing on the second side of the page, the product needs to
make adjustments to its print modes. When you select a media type, you are, in effect, instructing the
product to use a group of settings (such as fuser temperature and print speed) to print the media with
the best possible quality. This group of settings is known as a mode or print mode, and a different
print mode is used with each media type. Print-mode adjustments are automatic when the duplexing
unit is used.
Manually printing on both sides
Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box to print on the second side of the media for
the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420 and 2430 printers that do not have a duplexing unit installed. Also select
Print on Both Sides (Manually) on the other HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer models for
media types that are not available when using the automatic duplexing unit, such as cardstock and
thick media.
NOTE To make the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box available in the document
options, enable the Allow Manual Duplexing option on the Device Settings tab in the
Properties print driver tabs. See Installable Options in this chapter.
Manually printing on the second side of a page is available when you are using the HP PCL 6,
PCL 5e, or the PS emulation unidriver. If a duplexing unit is installed and manual duplexing is
enabled in the driver, the product automatically duplexes media types that are supported by
automatic duplexing (Letter, A4, Legal, 8.5 x 13, and Executive (JIS) only), and forces manual
printing on both sides for media types that are not supported.
It is important to select the media type that corresponds to the media you are using for the print job.
The following media types have a different print modes when you manually print on the second side:
HP unidrivers
■
Plain
■
Preprinted
■
Letterhead
■
Prepunched
■
Bond
■
Recycled
■
Colored
■
Rough
Cardstock media can be manually printed on the second side, but there is no change to the print
mode. Transparencies and labels should not be manually printed on the second side.
200
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
To print a multiple-page document, follow these steps:
1
Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box.
2
Click OK. The even-number pages of the document print.
3
When the control panel shows the MANUALLY FEED OUTPUT STACK message, insert the
stack of media (on which the even-number pages have been printed) as indicated in the
following figure.
Figure 4-15 Print on Both Sides Instructions
HP unidrivers
When you have completed the steps that appear in the dialog box, the second half of the print job
prints on the back side of the stack of media. The driver does not require the application to
specifically support odd- and even-page printing, because the driver coordinates this function.
Flip Pages Up
The Flip Pages Up check box, enabled only when Print on Both Sides is selected, is used to
specify the duplex-binding option. By default, the Flip Pages Up check box is not selected. The
following table demonstrates the results of selecting this box, depending on the media orientation
selected on the Finishing tab.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features
201
Table 4-3 Page orientation
Orientation (Finishing tab)
Flip Pages Up selected
Flip Pages Up not selected
Portrait
Short-edge binding
Long-edge binding
Landscape
Long-edge binding
Short-edge binding
When Print on Both Sides is selected, the document preview image changes to show a spiral
binding along either the left edge or the top edge of the page. In addition, a folded-over corner
appears in the lower-right portion of the preview image, indicating that printing occurs on the back
side. An arrow on the folded-over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they
were bound together.
Short-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by flipping over like the pages of a note pad.
Long-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by turning like the pages of a book.
Booklet layout
The Booklet Layout drop-down menu, visible when Print on Both Sides is selected, offers choices
that are based on the current media size. The default setting for the Booklet Printing drop-down
menu is Off. The following options are available in the Booklet Layout drop-down menu:
■
Left Edge Binding
■
Right Edge Binding
When you select Left Edge Binding or Right Edge Binding, the document preview image changes
to show the location of the binding. If the Pages per Sheet setting is on the default setting of 1, it
automatically changes to 2 pages per sheet. If you change the Pages per Sheet setting manually to
4, 6, 9, or 16 pages per sheet, the booklet setting is disabled. See the Printing a Booklet section of
this chapter for more information.
Book and Booklet Printing
The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer supports book and booklet printing.
HP unidrivers
A book is a print job consisting of at least two pages that can have a different media type for the front
cover, first page, other pages, last page, or back cover. Use the Front Cover, First Page, Other
Pages, Last Page, and Back Cover settings on the Paper/Quality tab (available when you select
the Use Different Paper check box) to select different media for the front cover, first page, other
pages, and back cover.
A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet that can be folded into a
booklet that is half the size of the media. Use the Booklet Layout drop-down menu on the Finishing
tab to control booklet settings.
Printing a Booklet
Complete the following steps to print a booklet in most software programs.
202
1
Click File, click Print, and then click Properties.
2
Click the Finishing tab and select the Print on Both Sides check box.
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
3
In the Booklet Layout drop-down menu, select the type of booklet printing that you want (for
example, Right Edge Binding).
4
Click OK in the print driver.
5
Click OK in the print dialog box to print.
Printing a Book
You can print a book in which the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, and back cover have
different media types. For more information, see Paper/Quality tab features of this chapter.
Pages per Sheet
Use the Pages per Sheet option to select the number of pages that you want to print on a single
sheet. If you choose to print more than one page per sheet, the pages appear smaller and are
arranged on the sheet in the order that they would otherwise be printed. The Pages per Sheet dropdown menu provides six settings:
■
1 page per sheet (this is the default)
■
2 pages per sheet
■
4 pages per sheet
■
6 pages per sheet
■
9 pages per sheet
■
16 pages per sheet
NOTE When you select an option other than 2 pages per sheet, booklet printing is
unavailable.
Print Page Borders
Related controls indented beneath the Pages per Sheet edit box are Print Page Borders and Page
Order, which become active when Pages per Sheet is greater than 1.
HP unidrivers
Print Page Borders sets a line around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define
the borders of each logical page.
Page Order
The Page Order drop-down menu contains four selections:
■
Right, then Down
■
Down, then Right
■
Left, then Down
■
Down, then Left
The preview document image changes to reflect alterations in these settings, as shown by the
examples in the following illustration.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features
203
Figure 4-16 Page-order preview images
■
2 pages per sheet
■
4 pages per sheet
■
6 pages per sheet
■
9 pages per sheet
■
16 pages per sheet
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of most Printing Preferences driver tabs
(the Paper/Quality, Effects, and Finishing tabs).
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview
image. When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes
from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by
clicking the document preview image.
Orientation
Orientation refers to the layout of the image on the page, and does not affect the manner in which
media is fed into the printer. You can specify the orientation of the print job. The three available
orientations are portrait, landscape, and rotated. The default orientation is Portrait.
HP unidrivers
NOTE Nearly all software programs establish the orientation for the printed page, so the
page orientation in the driver is useful only for the few software programs that do not set an
orientation.
The Orientation group box contains three options:
■
Portrait. The top edge of the document is the shorter edge of the media.
■
Landscape. The top edge of the document is the longer edge of the media.
■
Rotate by 180 degrees. This creates a landscape or portrait orientation in which the image is
rotated 180 degrees. This setting is useful for printing prepunched media.
NOTE You can toggle orientation between portrait and landscape by clicking the document
preview image. If you select the Rotate by 180 degrees check box, no change occurs in the
document preview image.
204
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
Job Storage tab features
Use the job storage feature to store print jobs in the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer
memory for printing at a later time. These job-storage features are described in the following sections.
The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if Job Storage is enabled. To support jobstorage features for complex jobs, or if you often print complex graphics, print postscript (.PS)
documents, or use many downloaded fonts, HP recommends that you install additional memory.
Added memory also gives you more flexibility in supporting job storage features. A minimum total
memory of 80 MB is required to use Job Storage features.
After additional memory is installed, the driver must be configured to reflect the changes in the
product. If bidirectional communication is enabled in your environment, the Update Now feature can
be used to update the drivers. For more information, see the Automatic Configuration in this chapter.
To configure the drivers manually after installing additional memory, follow these steps:
1
Click Settings, and then click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP
Professional) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
2
Right-click the product name, click Properties, and then click the Device Settings tab.
3
If additional memory has been installed, select Printer Memory: under Installable Options, and
then select the new total amount of memory installed.
4
Click OK to make the printer job-storage features available.
NOTE To disable Job Storage, click Start, select Settings, and then click Printers
(Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and
Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
Right-click the product name, click Properties, click the Device Settings tab, select Job
Storage:, and then select Disabled in the Change 'Job Storage' Setting dialog box that
appears. When Job Storage is disabled, the Job Storage driver tab is not visible.
Job Storage tab
HP unidrivers
The following illustration shows the Job Storage tab.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features
205
Figure 4-17 Job Storage tab
HP unidrivers
The Job Storage tab contains the following controls:
206
■
Print Task Quick Sets group box
■
Status group box (unlabeled)
■
Job Storage Mode group box
■
Require PIN group box
■
Job Notification Options group box
■
User Name group box
■
Job Name group box
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined
printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the Paper/
Quality tab features section of this guide.
Status group box
The unlabeled group box on the Job Storage tab contains a status message about the destination of
a print job. The status information changes depending on the selections that are made on the Job
Storage tab.
Job Storage Mode
Use the Job Storage Mode options on the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer to store
documents at the product and then control their printing at the product control panel. This feature is
intended to provide greater flexibility, convenience, security, and cost savings.
The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer offers the following Job Storage Mode options:
■
Off
■
Proof and Hold
■
Private Job
These options and the settings that control them are described below.
Off
When selected, this option turns the Job Storage feature off (it is disabled), which means that the
print job will not be stored in the product.
Proof and Hold
To use the Proof and Hold option, Job Storage must be enabled, and the product must have a
minimum total memory of 80 MB.
HP unidrivers
When selected, this option stores the print job in memory and prints only the first copy of the job,
allowing you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining
copies of the print job at the control panel. You can set the number of proof-and-hold print jobs that
can be stored in the product at the control panel.
After it is released for printing, the proof-and-hold job is immediately deleted from the product. If
more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. Proof-and-hold jobs
are deleted if you turn off the product.
NOTE The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 proof-and-hold jobs.
The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the
default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held
document.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features
207
Private Job
To use the Private Job option, Job Storage must be enabled, and the product must have a minimum
total memory of 80 MB.
When you select Private Job, the print job is sent to the product, but is not printed until you request
the job at the product control panel. Selecting Private Job activates the Require PIN group box. The
print job can be printed only after you type the correct PIN at the control panel. After the job is
printed, the job is deleted from the product. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or
confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing.
After it is released for printing, the private job is immediately deleted from the product. If more copies
are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. Private jobs are deleted if you turn
off the product.
Using a PIN for Private Job
The Private Job option can be secured by a four-digit personal identification number (PIN). You
must type in this number at the product control panel before the product can print the job.
The group box labeled Require PIN is usually inactive. It becomes active when you select the
Private Job option.
The Private Job/PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters (0 though 9). If
you type non-numeric characters, they are removed immediately. The text field does not allow you to
type in more than four characters. The field temporarily accepts fewer than four digits in the string,
but when the edit field loses focus, the zeroes pad the left end until the PIN contains exactly four
digits. The default initialized value for the PIN is 0000 for Private Job.
Require PIN
The Require PIN group box is usually inactive. The option within the Require PIN group box, PIN to
Print, is activated if you select Private Job. If selected, you must type in the PIN number at the
product control panel in order to make the job print. For more information, see Using a PIN for
Private Job.
Job notification
HP unidrivers
Clicking a job storage mode selection causes the Job Notification Options group box to become
available. The Display Job ID when printing check box is selected by default. The Display Job ID
when printing option causes a pop-up dialog box to appear when the job-storage print job is printed.
The dialog box shows the user name and job name that are associated with the stored print job, as
well as the product name, port, and location.
User Name
Selecting a Job Storage option causes the User Name group box to become available. Use the User
Name settings to help identify the job at the product control panel. The following are the User Name
settings:
208
■
Windows User Name. This option associates your Windows user name with the stored print job.
The Windows user name is automatically displayed in the User Name text field.
■
Custom. Use this option to type a custom name for the stored print job. When you click the
Custom option button, the text field below the option becomes available. The text field can
contain no more than 16 characters.
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
Job Name
Selecting a Job Storage option causes the Job Name group box to become available. Use the Job
Name options to specify a name to identify the job at the control panel. The following are the Job
Name settings:
■
Automatic. This option automatically generates the job name associated with the stored print
job. The file name of the print job is used if it is available to the print driver. Otherwise, the
software program name or a time stamp is used for the job name.
■
Custom. Use this to type a custom job name for the stored print job. When you click the Custom
option button, the text field below the option becomes available.
■
If Job Name Exists. Use this drop-down menu to choose whether a duplicate job name should
have a number appended to it, or whether it should overwrite the existing job with the same name.
The Job Name field can contain no more than 16 characters.
If Custom is selected, but no job name is specified, as soon as the focus is removed from the control
(that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another control is selected), the empty string is replaced with
<Automatic>. In those languages for which <Automatic> cannot be translated without the use of
invalid characters, the driver uses a string of three dashes. The acceptable characters for job name
and user name vary for each operating system. The string must be of a length and type that can
appear on the product control-panel display.
Using Job Storage features when printing
To use Job Storage features when printing, follow these steps:
1
Click File and then click Print from the software program. The Print dialog box appears.
2
Click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears.
3
Click the Job Storage tab.
4
Select the job-storage options (described previously) by clicking the appropriate option button,
and then complete any required fields.
5
Click OK.
HP unidrivers
NOTE Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without Job
Storage features.
Releasing a Job Storage print job
After you send a print job that uses the Job Storage feature, you can release the job to print by
using the product control panel.
1
Press the SELECT button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus. RETRIEVE JOB is
highlighted.
2
Press the SELECT button.
3
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to your User Name, and then press the SELECT button.
4
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to the Job Name, and then press the SELECT button.
PRINT is highlighted.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features
209
5
Press the SELECT button.
6
If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press the up and down buttons to select the first digit of
the PIN, and then press the SELECT button. The number in the product control-panel display
changes to an asterisk. Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with step 7.
7
Press the up and down buttons to select the number of copies to print.
8
Press the SELECT button to print the job.
Deleting a Job Storage print job
Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the product hard disk. You can do this from the
product control panel.
1
Press the SELECT button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus. RETRIEVE JOB is
highlighted.
2
Press the SELECT button.
3
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to your User Name, and then press the SELECT button.
4
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to the Job Name, and then press the SELECT button.
5
Press the up and down buttons to select DELETE.
6
If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press the up and down buttons to select the first digit of
the PIN, and then press the SELECT button. The number in the product control-panel display
changes to an asterisk. Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with step 7.
7
Press the SELECT button to delete the job.
The stored print job is deleted and the product returns to the READY state.
Properties tabs
HP unidrivers
The Properties tabs contain information about and options for configuring the product.
Device Settings
NOTE The Device Settings tab is in the Properties for the print driver. To gain access to
the print driver Properties, click Start on the Window task bar, select Settings, and then click
Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and
Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
Right-click the product name, and then click Properties.
Available options depend on the feature. The following illustration shows the Device Settings tab.
210
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
Figure 4-18 Device Settings tab
The Device Settings tab contains controls for media-handling devices and controls for managing the
HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers.
■
Form to Tray Assignment options
■
Font Substitution Table and External Fonts option
■
Postscript options (for the HP PS emulation driver only)
■
Installable Options options
HP unidrivers
The Device Settings tab contains the following controls:
Form to Tray Assignment
A network administrator can use Form to Tray Assignment to specify the media size in each input
tray.
The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers support more than one source of media. You can
assign a form (which defines the media size and margins) to each of your printer media sources.
When a form is matched to a source, you can select the form when you print. The product prints from
the tray to which that form is assigned.
Network administrators can use the Form to Tray Assignment setting to specify, in the driver, the
media size that is loaded into each available input tray. The use of forms constrains the choices that
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features
211
are available in the media-size list on the Advanced tab in the Document Defaults driver tabs. This
constraint prevents (or reduces the likelihood of) tying up the product with media-mount messages
that occur when users request sizes or types that are not available.
The trays listed in the Form to Tray Assignment setting include standard trays and optional
accessory trays. Generally, items that are installed separately have a separate Installable Options
setting. For example, for the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers, tray 3 is listed in both the
Form to Tray Assignment setting and the Installable Options setting.
The input trays listed here are also listed as media sources on the Paper/Quality tab.
Configuring the trays
1
Select the appropriate tray in the Form to Tray Assignment list.
2
Use the drop-down menu to select the media size (or form) that is loaded in that tray.
3
Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the remaining trays.
4
Click OK to enable your settings, or, if necessary, click the Cancel button to reconfigure all of the
trays, and remove the size and type constraints that have been imposed on the Paper/Quality
tab.
Font Substitution Table
Use the Font Substitution Table settings to install and remove external fonts for the product.
External fonts can be soft fonts or DIMM fonts.
Expanding the Font Substitution Table option causes a list of fonts to appear, as show in the
following illustration. Use the settings to change the TrueType-to-printer font mappings.
HP unidrivers
212
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
Figure 4-19 Font Substitution Table
External Fonts
Use the External Fonts option to install and remove external fonts for the product. External fonts
can be soft fonts or DIMM fonts.
Clicking the External Fonts option causes the Properties button to appear. Clicking the Properties
button opens the Font Installer dialog box, which is shown in the following illustration.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features
213
HP unidrivers
NOTE The External Fonts option is available only in the HP PCL 6 and PCL 5e unidrivers.
It is not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver.
Figure 4-20 HP Font Installer dialog box
Installing external fonts
Follow these steps to install external fonts.
HP unidrivers
1
Click Start, select Settings, and then click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes
(Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware
Devices (Windows XP Home).
2
Right-click the name of the product, and then click Properties.
3
Click the Device Settings tab.
4
Click the External Fonts option. The Properties button appears.
5
Click the Properties button. The HP Font Installer dialog box appears.
6
Type the name and path of the font metric file in the Printer Font File Location text box, or click
Browse to locate the file on your computer. The font file names appear in the Font(s) to be
Added window.
7
Select the fonts that you want to add, and then click Add. The fonts are installed and the file
names appear in the Installed Font(s) window.
8
Click OK to close the HP Font Installer dialog box.
Removing external fonts
214
1
Click Start, select Settings, and then click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes
(Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware
Devices (Windows XP Home).
2
Right-click the name of the product, and then click Properties.
3
Click the Device Settings tab.
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
4
Click the External Fonts option. The Properties button appears.
5
Click the Properties button. The HP Font Installer dialog box appears.
6
The external fonts that are installed appear in the Installed Fonts window. Select the fonts that
you want to remove, and then click Remove. The fonts are removed.
7
Click OK to close the Font Installer dialog box.
Postscript options
HP unidrivers
On the HP PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings tab you will see some additional postscript
configuration options. These are shown in the following illustration.
Figure 4-21 Device Settings tab for the HP PS Emulation Unidriver
The postscript configuration options are described in the following sections.
Available PostScript Memory
This control specifies the amount of available postscript memory and provides a spin box for
changing this value. The available postscript memory is a subset of the product total physical
memory. It is usually best to set the postscript memory to match what is shown on the configuration
page. To print a configuration page from the control panel, press the Select button (the one with the
check mark) to open the menus. Next, press the up and down buttons to scroll to INFORMATION,
and then press the SELECT button. Next, press the up and down buttons to scroll to PRINT
CONFIGURATION, and then press the SELECT button.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features
215
Output Protocol
This control specifies the protocol that the product uses for print jobs. The following options are
available:
■
ASCII (default)
■
TBCP
■
Binary
When you click ASCII, data is sent in ASCII format (7-bit), which might take longer to print but can be
sent through any I/O channel, such as a serial, parallel, or network port.
When you click TBCP (Tagged Binary Communications Protocol), all data except special control
characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial
communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format.
When you click Binary, all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The
binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending
data in ASCII format.
Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job
This control specifies whether the product will be reset at the beginning of every postscript
document. The default setting is No. Ctrl-D resets the product to its default setting to ensure that
previous print jobs do not affect the current print job. Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the
product is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a product
connected through parallel or serial ports, change No to Yes.
Send Ctrl-D After Each Job
This control specifies whether the product will be reset at the end of every postscript document. The
default setting is Yes. Ctrl-D resets the product to its default setting to ensure that future print jobs
are not affected by the current print job. Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the product is
connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a network printer, change
Yes to No.
Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray
HP unidrivers
This control specifies whether to convert the true gray (RGB value) in text to the gray that the
postscript driver provides. It is set to No by default.
Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray
This control specifies whether to convert the true gray (RGB value) in graphics to the gray that the
postscript driver provides. It is set to No by default.
Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts
This control specifies whether to augment the device fonts with the Euro currency character. It is set
to Yes by default.
Job Timeout
This control specifies how long the document can take to get from the computer to the product before
the product stops trying to print the document. If you specify 0 seconds, the product continues trying
216
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
to print indefinitely. The default setting is 0 seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value
to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.
Wait Timeout
This control specifies how long the product waits to get more postscript information from the
computer. After the specified time passes, the product stops trying to print the document and prints
an error message. If you are trying to print a very complicated document, you might want to increase
this value. If you specify 0 seconds, the product waits indefinitely. The default setting is 300
seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.
Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline
This control specifies the minimum font size (in pixels) for which the driver downloads TrueType fonts
as outline (Type 1) fonts. A font smaller than the minimum setting is downloaded as a bitmap (Type
3) font. Use this option to fine-tune the Automatic setting for the TrueType Font Download option
on the Advanced tab in Document Defaults. The default setting is 100 pixels. You can use the spin
box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 pixels.
Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline
This control specifies the maximum font size (in pixels) for which the driver will download TrueType
fonts as bitmap (Type 3) fonts. A font larger than the maximum setting will be downloaded as an
outline (Type 1) font. Use this option to fine-tune the Automatic setting or override the Send
TrueType as Bitmap setting for the TrueType Font Download option on the Advanced tab in
Document Defaults. The default setting is 600 pixels. You can use the spin box to change this value
to a maximum of 32,767 pixels.
Installable Options
■
Automatic Configuration
■
Tray 3
■
Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing)
■
Allow Manual Duplexing
■
Printer Memory
■
Job Storage
■
Mopier Mode
■
Postscript Passthrough (PS Emulation Unidriver only)
HP unidrivers
This section provides information to configure the printing options that you can install for the
HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers. The following controls are available:
Automatic Configuration
Use the Device Settings tab to tell the driver about the hardware configuration of the product. If
bidirectional communication is enabled in a supported environment, set up this tab by selecting the
Update Now option under Automatic Configuration. The default setting is Off. After an automatic
configuration, the setting returns to Off after the changes are made.
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features
217
If your environment does not support bidirectional communication, the Update Now setting is
unavailable, so you must manually configure the options on this tab.
Tray 3
This control specifies whether you have Tray 3, an additional 500-sheet media tray, installed on your
product. The default setting is Not Installed. In order to use Tray 3, you must change this setting to
Installed.
Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing)
The HP LaserJet 2420d, 2420dn, and 2430dtn printers come with a duplex unit installed. This setting
is enabled (Installed) by default for these three models.
NOTE The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers support smart duplexing. The
product uses the smart duplexing feature to detect information on both sides of the print job
pages and only runs the pages through the duplexing unit if printable information appears on
the second side of the page.
Allow Manual Duplexing
Some printer models do not support automatic 2-sided printing. However, you can print on both sides
of a page using manual 2-sided printing when this option is enabled. This option is enabled by default.
Printer Memory
This option matches the setting to the amount of memory that is installed in the product. The driver
generates ranges of memory that can be selected, up to the maximum that the product can accept.
The driver can use this information to manage how the print driver uses the product memory.
When a minimum total memory of 80 MB is installed, the Job Storage option and the Mopier Mode
are enabled in the print driver. The Job Storage option allows you to store print jobs, and then print
them later from the control panel. The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed
feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job.
Job Storage
HP unidrivers
If your HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer has a minimum of 80 MB of memory, limited jobstorage options are available. When job storage is enabled, the product can store print jobs so that
you can gain access to those print jobs later at the control panel.
Mopier Mode
The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated
copies from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases performance and
reduces network traffic by transmitting the job to the product once, and then storing it in the product
hard disk. The remainder of the copies are printed at the fastest speed. All documents that are
printed in mopier mode can be created, controlled, managed, and finished from the computer, which
eliminates the extra step of using a photocopier.
The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer supports the transmit-once mopying feature when the
product has a minimum total memory of 80 MB, and the Mopier Mode: setting on the Device
Settings tab is Enabled.
When you use the HP PCL 6, PCL 5e, or PS emulation unidriver, mopying is performed in one of two
ways: either through the software or through the product hardware. When the mopier is enabled,
218
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
mopying takes place through the product hardware by default. One copy of a multiple-page print job
is transmitted once through the network to the product, together with a printer job language (PJL)
command that directs the product to make the specified number of copies.
When you disable the mopier, you are not necessarily disabling mopying, which the driver can still be
performed through the software rather than through the product hardware (the mopying path that is
disabled when you change the Mopy Mode setting to Disabled). However, a multiple-copy print job
that you send with the mopier disabled loses the advantage of transmitting the print job once,
because the print job is sent through the network the same number of times as the number of copies
selected.
Mopier mode and collation
Mopying and collating print jobs are independent but closely related functions. The print driver
performs mopying, which is the ability to send original print jobs to the product. Collating is controlled
by either the print driver or the document software program. The mopying mode is selected by
default in the driver, and can be disabled by changing the Mopier Mode setting on the Device
Settings tab to Disabled.
You can control collation through the print driver by selecting or clearing the Collated check box on
the Advanced tab. You can clear the check box, which is available only when the Copy Count
option is set to more than 1 copy, to allow the software program to control collation.
To receive uncollated multiple copies of a print job, you must clear the Collated check box and make
sure that the software program collation feature is not selected.
The following table shows the relation between mopier mode settings and collation settings in the
software program and the driver. The first three columns show the settings; the last column,
"Expected result,” shows how a three-page print job would appear.
Mopier mode
Application collation
Driver collation
Expected result
Disabled
Not selected
Not selected
3 copies uncollated
Disabled
Not selected
Selected
3 copies uncollated
Disabled
Selected
Not selected
3 copies collated
Disabled
Selected
Selected
3 copies collated
Enabled
Not selected
Not selected
3 copies uncollated
Enabled
Not selected
Selected
3 copies uncollated
Enabled
Selected
Not selected
3 copies collated
Enabled
Selected
Selected
3 copies collated
HP unidrivers
Table 4-4 Driver Mopier mode and collation settings
Postscript Passthrough
Postscript Passthrough is only available in the PS Emulation Unidriver. It is enabled by default,
and must be enabled for most print jobs. Postscript Passthrough provides additional capabilities for
some software programs when printing to a Postscript driver.
Options such as Watermarks, N-up, and booklet printing might not print correctly from some
programs with Postscript Passthrough enabled, because such programs send Postscript information
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and PS emulation unidriver features
219
to the printer that the driver cannot control. Other programs might print while using these options
without problems.
Select Disabled and print your document again if you encounter problems.
NOTE In some cases, disabling Postscript Passthrough may cause unexpected
application behavior.
About tab
NOTE To gain access to the print driver Properties, click Start, select Settings, and then
click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and
Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
The About tab provides detailed information about the driver. It contains an overall build number (in
parentheses after the model name) together with specific information about each of the components.
The information varies according to the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer model number,
driver, date, and versions. The About tab is shown in the following illustration.
HP unidrivers
Figure 4-22 About tab
The About lists driver installation file names and their version numbers. The About tab also
indicates whether the driver was auto-configured, whether administrator preferences were set, the
date the driver was last configured, and whether the configuration is default or user-defined.
220
4 HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5e, and HP PS 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows
Installing the Windows printingsystem components
This chapter contains information about the following topics:
●
Supported Windows operating systems
●
System requirements
●
Font support
●
Installation instructions
Windows installation
5
221
Supported Windows operating systems
The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printing-system software supports the following Windows
operating systems:
■
Windows 98
■
Windows Me
■
Windows NT 4.0 (parallel and networked only)
■
Windows 2000 (32-bit)
■
Windows XP Home Edition (32-bit)
■
Windows XP Professional (32-bit and 64-bit)
■
Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit)
If your computer is running a 64-bit Windows OS, you must install the corresponding 64-bit print
driver. For instructions, see Installing print drivers by using the Add Printer feature.
NOTE The HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer has not been tested with and does
not support the Windows 3.1x or Windows 95 operating systems.
Windows installation
222
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
System requirements
The following are the system requirements for installing and using the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and
2430 printing-system software on each of the supported operating systems:
Pentium® or compatible processor
■
Minimum 16-color/grayscale display with 640-by-480 pixel resolution (video graphics array [VGA])
■
Same amount of RAM as the minimum requirements for the operating system
■
93 MB of available hard-disk space (on the same partition as the operating system) for full
installation
■
Onboard parallel port or network connection
Windows installation
■
System requirements
223
Font support
The following sections list the fonts that are included with Microsoft Windows software, and the fonts
that are available on the CD that came with the product.
Basic fonts
Microsoft Windows software includes these basic fonts, which can be used with any HP printing
product:
■
Arial
■
Times New Roman Italic
■
Arial Italic
■
Times New Roman Bold
■
Arial Bold
■
Courier New Bold Italic
■
Times New Roman Bold Italic
■
Arial Bold Italic
■
Symbol
■
Wingdings
■
Courier New
■
Times New Roman
Default fonts
The following default fonts are installed through a typical installation of the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420,
and 2430 printing-system software.
Table 5-1 Default fonts
Windows installation
224
File name
Font name
ALBR85W.TTF
Albertus Extra Bold
ALBR55W.TTF
Albertus Medium
OLVR55W.TTF
Antique Olive
OLVR75W.TTF
Antique Olive Bold
OLVR56W.TTF
Antique Olive Italic
CGOR45W.TTF
CG Omega
CGOR65W.TTF
CG Omega Bold
CGOR66W.TTF
CG Omega Bold Italic
CGOR46W.TTF
CG Omega Italic
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Font support
File name
Font name
CGTR45W.TTF
CG Times
CGTR65W.TTF
CG Times Bold
CGTR66W.TTF
CG Times Bold Italic
CGTR46W.TTF
CG Times Italic
CLAR67W.TTF
Clarendon Condensed Bold
CORONET.TTF
Coronet
CPSR45W.TTF
CourierPS
CPSR65W.TTF
CourierPS Bold
CPSR66W.TTF
CourierPS Bold Oblique
CPSR46W.TTF
CourierPS Oblique
GARR45W.TTF
Garamond
GARR65W.TTF
Garamond Bold
GARR46W.TTF
Garamond Italic
GARR66W.TTF
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett
HELR45W.TTF
Helvetica
HELR65W.TTF
Helvetica Bold
HELR66W.TTF
Helvetica Bold Oblique
HELR47W.TTF
Helvetica Narrow
HELR67W.TTF
Helvetica Narrow Bold
HELR68W.TTF
Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique
HELR48W.TTF
Helvetica Narrow Oblique
HELR46W.TTF
Helvetica Oblique
AVGR45W.TTF
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book
AVGR46W.TTF
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book Oblique
AVGR65W.TTF
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi
AVGR66W.TTF
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Oblique
BOKR75W.TTF
ITC Bookman Demi
BOKR76W.TTF
ITC Bookman Demi Italic
BOKR35W.TTF
ITC Bookman Light
BOKR36W.TTF
ITC Bookman Light Italic
CHANC___.TTF
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
DINGS___.TTF
ITC Zapf Dingbats
LETR45W.TTF
Letter Gothic
LETR65W.TTF
Letter Gothic Bold
Windows installation
Table 5-1 Default fonts (continued)
225
Table 5-1 Default fonts (continued)
File name
Font name
LETR46W.TTF
Letter Gothic Italic
MARIGOLD.TTF
Marigold
NCSR75W.TTF
New Century Schoolbook Bold
NCSR76W.TTF
New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
NCSR56W.TTF
New Century Schoolbook Italic
NCSR55W.TTF
New Century Schoolbook Roman
PALR65W.TTF
Palatino Bold
PALR66W.TTF
Palatino Bold Italic
PALR46W.TTF
Palatino Italic
PALR45W.TTF
Palatino Roman
SYMPS__.TTF
SymbolPS
TIMR65W.TTF
Times* Bold
TIMR66W.TTF
Times Bold Italic
TIMR46W.TTF
Times Italic
TIMR45W.TTF
Times Roman
UNVR65W.TTF
Univers Bold
UNVR66W.TTF
Univers Bold Italic
UNVR67W.TTF
Univers Condensed Bold
UNVR68W.TTF
Univers Condensed Bold Italic
UNVR57W.TTF
Univers Condensed Medium
UNVR58W.TTF
Univers Condensed Medium Italic
UNVR55W.TTF
Univers Medium
UNVR56W.TTF
Univers Medium Italic
Ninety-two additional PS emulation fonts are also available on the CD.
Table 5-2 Additional PS emulation fonts
Windows installation
226
File name
Font name
PS_12639.TTF
Albertus MT
PS_12640.TTF
Albertus MT Italic
PS_14530.TTF
Albertus MT Light
PS-11120.TTF
Antique Olive CompactPS
PS_11119.TTF
Antique Olive Roman
PS_11118.TTF
Antique Olive Roman Bold
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Font support
File name
Font name
PS_11846.TTF
Antique Olive Roman Italic
PS_24516.TTF
Apple Chancery Italic
PS_12704.TTF
Bodoni Poster
PS_14508.TTF
Bodoni PosterCompressed
PS_12581.TTF
BodoniPS
PS_12585.TTF
BodoniPS Bold
PS_12586.TTF
BodoniPS Bold Italic
PS_12582.TTF
BodoniPS Italic
PS_24517.TTF
Candid
PS_24518.TTF
Chicago
PS_14513.TTF
Clarendon Light
PS_10269.TTF
ClarendonPS
PS_12968.TTF
ClarendonPS Bold
PS_10369.TTF
Cooper Black
PS_10370.TTF
Cooper Black Italic
PS_14514.TTF
Copperplate32bc
PS_14515.TTF
Copperplate33bc
PS_10249.TTF
Coronet
PS_10267.TTF
Eurostile
PS_10268.TTF
Eurostile Bold
PS_14512.TTF
Eurostile Bold ExtendedTwo
PS_14511.TTF
Eurostile ExtendedTwo
PS_24509.TTF
Geneva
PS_13872.TTF
GillSans
PS_13874.TTF
GillSans Bold
PS_13875.TTF
GillSans Bold Italic
PS_14053.TTF
GillSans Condensed
PS_14054.TTF
GillSans Condensed Bold
PS_14051.TTF
GillSans ExtraBold
PS_13873.TTF
GillSans Italic
PS_13870.TTF
GillSans Light
PS_13871.TTF
GillSans Light Italic
PS_12542.TTF
Goudy
PS_12544.TTF
Goudy Bold
Windows installation
Table 5-2 Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)
227
Table 5-2 Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)
Windows installation
228
File name
Font name
PS_10695.TTF
Goudy Bold Italic
PS_12545.TTF
Goudy ExtraBold
PS_12543.TTF
Goudy Italic
PS_14526.TTF
Helvetica Condensed
PS_14528.TTF
Helvetica Condensed Bold
PS_14529.TTF
Helvetica Condensed Bold Italic
PS_14527.TTF
Helvetica Condensed Italic
PS_24519.TTF
Hoefler Text
PS_24521.TTF
Hoefler Text Black
PS_24522.TTF
Hoefler Text Black Italic
PS_24520.TTF
Hoefler Text Italic
PS_24523.TTF
Hoefler Text Ornaments
PS_14503.TTF
Joanna MT
PS_14505.TTF
Joanna MT Bold
PS_14506.TTF
Joanna MT Bold Italic
PS_14504.TTF
Joanna MT Italic
PS_13778.TTF
Letter Gothic Italic
PS_13777.TTF
Letter GothicPS
PS_13779.TTF
Letter GothicPS Bold
PS_13780.TTF
Letter GothicPS Bold Italic
PS_12675.TTF
Lubalin Graph
PS_12677.TTF
Lubalin Graph Bold
PS_12625.TTF
Lubalin Graph Bold Italic
PS_12623.TTF
Lubalin Graph Italic
PS_94073.TTF
Marigold
PS_14525.TTF
Mona Lisa Recut
PS_24524.TTF
Monaco
PS_24510.TTF
New York
PS_12506.TTF
Optima
PS_12510.TTF
Optima Bold
PS_12511.TTF
Optima Bold Italic
PS_12507.TTF
Optima Italic
PS_14072.TTF
Oxford Italic
PS_11546.TTF
Stempel Garamond Roman Italic
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Table 5-2 Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)
Font name
PS_11545.TTF
StempelGaramond Roman
PS_11547.TTF
StempelGaramond Roman Bold
PS_11548.TTF
StempelGaramond Roman Bold Italic
PS_14507.TTF
Taffy
PS_13501.TTF
Univers 45 Light
PS_14023.TTF
Univers 45 Light Bold
PS_14024.TTF
Univers 45 Light Bold Italic
PS_13502.TTF
Univers 45 Light Italic
PS_14030.TTF
Univers 47 Condensed Light Bold
PS_14040.TTF
Univers 47 Condensed Light Bold Italic
PS_14021.TTF
Univers 55
PS_14022.TTF
Univers 55 Italic
PS_14029.TTF
Univers 57 Condensed
PS_14039.TTF
Univers 57 Condensed Italic
PS_13548.TTF
Univers Extended Italic
PS_13547.TTF
Univers ExtendedPS
PS_14481.TTF
Univers ExtendedPS Bold Italic
PS_14480.TTF
Univers ExtendedPS Italic
Windows installation
File name
Font support
229
Installation instructions
The following sections provide instructions for installing the print drivers on various Windows
operating systems.
General installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, and XP operating
systems
General installation instructions are similar for the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, and
Windows XP operating systems.
NOTE For the Windows NT 4.0 operating system, the print drivers can be installed only by
using the Add Printer installation method. These print drivers, the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver,
the HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver, and the PS Emulation Driver are available on the printingsystem software CD. For more information, see the Installing print drivers by using the Add
Printer feature section in this chapter.
NOTE The HP PCL 5 drivers also can only be installed using the Add Printer installation
method. The are included on the printing-system software CD, but are not included in the
printing-system installer.
If the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer is connected through a file or print server, the
printing-system software must first be installed on the server before being installed on any client
systems. If the HP LaserJet printing-system software is not first installed on the server, then
bidirectional communication, some driver autoconfiguration methods, and the HP Toolbox are not
available to the client systems.
For Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, and Windows XP, administrator rights on the system are
necessary in order to install the software.
When the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printing-system installer runs, the HP LaserJet
uninstaller is always added to the system.
Installing from the printing-system CD
Follow these instructions to install the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printing system from the
printing-system software CD that came with your product.
1
Close all programs that are open on your computer.
2
Insert the printing-system software CD in the CD-ROM drive.
NOTE If your CD does not start automatically, click Start, click Run, and then browse to
and double-click the SETUP.EXE file in the root directory of the CD.
3
Click Install Printer and follow the onscreen prompts.
Windows installation
230
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Installing from a network or from downloaded files
Follow these instructions if you downloaded the files from the Web, or if you are installing the printingsystem files from a network. You might need to see your network administrator for the location of the
printing-system software file.
1
Browse to the location of the SETUP.EXE file.
2
Double-click the SETUP.EXE file.
3
Click Install Printer and continue to follow the instructions until the product is installed. For
detailed installation instructions, see Detailed Windows installation.
Detailed Windows installation
This section provides information about the installation dialog box sequence for installing the
HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printing-system software in Microsoft Windows environments.
You can choose to install the software by using a typical installation, a minimum installation, or a
custom installation.
Using the Back and Cancel buttons
Clicking the Back button on any installation dialog box returns you to the previous dialog box. The
specific dialog box depends on your previous selections.
To exit the installation sequence without installing the product, click the Cancel button in any
installation dialog box.
1
Clicking the Cancel button opens a dialog box, prompting you with this question: “Are you sure
you want to cancel the installation?”
2
Clicking Yes opens a dialog box, stating that the setup was interrupted.
3
Clicking the Finish button opens the Cancel dialog box.
4
Clicking the Finish button closes the installation screens.
Other buttons appear on the installation dialog boxes:
■
Help
■
Next
■
Space
The result of clicking these buttons is explained in context below.
Modifying a pre-existing installation
Installation instructions
Windows installation
If an HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer has been installed previously on your system, the
appearance of the main install screen changes on the CD Browser, and the install printer setting
changes to modify installation. A pre-existing installation also changes the sequence of installation
screens that are presented, depending on selections made.
231
Typical Installation dialog box sequence
NOTE The dialog boxes shown in this chapter appear in the Windows XP Pro installation
sequence. The order and appearance of dialog boxes can vary among operating systems.
The typical installation includes the following components:
■
HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 PCL 6 driver
■
Screen fonts
■
Hewlett Packard LaserJet 2410/2420/2430 series Printing System Install Notes
■
HP LaserJet 2400 Series User Guide
The following illustration represents an overall path through the installation process. It is intended as
a reference only; selections and setups will vary.
Windows installation
232
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-1 Installation path
Windows installation
NOTE The components of a typical installation might vary from product to product.
When you select the Install Printer option from the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer
software CD, the Choose Setup Language dialog box appears.
Installation instructions
233
Figure 5-2 Choose Setup Language dialog box
NOTE The Choose Setup Language dialog box lists only the languages that are available
on the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printing-system software CD.
The installer automatically detects the language that your computer system uses and presents this
selection as the default.
You can select another language that is available on the CD by clicking the down arrow in the dropdown menu.
Clicking OK initiates the printing system setup, and the Preparing to Install dialog box appears.
NOTE While the Preparing to Install dialog box appears, the installer is decompressing
files into the system TEMP directory. The elapsed time to complete this action depends upon
the performance of your system.
Clicking Cancel at this point takes you to a Setup Error dialog box. Clicking the Finish button
on this dialog box closes the installation screens. This sequence of screens differs from that
seen when you click the Cancel button in subsequent dialog boxes, but the result is the same;
the installation sequence is canceled.
Windows installation
234
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-3 Preparing to Install dialog box
Clicking Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box.
NOTE If your computer uses the Windows NT 4.0 operating system, you must use the Add
Printer installation method to install the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver, the HP Traditional
PCL 5e Driver, and the PS Emulation Driver for the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430
printer. If you try using the regular installation method in a Windows NT 4.0 operating
environment, the following screen appears:
Figure 5-4 Use the Add Printer Wizard
Installation instructions
Windows installation
For information about using the Add Printer install method, see the Installing print drivers by using
the Add Printer feature section.
235
Figure 5-5 Welcome dialog box
Clicking Software License Agreement takes you to the HP Software License Agreement dialog
box.
Clicking Installation Notes opens the file LJ24X0_INSTALL-NOTE_ENWW.HTM
Clicking Next takes you to the Printer Connection dialog box.
Windows installation
236
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-6 HP Software License Agreement dialog box
Windows installation
Clicking OK returns you to the Welcome dialog box.
Installation instructions
237
Figure 5-7 Printer Connection dialog box
NOTE This product does not support infrared connections.
If you select Connected directly to this computer (a direct connection that uses a parallel cable or
universal serial bus cable), clicking Next takes you to the Connector Type dialog box, and then to
the Model dialog box. This is the default option.
The Model dialog box is shown in the following illustration.
Windows installation
238
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-8 Model dialog box
Clicking Next takes you to the Installation Type dialog box. To continue with the default installation
sequence, see Figure 5-19 Installation Type dialog box
Windows installation
If you select Connected via the network in the Printer Connection dialog box, clicking Next takes
you to the Network Setup dialog box.
Installation instructions
239
Figure 5-9 Network Setup dialog box
If you select Basic network setup for a PC or server, clicking Next takes you to the Identify
Printer dialog box. This is the default selection.
If you select Client setup for client-server printing, clicking Next initiates a series of question
dialog boxes that help you determine the best connection-type option to use. This series begins with
the Specify Network dialog box.
If you select Help me determine which setup is right for me, clicking Next takes you to the
Connection Type dialog box.
Windows installation
240
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-10 Connection Type dialog box
Clicking Parallel Cable and then clicking Next takes you to the Cable Connection dialog box.
Clicking USB Cable and then clicking Next takes you to the Cable Connection dialog box.
Windows installation
Clicking Network Cable and then clicking Next takes you to the Print Job Management dialog box.
Installation instructions
241
Figure 5-11 Cable Connection dialog box
Clicking A Jetdirect Print Server, and then clicking Next takes you to the Print Job Management
dialog box.
Clicking Another PC (not this PC), and then Next takes you to the Recommended Network Setup
dialog box.
Windows installation
242
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-12 Print Job Management dialog box
Windows installation
Clicking either selection takes you to the Recommended Network Setup dialog box.
Installation instructions
243
Figure 5-13 Recommended Network Setup dialog box
Clicking Next takes you to the Identify Printer dialog box.
Windows installation
244
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-14 Identify Printer dialog box
Clicking Search from a list of detected printers (recommended), and then clicking Next opens a
screen that states that the installer is searching the network for available products to install.
If you are performing a network installation, and no printer is found, the Check Cable Connection
dialog box appears, advising you to make sure the cable is properly connected, and giving you the
option of searching again or specifying a printer by address.
If a printer is found, the Printer Found dialog box appears, with a list of matching products that have
been found on the network.
Clicking Specify a printer by address and then clicking Next takes you to the Specify Printer
dialog box.
Clicking Help takes you to context-sensitive HTML help.
Windows installation
The Specify Printer dialog box is shown in the following illustration.
Installation instructions
245
Figure 5-15 Specify Printer dialog box
You can specify a printer by selecting of the following options and typing in the required information:
■
Hardware Address (MAC)
■
IP Address
■
IP Hostname
■
IPX Address
Clicking Help takes you to context-sensitive HTML help.
Clicking Next takes you to the Printer Found dialog box.
The Printer Found dialog box is shown in the following illustration.
Windows installation
246
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-16 Printer Found dialog box
Clicking Help takes you to context-sensitive HTML help.
Clicking Yes, install this printer and clicking Next takes you to the Confirm Settings dialog box.
Clicking No, install a different printer takes you to the Check Cable Connection dialog box,
advising you to make sure the cable is properly connected, and giving you the option of searching
again for a network printer or specifying a printer by address.
Windows installation
The Confirm Settings dialog box is shown in the following illustration.
Installation instructions
247
Figure 5-17 Confirm Settings dialog box
Clicking Change TCP/IP Settings takes you to the Confirm Changing Setting dialog box and then
on to the Set Network Protocol dialog box.
Clicking Help takes you to context-sensitive HTML help.
Clicking Next takes you to the Installation Type dialog box .
Clicking Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box.
Windows installation
248
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-18 Set Network Protocol dialog box
Clicking Change Settings... makes the text boxes active so that you can type a different IP Address,
Subnet Mask, or Gateway address.
Windows installation
Clicking Next takes you to the Confirm Settings dialog box and then to the Installation Type dialog
box.
Installation instructions
249
Figure 5-19 Installation Type dialog box
NOTE The components of a Typical Installation might vary from product to product.
Clicking Typical Installation (Recommended) and then clicking Next, takes you to the Printer
Name dialog box.
Clicking Minimum Installation and then clicking Next takes you to the Printer Name dialog box.
NOTE The Minimum Installation option installs only those components necessary for basic
printing. It will become available after product release.
Clicking Custom Installation and then clicking Next, opens the Features dialog box.
Windows installation
250
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-20 Features dialog box
A red X in the icon indicates that the feature is not installed. The installed icon appears when you
select an installation state for that feature.
NOTE As shown in this screen shot, the PCL 5 driver is not an available option in this
installation program. HP PCL 5 drivers must be installed using the Add Printer wizard.
Clicking the Space button opens the Disk Space Requirements dialog box, which shows the
amount of available space on your hard drive and advises you if there is not enough space for the
features you have selected.
Windows installation
Clicking Next opens the Printer Name dialog box.
Installation instructions
251
Figure 5-21 Printer Name dialog box
Selecting the Use this printer as the default printer for Windows-based programs check box
sets the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer as your default printer.
Clicking Next takes you to the Printer Sharing dialog box.
Windows installation
252
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-22 Printer Sharing dialog box
NOTE The Printer Sharing dialog box does not appear if your computer is running
Windows 98 or Windows Me.
Clicking Not shared and then clicking Next takes you to the Printer Location and Comment dialog
box.
Clicking Share as: causes the text box to become active. Typing the share name and then clicking
Next takes you to the Client Driver Support dialog box.
Windows installation
NOTE When you do not share the printer, additional driver support is not available. If you
share the printer on Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
operating systems by selecting Share as, you must type a name. You can also provide
additional print driver support for other operating systems.
Installation instructions
253
Figure 5-23 Client Driver Support dialog box
The Client Driver Support dialog box does not appear if the computer is running Windows 98 or
Windows Me. The Windows 95/98/Me check box allows you to share this printer with Windows 95,
98 or Me systems. When selected, the installation program installs the driver for those systems onto
your computer. When users on those other systems select this shared printer, the correct driver is
downloaded to them.
Clicking Next takes you to the Printer Location and Comment dialog box.
Windows installation
254
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-24 Printer Location and Comment dialog box
In the Location text box, you can type the physical location of the printer. In the Comment text box,
you can type any additional information that might be helpful to users.
Windows installation
Clicking Next takes you to the Ready to Install dialog box.
Installation instructions
255
Figure 5-25 Ready to Install dialog box
Clicking Install starts the installation process.
When installation is complete, the Finish dialog box appears, as shown in the following illustration.
Windows installation
256
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-26 Finish dialog box
Windows installation
Custom Installation
Figure 5-27 Features dialog box, Custom Installation
Installation instructions
257
NOTE The features available in a custom installation might vary from product to product.
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 computers running
a terminal server might not support the HP Toolbox option.
The appearance of the Features dialog box might vary, depending on the product and the
connection type.
The custom installation gives you the option of installing the following components:
■
HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 PCL 6 Driver (for direct-connect and network installations)
■
HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 PS Driver (for direct-connect and network installations)
■
HP Toolbox
■
Screen Fonts
■
Install Notes
■
User Guide
Installing print drivers by using the Add Printer feature
Use the following steps to install the print drivers by using the Add Printer feature of Windows:
1
Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive.
2
Go to the Add a printer feature in Windows.
In Windows XP, click Start on the desktop, and then click Printers and Faxes. The Printers
and Faxes window appears. Click Add a printer. The Add a printer wizard screen appears.
In Windows NT 4.0, Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows 2000, click Start on the desktop,
click Settings, click Printers and then click Add a printer. The Add a printer wizard screen
appears.
3
Use the Add a printer wizard to find and connect to the printer. The print drivers are loaded as a
part of this process.
If your computer is running a 64-bit Windows operating system, you must install the corresponding
64-bit print driver. The 64-bit print drivers are included on the printing-system software CD-ROM. Use
the following steps to install a print driver by using the Add Printer feature.
Windows installation
1
Insert the printing-system software CD in the CD-ROM drive.
2
Click Start on the desktop, click Settings, click Printers and Faxes and then click Add a
printer. The Add a printer wizard screen appears.
3
Use the Add a printer wizard to find and connect to the product. The print drivers are loaded as
a part of this process.
4
Select the Have disk option and navigate to one of the following files on the software CD:
To install the PCL 6 driver, select \<language>\Drivers\(your operating system)\PCL6
\hp24x0p6.inf (or hpc24X0c.inf for Windows 2000,Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003.
258
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
To install the PCL 5e driver, select \<language>\Drivers\(your operating system)\PCL5
\hp24x0p5.inf (or hpc24X0b.inf for Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003.
To install the PS driver, select \<language>\Drivers\(your operating system)\PS\hpb24x0f.inf or
hpb24x0g.inf (or hpc24X0d.inf for Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003)
5
Complete the wizard steps. The print driver will be installed as part of the wizard process.
Installer Customization Wizard for Windows
Administrators can use the Installer Customization Wizard option to customize the HP LaserJet
2410, 2420, and 2430 printer installer by pre-setting the installation options in a response file. To
start the utility, click installer customization wizard on the main menu of the software CD browser.
Using this option, administrators can create a silent (unattended) installer that is customized with any
of the following selections:
■
Language
■
Operating system
■
Print drivers
■
Components
NOTE For detailed information about the Installer Customization Wizard, see the HP Device
Installer Customization Wizard. This document (CUSTOMIZATION_README_ENWW.HTM)
is available on the printing-system software CD in the <language>\MANUALS folder.
Running the installer customization wizard
Running the Installer Customization Wizard produces one installation package and a response file
(RESPONSE.INI) for a single system installation. The installation package might work for multiple
systems that have the same response information, or the RESPONSE.INI file can be edited for
system configuration differences directly in the RESPONSE.INI file. The Installer HP Device Installer
Customization Wizard, available on the printing-system software CD in the <language>\MANUALS
folder, provides the exact text for replacing entries in the RESPONSE.INI file.
To run the installer customization wizard
1
Insert the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer software CD in the CD-ROM drive.
2
In the CD browser main screen, click installer customization wizard.
3
Choose the setup language you wish to use. The installer automatically detects the language
that your computer system uses and presents this selection as the default. Click OK to continue.
You can select another language that is available on the CD by clicking the down arrow in the
drop-down menu.
Windows installation
The Installer Customization Wizard starts automatically. To complete the installation, follow the
instructions in the dialog boxes, as described in the following section.
Dialogs
The Installer Customization Wizard runs from the CD. It can be launched from the CD browser,
depending on product-specific instantiation. It runs separately from MSI with its own interface.
Installation instructions
259
The Choose Setup Language dialog box, the InstallShield Wizard dialog box, and the Preparing
to Install dialog box appear the same as they appear in the standard installer. After these dialog
boxes, the Installer Customization Wizard Welcome dialog box appears.
Figure 5-28 Installer Customization Wizard Welcome dialog box
Clicking Next takes you to the Language dialog box.
Windows installation
260
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-29 Language dialog box
NOTE The customized installer limits all system installations of the product to the language
that is selected in the Language dialog box. The maintenance mode on systems where
installation has been completed by using the customized installer does not provide options for
changing the language. To change the language on a system that used an Installer
Customization Wizard installation, the customized installation must be uninstalled, and a new
product must be installed to restore the option to install other languages.
The language that you selected is installed on users' computers regardless of the language of the
text in the dialog boxes (as specified in the Choose a language dialog box earlier). The Language
dialog box defaults to the language that was selected in the Choose a language dialog box, but any
language (that is available on the CD) can be chosen for the customized installer. The language
choice is recorded in the response file.
Windows installation
Clicking Next takes you to the Printer Port dialog box.
Installation instructions
261
Figure 5-30 Printer Port dialog box
Clicking Queue Name\Path makes a text field available for a Queue entry. Click the Browse button
to navigate to a printer to record the path.
Clicking Local Port and then clicking Next takes you to the Connector Type dialog box, which is
similar to the Connection Type dialog box that appears during a standard installation. However, the
Connector Type dialog box includes all types of local ports regardless of local support. It also
includes all custom network ports that are available on the local system. To use any custom network
port for the customized installer, the port must be created identically on the system where the port
will be used.
Clicking New TCP/IP Port or New IPX Port and then clicking Next takes you to the Specify Printer
dialog box.
Windows installation
262
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-31 Specify Printer dialog box
Clicking IP Address: makes a field available for typing the IP address for the printer. You can only
use numerals in this field. If this option is selected, at least one digit must be typed in the IP Address
field to prevent an error message from appearing, asking for a valid IP address.
Clicking IP Hostname: makes a field available for typing the IP hostname for the printer. You can
use any characters in this field, but an error message appears if spaces are included in the field. If
this option is selected, at least one character must be typed in the IP Hostname field to prevent an
error message from appearing, asking for a valid IP hostname.
Clicking IPX Address: makes a field available for typing the IPX address of the printer.
Clicking Hardware Address: makes a field available for typing the hardware address of the printer. It
accepts any characters but limits the entry to 13 characters.
The Hardware Address: option also creates an option to configure a new port. If you type a
hardware address and click Next in the Specify Printer dialog box with Configure a new IP port
selected, the IP Settings dialog box opens and you can set up the new port.
Windows installation
Clicking any of the options and then clicking Next takes you to either the IP Settings dialog box or
the Model dialog box, depending on your selection.
Installation instructions
263
Figure 5-32 IP Settings dialog box
NOTE The Installer Customization Wizard does not validate that the printer or any of the
printer identification entries actually exists on the network, because the customized installer
can be used on a separate network.
Typing the appropriate information and then clicking Next takes you to the New IPX Port dialog box.
The New IPX Port selection in the Printer Port dialog box behaves the same way that the New TCP/
IP Port selection behaves: the Specify Printer dialog box opens with the same options, each with
the same results.
Windows installation
264
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-33 Model dialog box
After the options in the identification or port setup dialog boxes are completed, the Model dialog box
appears.
The model selection can affect which features are available for the installation. It can also affect
driver defaults, depending on the product-specific instantiation.
Windows installation
Clicking Next takes you to the Features dialog box.
Installation instructions
265
Figure 5-34 Features dialog box
Any combination of features can be selected for the installer, and none depends on any other feature
selection. It is possible to create a custom installer that installs features without including a print driver.
Clicking Next takes you to the Driver Configuration dialog box.
Windows installation
266
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-35 Driver Configuration preconfigure dialog box
It is possible to supply a preconfigured driver in the customized installer if the driver supports it. You
can use the preconfigured driver to place default settings on the printer that is installed. If a driver
that supports this feature is selected in the Features dialog box, the Driver Configuration dialog
box appears.
Clicking Yes, allow me to configure the drivers and then clicking Next opens a list of all printing
preferences and device options for the product.
Windows installation
Clicking No, I don't want to configure the drivers and then clicking Next takes you to the Printer
Name dialog box.
Installation instructions
267
Figure 5-36 Driver Configuration dialog box
Any setting in this dialog box, including those on the Device Settings tab, can be preset before the
printer is installed (subject to the normal driver constraints).
Clicking Next opens either the Preconfigure Printer dialog box for another driver that supports
preconfiguration (if any), or the Printer Name dialog box.
Windows installation
268
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-37 Printer Name dialog box
Use the Printer Name text box to specify a name for the printer. If more than one driver is being
installed, the driver type will be appended to the printer name.
The check box in the Default Printer group box specifies whether this will be the default printer. You
can also choose which driver should be the default driver, if more than one is installed, by using the
Default Driver drop-down menu.
Windows installation
Clicking Next opens the Printer Sharing dialog box.
Installation instructions
269
Figure 5-38 Printer Sharing dialog box
Clicking Share as: opens a field for naming the product as it will appear on the network.
Clicking Next with Not Shared selected takes you to the Printer Location and Comment dialog box.
Clicking Share as: and then clicking Next takes you to the Client Driver Support dialog box.
Windows installation
270
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-39 Client Driver Support dialog box
NOTE This dialog box provides options for selecting OS-specific drivers to add to the
installation to provide for Point and Print driver vending on the system. Either or both optional
drivers can be selected.
Windows installation
Clicking Next takes you to the Printer Location and Comment dialog box.
Installation instructions
271
Figure 5-40 Printer Location and Comment dialog box
Use the Location: text field to type a description of the physical location of the printer. The field is
limited to 241 characters.
Use the Comment: text field to type any other helpful text such as the capabilities of the printer. The
field is limited to 241 characters.
Clicking Next takes you to the Custom Installer Location dialog box.
Windows installation
272
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-41 Custom Installer Location dialog box
NOTE The location for the installer package defaults to the drive that the system user
opened last.
Clicking Change opens the Change Current Destination Folder dialog box to navigate to the drive
that you want.
Clicking Back takes you to the Printer Location and Comment dialog box.
Windows installation
Clicking Install after you have specified a location (or browsed to a location) starts the file copy
process and takes you to the Installing dialog box.
Installation instructions
273
Figure 5-42 Change Current Destination Folder dialog box
NOTE Several files, including system files, are placed at the root of the directory that
appears in the Folder Name field. These files collectively occupy approximately 37 MB on the
directory. Be sure that enough space is available on the directory before continuing.
After you select a location, click OK to return to the Custom Installer Location dialog box. The
location appears in the Folder name field.
Click the New Folder button to create a new folder.
Windows installation
274
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Figure 5-43 Installing dialog box
Windows installation
This dialog box remains on the screen until the install is complete.
Figure 5-44 Finish dialog box
Installation instructions
275
Clicking Finish closes the Finish dialog box and exits the Installer Customization Wizard.
NOTE Depending on the type of installation and the options that you select, you either will or
will not be presented with some additional steps after you click Finish.
Distribution
The installation package is now ready for distribution. It is the same as the package on the CD,
except that it is limited to one language, and it contains the features and options that you selected.
The installation package is run silently so that it requires no user interaction. This installation method
is useful when you want to use the default selections that the installer provides or when you want to
run the installation without being prompted.
You can perform the silent installation in two ways:
■
customized silent installer
■
command-line silent installer
The response file can be renamed, but it must be in the root directory of the installer package. The
name cannot contain spaces; spaces prevent the SETUP.EXE file from passing to the installer
package.
End users cannot customize the command-line silent installer. The silent installer installs only the
printing-system components that are included in the typical Installation. For more information, see
the HP Device Installer Customization Wizard. This document
(CUSTOMIZATION_README_ENWW.HTM) is available on the printing-system software CD in the
<language>\MANUALS folder.
Point and Print installation for Windows 98, Me, NT 4.0, 2000, XP, and Server
2003
Point and Print is a Microsoft term that describes a two-step driver installation process. The first step
is to install a shared driver on a network print server. The second step is to "point" to the print server
from a network client so that the client can use the print driver.
Hewlett-Packard provides drivers that are compatible with the Point and Print feature, but this is a
function of the Microsoft operating systems, not of HP print drivers. Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 drivers from HP are supported only on Intel® X86
processor types. Any other processor types must use Windows NT 4.0 drivers from Microsoft.
To install the print driver on a Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003
server, you must have administrator privileges. To completely install the Windows NT 4.0 print driver
on the Windows NT 4.0 server (or the Windows 2000 print driver on the Windows 2000 server), you
must have administrator privileges on the server. The Windows NT 4.0 Printer .INF file (or the
Windows 2000 Printer .INF file) must contain the same product name as the Windows 98 or
Windows Me printer .INF file.
Windows installation
Point and Print installation of a postscript driver is supported only with a Microsoft Windows 98 or
Windows Me PS driver V4.0 or later.
In a homogenous operating system environment (one in which all of the clients and servers running
the same operating system), the same print-driver version that is vended from the server to the
clients in a Point and Print environment also runs and controls the print queue configuration on the
server.
276
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
However, in a mixed operating system environment (one in which servers and clients might run on
different operating systems), conflicts can occur when client computers run a version of the print
driver that is different from the one on the print server.
With Windows NT 4.0, print drivers are executed in kernel mode. A kernel mode process runs in a
specially privileged part of the operating system that gives the process access to all of the system
resources. Consequently, a misbehaving driver can cause serious system stability problems,
including operating system crashes.
In an effort to increase operating system stability, Microsoft determined that, starting with
Windows 2000 and continuing with all future operating systems, print drivers would run as user-mode
processes. User-mode drivers execute in a protected part of the operating system just like all of the
normal end-user processes and software programs. A user-mode print driver that misbehaves is
capable of crashing only the process in which it is running, and cannot crash the whole operating
system. Because access to critical system resources is restricted, overall operating system stability
is increased.
Setting a default printer
This section applies to the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems.
In Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, and Windows 2000 OSs, click Start, click
Settings, and then click Printers. In Windows XP and Windows Server 2003, click Start, click
Control Panel, click Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional) or Printers and other
hardware devices (Windows XP Home).
2
Right-click the product that you want to set as the default printer.
3
Click Set As Default. A check mark appears next to the menu option.
Windows installation
1
Installation instructions
277
Windows installation
278
5 Installing the Windows printing-system components
Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and
UNIX operating systems
Non-Windows
installation
6
This section provides system requirements and procedures for installing and removing the
HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printing-system software for supported operating systems other
than Windows. It also provides information about font support and system modifications. The
following operating systems are supported:
■
Macintosh
■
Linux
■
UNIX
This chapter contains information about the following topics:
●
System requirements
●
Macintosh
279
Non-Windows
installation
System requirements
The following are system requirements for installing and using the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and
2430 printing-system software on each of the supported operating systems listed below.
Macintosh
The following are the requirements for installing the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer on a
Macintosh system.
■
PowerPC processor
■
Macintosh OS 9.x or later or Mac OS X (10.1 or later)
■
256 MB RAM
■
110 MB available disk space
Linux
For information about Linux support for the product, see the HP Linux Web site:
■
www.hp.com/go/linux.
UNIX
For information about UNIX support for the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer, see the
following Web site:
■
280
www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software
6 Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and UNIX operating systems
Non-Windows
installation
Macintosh
The following sections contain information about using HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printing
software for the Macintosh OS.
Macintosh component descriptions
The product includes the following software for Macintosh computers:
■
PPDs for Mac OS 9.x and Mac OS X (10.1 and later)
■
PDEs for Mac OS X only (10.1 and later)
HP LaserJet PPDs
In Mac OS 9.x, postscript printer definition (PPD) files for the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430
printer are installed to the Printer Descriptions folder, which is in the Extensions folder within the
System folder. In Mac OS X, the PPDs are installed in Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/
Resources:<lang>.lproj, where <lang> is the appropriate localized folder.
PPDs, in combination with the driver, provide access to the product features and allow the computer
to communicate with the product. An installation program for the PPDs is provided on the printingsystem software CD.
For Mac OS 9.x, the Apple LaserWriter 8 driver must be installed to use the PPD file. Use the Apple
LaserWriter 8 driver that came with your Macintosh. For Mac OS X, use Print Center to print.
PDEs
Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs) are code plug-ins (for Mac OS X only, 10.1 and later) that provide
access to product features, such as number of copies, duplexing, and quality settings.
HP Toolbox
The HP Toolbox is a series of Web pages and supporting Windows-based and Macintosh-based
software programs (for Mac OS X only, V10.2 and later). The HP Toolbox provides links to product
status information and enables you to receive alerts for product events.
For more information about the HP Toolbox, see the HP Toolbox section of this guide.
HP Embedded Web Server
Macintosh OS 9.x operating systems support the HP Embedded Web Server (HP EWS). Use the
HP LaserJet Utility to control features that are not available in the driver. Use the HP EWS to perform
the following tasks:
Macintosh
■
Name the product, assign it to a zone on the network, and change product settings.
■
Set a password for the product.
■
From the computer, lock out functions on the control panel to prevent unauthorized access (see
the printing software help).
281
Non-Windows
installation
Install notes
This text file contains important information about product features, instructions for installing the
printing-system software, and technical assistance.
Online help
This HTML-based help system replaces the Apple Guide help system that was provided with Mac
OS 9.x HP products. The help system is in English only, and can be viewed through a browser or in
the Macintosh OS Help Center.
Screen fonts
These screen fonts are available only for Macintosh computers and Macintosh-compatible computers
(Mac OS classic only). Because the screen fonts match your printing fonts, you can see onscreen
how your printed page looks.
Font support
To ensure that you can use all of the installed fonts with the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430
printer, the Macintosh printing system includes the standard 35 screen fonts in 11 families:
■
Avant Garde
■
Helvetica Narrow
■
Times
■
Bookman
■
New Century Schoolbook
■
Zapf Chancery
■
Courier
■
Palatino
■
Zapf Dingbats
■
Helvetica
■
Symbol
The Macintosh printing system also includes the HP 45 XPS font families:
282
■
Clarendon Condensed Bold
■
Symbol
■
Albertus Medium
■
Coronet
■
Times New Roman
■
Antique Olive
■
Courier
6 Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and UNIX operating systems
Univers
■
Arial
■
Garamond
■
Univers Condensed
■
CG Omega
■
Letter Gothic
■
Wingdings
■
CG Times
■
Marigold
Non-Windows
installation
■
The following bitmap screen fonts reside on the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers:
Macintosh
■
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book
■
Helvetica
■
Palatino
■
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book Oblique
■
Helvetica Bold
■
Palatino Bold
■
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi
■
Helvetica Bold Oblique
■
Palatino Bold Italic
■
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Oblique
■
Helvetica Oblique
■
Palatino Italic
■
ITC Bookman Demi
■
Helvetica Narrow
■
Symbol
■
ITC Bookman Demi Italic
■
Helvetica Narrow Bold
■
Times Bold
■
ITC Bookman Light
■
Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique
■
Times Bold Italic
283
Non-Windows
installation
■
ITC Bookman Light Italic
■
Helvetica Narrow Oblique
■
Times Italic
■
Courier
■
New Century Schoolbook Bold
■
Times Roman
■
Courier Bold
■
New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
■
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
■
Courier Bold Oblique
■
New Century Schoolbook Italic
■
ITC Zapf Dingbats
■
Courier Oblique
■
New Century Schoolbook Roman
The following fonts reside on the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers, but can be used by
Macintosh platforms only if you install additional screen fonts. You can either use these screen fonts
directly from the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer software CD or obtain them from
www.hp.com/support/lj2410 for the HP LaserJet 2410 printer, www.hp.com/support/lj2420 for the HP
LaserJet 2420 printer, or www.hp.com/support/lj2430 for the HP LaserJet 2430 printer.
284
■
Albertus Extra Bold
■
CG Times Italic
■
Marigold
■
Albertus Medium
■
Clarendon Condensed Bold
■
Symbol
■
Antique Olive
■
Coronet
■
Times New Roman
■
Antique Olive Bold
■
Courier
■
Times New Roman Bold
■
Antique Olive Italic
■
Courier Bold
6 Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and UNIX operating systems
Macintosh
Times New Roman Bold Italic
■
Arial Courier Bold Oblique
■
Times New Roman Italic
■
Arial Bold
■
Courier Italic
■
Univers Bold
■
Arial Bold Italic
■
Garamond Antiqua
■
Univers Bold Italic
■
Arial Italic
■
Garamond Halbfett
■
Univers Condensed Bold Italic
■
CG Omega
■
Garamond Kursiv
■
Univers Condensed Medium
■
CG Omega Bold
■
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett
■
Univers Condensed Medium Italic
■
CG Omega Bold Italic
■
Letter Gothic
■
Univers Medium
■
CG Omega Italic
■
Letter Gothic Bold
■
Univers Medium Italic
■
CG Times
■
Letter Gothic Italic
■
Univers Italic
■
CG Times Bold
■
CG Times Bold Italic
■
Wingdings
■
CG Times Bold Italic
Non-Windows
installation
■
285
Non-Windows
installation
Installing the Macintosh printing system
On a Macintosh-compatible computer, the installation procedures are the same for a network
administrator, a network client, and a single user. Install the software on any computer that has
access rights to the printer.
NOTE If the computer is connected to the printer by a LocalTalk (printer port) or EtherTalk
connection, you must configure the AppleTalk (or network) control panel for the correct
connection to communicate with the product. You must set up the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420,
and 2430 printer, connect it to the computer or network, and turn it on before the software is
installed. Macintosh OS systems do not support parallel connections. You can use a crossover Ethernet cable for a direct connection to a computer running the Macintosh OS.
The Macintosh partition contains an installer program for each language. Find the appropriate
language for the operating system that is being used, and then use the installer program for that
language.
NOTE Detailed installation steps can be found in Mac OS Classic installation or Mac OS X
installation.
To install the HP LaserJet printing-system software for the Macintosh OS
1
Insert the CD that came with the Macintosh printing-system software into the CD-ROM drive.
NOTE If the CD screen does not open automatically, double-click the hp LaserJet 24X0
CD-ROM icon on the desktop to open the CD-ROM window.
2
Open the HP LaserJet Installers folder. Find the Installer icon for the appropriate language.
Double-click the Installer icon to launch the Installer. In the opening dialog, click Continue.
NOTE The Continue button appears only after you type the "Admin" password in the
Authenticate dialog box (OS X, V10.1 and later only).
3
The main Installer dialog box appears. Click Install and then follow the onscreen instructions to
complete the software installation.
NOTE If you are installing the printing-system software on a Macintosh OS X system,
please be patient. The installer must perform an initial search of the computer for up to 1
minute. During this time the installer might appear to be stalled.
4
When software installation is complete, click Quit. Select one of the following options to finish
setting up your product:
●
Set up an AppleTalk networked printer with Mac OS 9.x
●
Set up a printer with Mac OS X
To set up an AppleTalk networked Printer with Mac OS 9.x
286
1
Open the Chooser from within the Apple Menu.
2
Click LaserWriter 8 on the left side of the Chooser dialog box.
6 Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and UNIX operating systems
Click the appropriate Zone to select it, if required.
4
Click your product name from the list that appears on the right side of the Chooser dialog box,
and then click Create.
Non-Windows
installation
3
To set up a Printer with Mac OS X
1
In the Applications folder, open the Utilities folder, and then run the Print Center.
2
Click Add (in Mac OS X 10.2) or Add Printer (in Mac OS X 10.1).
3
From the top pop-up menu, select the appropriate connection type for your product.
4
Select or type in any other information as indicated for the type of connection for your product.
For example, if you are using an AppleTalk connection, select your product zone; or if you are
using IP Printing, type in an IP address.
NOTE If the automatic selection fails, or if you want to manually select a PPD file, click
the Printer Model pop-up menu, select HP, and then select the PPD file you want to add.
5
Click Add.
6
To configure installable options in Mac OS X 10.2 and later, such as a duplexing unit or optional
paper trays, click the appropriate product icon in the Print Center Printer List window. Select
Show Info from the Printers menu, and then select the appropriate options from the Installable
Options popup menu.
7
Configure the options, and then click Apply Changes.
To set up an IP/LPR networked Printer with Mac OS 9.x
1
Run the Apple Desktop Printer utility.
2
Click Printer (LPR), and then click OK.
3
Click Change in the LPR Printer Selection area.
4
Click the appropriate IP address and Queue, and then click OK.
5
Click Change and scroll through the list of products.
6
Click the correct product, and then click Select.
7
Click Create.
Uninstalling the Macintosh printing system
To uninstall the Macintosh Printing System, drag the PPDs and the unwanted component(s) to Trash.
In-box disk layout
The Macintosh Printing System consists of two files: the HP LaserJet Installer - Integrated installer
program and a Toolbox installer program.
Macintosh
287
Non-Windows
installation
Mac OS Classic installation
This section provides information about the various installation dialog box sequences for the Mac OS
Classic.
Main Install dialog box sequence
This subsection provides information about the Macintosh installation dialog box sequence for the
Easy Install (the typical installation option).
Figure 6-1 HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer splash screen dialog box
Click Continue to open the HP LaserJet Installer dialog box.
Figure 6-2 HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (easy install)
288
6 Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and UNIX operating systems
You can also select the Custom Install option from the drop-down menu at the upper left (shown in
the following illustration). Easy Install is the default.
Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk.
Click Quit to quit the Installer without making changes to the system.
Figure 6-3 HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (custom install)
If you want to install the files in a location other than the default "Macintosh HD," click Install
Location: to specify a location.
Select which of the available components to install by using the check boxes in the list.
Click Read Me to open the Installer readme file.
Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk.
Click Quit to quit the Installer without making any changes to the system.
Figure 6-4 Installing dialog box
This dialog box shows installation progress. No action is required unless you want to stop the
installation. Click Stop to interrupt the installation-file copy process.
Macintosh
289
Non-Windows
installation
If you want to install the files in a location other than the default "Macintosh HD," click Install
Location: to specify a location.
Non-Windows
installation
Figure 6-5 Installation was successful dialog box
Click Quit to exit the Installer. The Printer Setup Assistant opens.
Click Continue to return to the HP LaserJet Installer.
HP LaserJet Screen Fonts Installer dialog box sequence
This section provides information about the installation dialog box sequence for the HP Screen Font
Installer.
Figure 6-6 HP LaserJet Screen Fonts splash screen dialog box
Click Continue to open the HP LaserJet Screen Fonts dialog box.
290
6 Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and UNIX operating systems
Non-Windows
installation
Figure 6-7 HP LaserJet Screen Fonts installer dialog box (1 of 2)
Click Install to start the installation.
Click Quit to quit the Installer without making changes to the system.
When you click Install, an installation progress bar dialog box appears briefly. Click Stop to interrupt
the installation-file copy process.
Figure 6-8 Installation was successful dialog box
Click Quit to exit the Installer.
Click Continue to return to the HP LaserJet Screen Fonts installer.
Mac OS X installation
This section provides information about the various installation dialog box sequences for the Mac OS
X operating system.
Main Install dialog box sequence
This section provides information about the Macintosh installation dialog box sequence for the Easy
Install (the typical installation option).
Figure 6-9 Installer CD-ROM icon
If the CD screen does not open automatically when the CD is put into the CD-ROM drive, doubleclick the hp LaserJet 24X0 CD-ROM icon on the desktop to open the installer folder.
Macintosh
291
Non-Windows
installation
Figure 6-10 hp LaserJet 24X0 folder
In the hp Laserjet 4X50 folder, double click the hp LaserJet Installers folder to open it.
Figure 6-11 hp LaserJet Installers folder
292
6 Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and UNIX operating systems
When you run the installer you might first see the Authenticate dialog box (OS X V10.1 and later
only).
Figure 6-12 Authenticate dialog box
Enter the correct password and click OK to continue. The install splash screen appears.
Figure 6-13 HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer splash screen dialog box
Click Continue. The software License dialog box appears.
Macintosh
293
Non-Windows
installation
In the hp LaserJet Installers folder, double-click the installer icon for the language you want to use.
This begins the install process.
Non-Windows
installation
Figure 6-14 License dialog box
Click Print... to open the Page Setup dialog box for your default printer and print a copy of the
license agreement.
Click Save As... to open the system Save dialog box and save the license agreement to disk.
Click Decline to end the installation process and close the installer.
Click Accept to continue the installation. The hp LaserJet Installer dialog box appears.
294
6 Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and UNIX operating systems
Non-Windows
installation
Figure 6-15 HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (easy install)
If you want to install the files in a location other than the default "Macintosh HD," click the Install
Location drop-down menu to specify a location.
You can also select a Custom Install option from the drop-down menu at upper left (shown in the
following illustration).
Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk.
Click Quit to quit the Installer without making changes to the system.
Figure 6-16 HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (custom install)
Select the install location by using the Install Location drop-down menu (if the desired location is
different from "Macintosh HD").
Macintosh
295
Non-Windows
installation
Select the components that you want to install by using the check boxes in the list.
Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk.
Click Quit to quit the Installer without making any changes to the system.
Figure 6-17 Install verification dialog box
Before the installation begins, a verification screen appears. It verifies what will be installed and lists
the additional steps that will need to be taken to install the product. Click OK to continue.
Figure 6-18 Installing dialog box
This dialog box shows installation progress. No action is required unless you want to stop the
installation. Click Stop to interrupt the installation-file copy process.
When installation is complete, a popup message appears stating that the installation was successful.
Figure 6-19 Installation success message
Click Quit to exit the installer.
Click Continue to return to the HP LaserJet Installer.
296
6 Installation for Macintosh, Linux, and UNIX operating systems
7
Engineering Detail
Engineering Detail
Introduction
This chapter contains information about the following topics:
●
Media attributes
●
HP Toolbox
Media attributes
This section includes the following information about media attributes:
●
Paper sources and destinations
●
Paper-tray configurations
●
Paper-source commands
●
Media types and sizes
Paper sources and destinations
The following table indicates the standard and optional paper sources and destinations for the
HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers:
Table 7-1 HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer paper sources and destinations
Paper sources
Paper destinations
Multipurpose tray (tray 1)
Standard
250-sheet paper tray (tray 2)
Standard
500-sheet paper tray (tray 3)
Optional
main output bin
Standard
Paper-tray configurations
The HP LaserJet 2410 and the HP LaserJet 2420 printer models come with a 100-sheet standard
multipurpose tray (tray 1) and a 250-sheet paper tray (tray 2). The HP LaserJet 2430 printer models
come with an additional 500-sheet paper tray (tray 3).
The following table indicates the possible paper tray configurations for the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420,
and 2430 printers:
Introduction
297
Table 7-2 Media tray configurations for the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printer
Product
Tray number
Tray type
Standard/optional
HP LaserJet 2410 printer
Tray 1
Multipurpose tray
Standard
Tray 2
250-sheet tray
Standard
Tray 3
500-sheet tray
Optional
Tray 1
Multipurpose tray
Standard
Tray 2
250-sheet tray
Standard
Tray 3
500-sheet tray
Optional
Tray 1
Multipurpose tray
Standard
Tray 2
250-sheet tray
Standard
Tray 3
500-sheet tray
Optional
Tray 1
Multipurpose tray
Standard
Tray 2
250-sheet tray
Standard
Tray 3
500-sheet tray
Optional
Tray 1
Multipurpose tray
Standard
Tray 2
250-sheet tray
Standard
Tray 3
500-sheet tray
Optional
Tray 1
Multipurpose tray
Standard
Tray 2
250-sheet tray
Standard
Tray 3
500-sheet tray
Standard
Tray 1
Multipurpose tray
Standard
Tray 2
250-sheet tray
Standard
Tray 3
500-sheet tray
Standard
Tray 1
Multipurpose tray
Standard
Tray 2
250-sheet tray
Standard
Tray 3
500-sheet tray
Standard
HP LaserJet 2420 printer
Engineering Detail
HP LaserJet 2420d printer
HP LaserJet 2420n printer
HP LaserJet 2420dn printer
HP LaserJet 2430t printer
HP LaserJet 2430tn printer
HP LaserJet 2430dtn printer
NOTE A duplexing unit is standard for the HP LaserJet 2420d, 2420dn, and 2430dtn printers.
Paper-source commands
The PCL 6 attribute for paper source is ubyte # MediaSource or ubyte_array "string"
MediaSource. See the following table for values of #. For example, "ubyte 4 MediaSource" is the
command for tray 2.
298
7
Engineering Detail
The PCL 5 escape sequence for paper source is Esc&l#H (the "l" is a lowercase "L" rather than the
numeral "1"). See the following table for values of #. For example, Esc&l5H is the command for tray 3.
The PostScript command for paper source is /MediaPosition # /ManualFeed true | false.
Table 7-3 Paper-source commands
PCL 6
PCL 5
PostScript
ubyte # MediaSource
or ubyte_array "string"
Esc&l#H
/MediaPosition # /
ManualFeed true | false
or null
Tray 1
3
4
3
Tray 2 (250-sheet)
4
1
0
Tray 3 (500-sheet)2
5
5
1
Auto Select
1
7
null
Manual feed in tray 1
2
2
3
MediaSource1
Engineering Detail
Paper source
For the string value, you must use include the quotation marks around the variable. For example, ubyte_array "TRAY5"
MediaSource is the PCL 6 command for Tray 5.
Tray 3 is optional for the 2410 and 2420 model printers.
1
2
Media types and sizes
The tables in this section provide information about media features, media attributes, and paperhandling constraints for the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and 2430 printers.
Driver features and attributes
The following table lists the features and attributes of various media listed under the Size Is: dropdown menu on the Paper tab. The list order for the drop-down menu can vary, depending on the
product and operating system. The list contains all of the following sizes, and might contain sizes
from other drivers.
Table 7-4 Supported features and attributes by driver
Paper sizes1
Width
Height
PCL 6 2
Letter
216 mm
279 mm
"Letter"
(8.5 inches)
(11.0 inches)
197 mm
273 mm
(7.75 inches)
(10.75 inches)
216 mm
330 mm
(8.5 inches)
(13 inches)
210 mm
297 mm
(8.27 inches)
(11.69 inches)
148 mm
210 mm
16K
8.5 x 13
A4
A5
Media attributes
"16K"
"8.5x13"
"A4"
"A5"
299
Table 7-4 Supported features and attributes by driver (continued)
Paper sizes1
B5 (JIS)
Double Japan Postcard
Rotated
Envelope #10
Engineering Detail
Envelope B5
Envelope C5
Envelope DL
Envelope Monarch
Executive
Executive (JIS)
Legal
Statement
Custom
1
2
3
300
Width
Height
(5.83 inches)
(8.27 inches)
182 mm
257 mm
(7.17 inches)
(10.12 inches)
148 mm
200 mm
(5.83 inches)
(7.87 inches)
105 mm
241 mm
(4.13 inches)
(9.5 inches)
176 mm
250 mm
(6.93 inches)
(9.84 inches)
162 mm
229 mm
(6.38 inches)
(9.02 inches)
110 mm
220 mm
(4.33 inches)
(8.66 inches)
99 mm
190 mm
(3.88 inches)
(7.5 inches)
185 mm
266 mm
(7.25 inches)
(10.5 inches)
216 mm
330 mm
(8.5 inches)
(12.99 inches)
216 mm
355 mm
(8.5 inches)
(14.0 inches)
215.9 mm
139.7 mm
(8.5 inches)
(5.5 inches)
Minimum:
Minimum:
76.2 mm
127 mm
(3.0 inches)
(5.0 inches)
Maximum:
Maximum:
215.9 mm
355.6 mm
(8.5 inches)
(14.0 inches)
PCL 6 2
"B5 (JIS)"
“Double Japan Postcard
Rotated”
"Envelope #10"
"Envelope B5"
"Envelope C5"
"Envelope DL"
"Envelope Monarch"
"Executive"
"Executive (JIS)"
"Legal"
"Statement"
3
For all paper sizes, the PCL 6 margins are 100 dots at 600 dots-per-inch.
The PCL 6 command for paper size is ubyte_array “String” MediaSize. The values in this column are the values for "String."
For custom sizes, the PCL 6 Driver specifies actual dimensions (for example, for 8 by 9 inch custom size, "real32_xy 8.0
9.0 CustomMediaSize ubyte eInch CustomMediaSizeUnits").
7
Engineering Detail
Media types
(command string)
Tray 1
Tray 2 (250-sheet)
Tray 3 (500-sheet)
Duplexing unit
Manual duplex
Plain
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Preprinted
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Letterhead
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Transparency
Y
N
N
N
N
Prepunched
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Labels
Y
N
N
N
N
Bond
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Recycled
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Color
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Cardstock1
Y
N
N
N
Y
Envelope
Y
N
N
N
N
Light2
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Rough
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
Engineering Detail
Table 7-5 Supported input media types
Tray 1 accepts cardstock between 164 g/m2 (45 lb.) and 200 g/m2 (53 lb.).
Light paper is between 60 g/m2 (16 lb.) and 75 g/m2 (20 lb.).
2
Custom paper size support
The following table shows custom paper sizes that are available for the HP LaserJet 2410, 2420, and
2430 printer:
Table 7-6 Custom paper size support
Tray
Dimensions
Minimum
Maximum
Tray 1 (multipurpose)
Width
76.2 mm (3 inches)
215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
Height
127.0 mm (5 inches)
355.6 mm (14 inches)
Width
Custom sizes not supported
Custom sizes not supported
Height
Custom sizes not supported
Custom sizes not supported
Width
Custom sizes not supported
Custom sizes not supported
Height
Custom sizes not supported
Custom sizes not supported
Width
Custom sizes not supported
Custom sizes not supported
Height
Custom sizes not supported
Custom sizes not supported
Tray 2 (250-sheet)
Tray 3 (500-sheet)
Duplexing unit
Media attributes
301
Media-type commands
The PCL 5e escape sequence for media type is "Esc&n#Wdpapertype", where "n#" is the number of
characters in the paper type plus 1. For example, in the sequence "Esc&n6WdPlain", "Plain" has 5
letters plus 1, for a total of 6.
Table 7-7 Media-type commands
Engineering Detail
1
2
302
Esc&
n#
Wd
Paper type
Esc&
6
Wd
Plain
Esc&
11
Wd
Preprinted
Esc&
11
Wd
Letterhead
Esc&
13
Wd
Transparency1
Esc&
11
Wd
Prepunched
Esc&
7
Wd
Labels
Esc&
5
Wd
Bond
Esc&
9
Wd
Recycled
Esc&
6
Wd
Color
Esc&
11
Wd
Cardstock2
Esc&
7
Wd
Rough
Esc&
9
Wd
Envelope
Esc&
6
Wd
Light
You must spell out the word "Transparency" in the string, although it is abbreviated as TRNSPRNCY on the control panel.
The correct command for cardstock is "Esc&n11WdCard Stock", with a space between the "d" and the "S", and with an
uppercase "S".
7
Engineering Detail
HP Toolbox
This section presents engineering detail for the following topics:
■
Enabling or disabling HP Toolbox support
■
Manually uninstalling HP Toolbox in Macintosh Operating Systems
The registry entry HKLM\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Run, with the value
HP Status controls the HP Toolbox. This entry runs HPSTATUS.EXE every time that the system is
started. When you close the HP Toolbox by right-clicking the Toolbox tray icon and selecting Exit,
you are prompted to restart the HP Toolbox on startup. If you select No, don't start automatically,
this entry is removed.
To start status manually, select the Start|Run menu, and type HPSTATUS.
Manually uninstalling HP Toolbox in Macintosh Operating Systems
HP Toolbox must be uninstalled manually in a Macintosh OS. To uninstall HP Toolbox manually,
follow these instructions:
1
Delete the following program:
Library/Startup Items/hp ToolboxStartup
NOTE HP Toolbox cannot be uninstalled when it is in use. Because HP Toolbox runs at
startup time, either quit the program before deleting it, or move it into the trash bin and
restart the computer.
2
Delete the following file:
Applications/Utilities/hp toolbox.webloc 3
3
HP Toolbox
Navigate to the Library/Printers/hp/Utilities/folder, and delete all files that have "Toolbox" in the
name.
303
Engineering Detail
Enabling or disabling HP Toolbox support
Engineering Detail
304
7
Engineering Detail
Index
Symbols/Numerics
% of Normal Size setting
PCL traditional drivers 109
unidrivers 194
A
About button, PCL traditional
drivers 134
About tab, unidrivers 220
accessibility
documentation 11
driver support 76
accessories, automatic
configuration 10, 25
ADA (Americans with Disabilities
Act) compliance 11
Add Printer installation 258
Add Printer wizard 26
Adobe Acrobat Reader
installing 6
printing PDF files without 66
viewing documentation 10
Adobe Web site 147
Advanced Printing Features
setting, unidrivers 172
Advanced tab
PS Emulation Driver 149
unidrivers 170
Alerts tab, HP Toolbox 50
alerts, e-mail 36, 37
alternative letterhead mode
PCL traditional drivers 144
unidrivers 173
alternative source/paper type
support 82
Americans with Disabilities Act
(ADA) compliance 11
application settings
traditional drivers 87
unidrivers 167
Index
ASCII output protocol, PS
Emulation Driver 162, 216
autorun CD-ROM, Windows 5
B
Back Cover settings
PCL traditional drivers 121, 125
unidrivers 184, 189
Back to Front printing, unidrivers
174
Basics tab, PCL traditional drivers
132
bidirectional communication
about 25
driver support 73
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
26
binary output protocol, PS
Emulation Driver 162, 216
binding settings
PCL traditional drivers 98
unidrivers 201
bins
custom paper sizes 120, 182
driver support 75, 82
black, printing all text as
PCL traditional drivers 104, 107
unidrivers 173
Bluetooth devices 56
booklet printing
PCL traditional drivers settings
99
unidriver settings 202
Bubble help 90
bundle support 74
C
Cable Connection dialog box,
Windows 242
cardstock, paper type commands
302
CD-ROM
documentation 6, 10
in-box file layout 15
installing Macintosh printingsystem software 286
installing Windows printingsystem software 4, 230
regional versions 16
Change Current Destination
Folder dialog box 274
CHM files, viewing 11
Choose Setup Language dialog
box, Windows 234
Client Driver Support dialog box,
Windows
Customization Wizard 271
Typical Installation 254
collation settings
PCL traditional driver mopier
settings 140
PS Emulation Driver 152
unidrivers 171, 219
command-line printing
FTP, Windows 66
local port, Windows 68
LPR 70
Macintosh 69
networks, Windows 69
UNIX 69
Windows 66
command-line silent install for
Windows 276
commands, paper
size 300
source 298
type 302
common installer, features 6
305
Configuration Page, HP
Embedded Web Server 32, 34
Configure Device page, HP
Embedded Web Server 36
Configure tab, PCL traditional
drivers 137
Connection type dialog box,
Windows 241
connectivity
bidirectional communication
support 25
driver support 73
features 3
Network Setup dialog box,
Windows 240
Printer Connection dialog box,
Windows 238
constraint messages
PCL traditional drivers 90
unidrivers 169
context-sensitive help
PCL traditional drivers 90
unidrivers 169
continuous export 29
control panel settings
traditional drivers 87
unidrivers 167
Copy Count settings
PCL traditional drivers 134
PS Emulation Driver 148
unidrivers 171, 219
covers, use different paper settings
PCL traditional drivers 121
unidrivers 184
Ctrl-D settings, PS Emulation
Driver 163, 216
Custom Installation 5, 257
Custom Installation dialog box,
Windows 257
Custom Installer Location dialog
box 273
custom paper sizes, PCL
traditional drivers 117
custom paper sizes, PCL unidrivers
181
custom paper support 301
customer support 33
Customization Wizard 259
306
D
default Print Task Quick Sets
PCL traditional drivers 93
unidrivers 176
default printer, setting 277
deleting Job Storage jobs 210
destinations, paper 297
Device Information page, HP
Embedded Web Server 33, 36
Device Settings tab
PS Emulation Driver 159
unidrivers 210
Device Status page, HP
Embedded Web Server 33
dialog boxes, printing-system
software installation
Mac OS Classic 288
Mac OS X 291
Windows, Typical 231
DIMMs, fonts
PCL traditional driver settings
142
unidriver settings 214
directory structure, software CDROM 15
disabling
driver features 29
HP Toolbox 303
disk space requirements
Macintosh and Linux 280
Windows 223
Document Options
PCL traditional drivers 95
unidrivers 172
Document Options, PS Emulation
Driver 150
documentation
Help feature support 76
install notes 12
Print Task Quick Set for use
guide, PCL traditional drivers
95
Print Task Quick Set for use
guide, unidrivers 179
viewing 6, 10
Documentation tab, HP Toolbox
51
double-sided printing
PCL traditional driver settings
96
unidriver settings 199
downloading
firmware 57
printing-system software 21
Driver Configuration dialog box,
Customization Wizard 267
Driver Work Space (DWS) 144
drivers
accessibility support 76
accessory configuration 25
Add Printer installation 258
alternative source/paper type
support 82
availability by operating system
22
bidirectional communication
support 73
bins supported 75
bundle support 74
connectivity support 73
continuous export feature 29
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
26
finishing options 83
font support 83
Help feature support 76
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 29, 74
included 7
installable options support 75
job storage support 78
job stream output support 71
job tracking 72
Linux operating systems 10
lockable features 29
Macintosh 9
media supported 299
paper source commands 298
paper supported 77
PJL encoding 72
Point and Print installation 276
Postcript-specific features 84
Print Quality options 102
Print Task Quick Set support
77
PS Emulation Driver features
146
reordering options 79
resizing options 80
resolution 79
settings 87, 167
standalone 21
tray assignment 75
UNIX operating systems 10
user interface support 76
watermarks support 81
duplexing unit
custom paper sizes 120, 182
media supported 301
models including 298
PCL traditional driver settings
96, 139
print modes 96
PS Emulation Driver settings
164
unidriver settings 199, 218
DWS (Driver Work Space) 144
E
e-mail alerts 36, 37
E-mail Server page, HP
Embedded Web Server 36
Economode
PCL traditional drivers 102
PS Emulation Driver settings
152
unidrivers 190
Edit Other Links page, HP
Embedded Web Server 36
Effects tab
PCL traditional drivers 107
unidrivers 191
EIO Jetdirect page, printing 32
embedded Web server. See HP
Embedded Web Server
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
about 26
Novell NetWare operating
systems supported 27
Windows operating systems
supported 26
envelopes, paper type commands
302
escape sequences
paper source 298
paper type 302
euro character 30
event log 32
EWS. See HP Embedded Web
Server
Index
exporting driver parameters 29
External Fonts settings, PCL
unidrivers 213
F
features 2
Features dialog box, Windows
Customization Wizard 266
Typical Installation 251
file layout for software CD-ROM
15
finishing options 83
Finishing tab
PCL traditional drivers 91
unidrivers 197
firmware
determining current level 56
downloading 57
FTP updates, Macintosh 62
FTP updates, Windows 58
HP Web Jetadmin updates 63
LPR command updates 63
Macintosh, updating 62
messages during update 64
troubleshooting updates 65
UNIX updates 61
updating remotely 56
verifying installation 65
Windows network updates 61
Windows, local port update 59
First Page paper settings
PCL traditional drivers 122
unidrivers 186
Fit to Page settings
PCL traditional drivers 108
PS Emulation Driver 152
Flip Pages Up
PCL traditional drivers 98
unidriver settings 201
Font Substitution Table, PS
Emulation Unidriver 212
fonts
configuring for watermarks 112
DIMM settings, PCL traditional
drivers 142
DIMM settings, unidrivers 214
driver support 83
euro character 30
External, PCL unidrivers 213
included 3
Macintosh 282
PS 3 emulation 147
PS Emulation Driver 163, 217
Send TrueType as Bitmap,
PCL traditional drivers 103,
106
Send TrueType as Bitmap,
PCL unidrivers 173
substitution table, PS
Emulation Driver 162
substitution table, PS
Emulation Unidriver 213
TrueType download option 85
Windows 224, 226
Form to Tray Assignment
PS Emulation Driver 161
unidrivers 211
Front Cover settings
PCL traditional drivers 121
unidrivers 184
Front to Back printing, unidrivers
174
FTP command-line printing
Macintosh 69
Windows 66
FTP firmware updates
Macintosh 62
Windows 58
G
Graphic settings
PS Emulation Driver 150
unidrivers 172
Graphic settings, PCL traditional
drivers 105
Graphics Mode, unidrivers 173
gray settings, PS Emulation Driver
152
guides. See documentation
H
heavy paper type commands 302
help
Bubble 90
Macintosh 282
operating systems supported
76
PCL traditional drivers 89
PS Emulation Driver 148
unidrivers 168
307
HP Device Installer Customization
Wizard 13
HP Driver Preconfiguration
documentation 12
downloading 10
driver support 74
operating systems and drivers
supported 29
status, PCL traditional drivers
135
HP Embedded Web Server
about 31, 281
alerts page 36
AutoSend page 36
Configuration Page 34
Configure Device page 36
Device Information page 33, 36
Device Status page 33
documentation 13
E-mail Server page 36
HP Toolbox, linking to 52
HP Web Jetadmin 31
Information tab 32
language, setting 36
links 33, 36
navigation 32
Networking tab 39
Security page 36, 38
Settings tab 35
time settings 36
user guide 31
HP Instant Support 33
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
13
HP Jetdirect page, printing 32
HP LaserJet Screen Font Installer
290
HP LaserJet Utility
firmware updates 62
printing print-ready files 70
HP Network Registry Agent
(HPNRA) 26
HP PCL traditional drivers. See
PCL traditional drivers
HP PCL unidrivers. See PCL
unidrivers
HP PS 3 Emulation Unidriver. See
PS Emulation Unidriver
HP Software License Agreement
dialog box, Windows 237
308
HP Toolbox
about 41
Alerts tab 50
bidirectional communication 26
disabling 303
Documentation tab 51
Embedded Web Server, linking
to 52
frame 43
installing 42
Other Links 53
Status tab 43
system requirements 41
top banner 43
Troubleshooting tab 45
uninstalling manually on
Macintosh 303
viewing 42
HP Traditional Postscript 3
Emulation Driver. See PS
Emulation Driver
HP Web Jetadmin
about 54
downloading 6
Driver Configuration Plugin 28
firmware updates 63
HP Embedded Web Server 31
operating systems supported
55
HPNRA (HP Network Registry
Agent) 26
HTML files, viewing 11
I
IBM operating systems, supported
24
Identify Printer dialog box,
Windows 245
Ignore Application Collation
settings, PCL traditional drivers
140
inches, settings 121
Include types in application source
list option in drivers 144
Incompatible Print Settings
messages. See constraint
messages
Information tab, HP Embedded
Web Server 32
input trays. See trays
install notes 12
Installable Options
PS Emulation Driver 164
PS Emulation Unidriver 217
installation
Add Printer 258
Adobe Acrobat Reader 6
command-line silent 276
custom option 257
dialog boxes, Mac OS Classic
288
dialog boxes, Mac OS X 291
dialog boxes, Windows 231
Installer Customization Wizard
for Windows 259
Macintosh printing-system
software 286
Point and Print 276
system requirements for
Macintosh and Linux
operating systems 280
system requirements for
Windows operating systems
223
Windows printing-system
software 230
Installation Type dialog box,
Windows 250
installers
availability by operating system
22
common, features 6
customizing 259
Screen Fonts, Macintosh 290
Instant Support 33
IP address, locating 32
IP Settings dialog box,
Customization Wizard 264
J
Jetadmin. See HP Web Jetadmin
Job Storage
enabling in PCL traditional
drivers 142
operating systems supported
78
PCL traditional drivers 127
PS Emulation Driver 154
unidriver settings 205, 218
job stream output support 71
Job Timeout settings, PS
Emulation Driver 163, 216
job tracking 72
L
landscape orientation settings
PCL traditional drivers 98, 134
unidrivers 201, 204
Language dialog box,
Customization Wizard 261
languages
Choose Setup Language
dialog box, Windows 234
HP Embedded Web Server 36
printing-system software 16
letterhead mode
PCL traditional unidrivers 144
unidrivers 173
Levels of Gray, PS Emulation
Driver 152
license agreement dialog box,
Windows 237
light paper 301
links, HP Embedded Web Server
33, 36
Linux operating systems
driver availability 10
system requirements 280
local port command line printing,
Windows 68
localization, software components
16
lockable features, drivers 29
logging in to HP Embedded Web
Server 38
LPR commands
firmware updates 63
printing PDF files 70
M
Macintosh operating systems
command-line printing 66, 69
components, software 281
dialog boxes, Mac OS Classic
printing-system software
installation 288
dialog boxes, Mac OS X
printing-system software
installation 291
Index
directory structure, software
CD-ROM 15
driver versions 9
firmware, updating 62
fonts supported 282
HP Embedded Web Server 281
install notes 282
installing printing-system
software 286
network setup 286, 287
online help 282
PDEs 281
PPDs 281
printing print-ready files with
HP LaserJet Utility 70
Screen Fonts installer 290
setting up products with Mac
OS X 287
supported 24
system requirements 280
uninstalling HP Toolbox 303
uninstalling printing-system
software 287
manuals. See documentation
margins, PCL 6 Driver 300
measurement units 121
media. See paper
memory
installation requirements for
Macintosh and Linux
operating systems 280
installation requirements for
Windows operating systems
223
PCL traditional driver settings
144
PS Emulation Driver settings
162, 165, 215
specifications 2
unidriver settings 218
messages, constraint
PCL traditional drivers 90
unidrivers 169
Microsoft Point and Print
installation 276
millimeters, settings 121
Model dialog box, Windows
Customization Wizard 265
model scripts, UNIX 10
models, features 2
moire effect, handling 104, 106
Mopier settings
PCL traditional drivers 140
PS Emulation Driver 164
unidrivers 218
More Configuration Options, PCL
traditional drivers 142
N
n-up printing, PS Emulation Driver
151
name printer dialog box
Customization Wizard 269
Typical Installation 252
Network Setup dialog box,
Windows 240
Networking tab, HP Embedded
Web Server 39
networks
accessories supported 55
bidirectional communication
support 73
command line printing 69
EIO Jetdirect page, printing 32
features 3
firmware updates 61
HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide 13
Macintosh setup 286, 287
Network protocol dialog box,
Windows 248
Point and Print installation 276
Recommended Network Setup
dialog box, Windows 244
settings 40
Windows printing-system
software installation 231
Novell NetWare operating
systems, Enterprise
AutoConfiguration support 27
NT Forms tab, PCL traditional
drivers 136
number of copies, setting
PCL traditional drivers 134
PS Emulation Driver 148
unidrivers 171, 219
O
online help. See help
operating systems
309
availability of software
components 22
bidirectional communication
support 73
bins supported 75
bundle support 74
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
support 26
font support 83
Help feature support 76
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 74
installable options support 75
job storage support 78
job stream output support 71
job tracking 72
paper supported 77
PJL support 72
Postscript driver support 84
Print Task Quick Set support
77
standalone drivers 21
supported 24
tray assignment 75
user interface support 76
watermarks support 81
Optimizations option, PCL
unidrivers 172
Optional Paper Sources, PCL
traditional drivers 141
ordering supplies 6
orientation settings
PCL traditional drivers 98, 134
PS Emulation Driver 148
unidrivers 201, 204
Other Pages paper settings
PCL traditional drivers 124
unidrivers 187
output bins. See bins
Output Protocol settings, PS
Emulation Driver 162, 216
Output Settings, PCL traditional
drivers 103, 106
P
Page Order settings
PCL traditional drivers 101
unidrivers 174, 203
page orientation settings
PCL traditional drivers 98, 134
310
PS Emulation Driver 148
unidrivers 201, 204
Page Setup tab, PS Emulation
Driver 148
pages per minute 2
Pages per Sheet settings
PCL traditional drivers 100
unidrivers 203
paper
alternative letterhead mode,
PCL traditional drivers 144
alternative letterhead mode,
unidrivers 173
custom sizes, PCL driver
support 301
custom sizes, PCL traditional
driver settings 117
custom sizes, PCL unidriver
settings 181
Include types in application
source list setting 144
margins 300
margins, PCL 6 driver 300
Pages per Sheet settings, PCL
traditional drivers 100
Pages per Sheet settings,
unidrivers 203
Print Document On settings,
PCL traditional drivers 108
Print Document On settings,
unidrivers 193
Print on Both Sides settings,
unidrivers 199
Print on Both Sides, PCL
traditional drivers 96
PS Emulation Driver settings
148
size commands 300
Size is settings, PCL traditional
drivers 115
Size is settings, unidrivers 180
sizes supported 77
source commands 298
Source is settings, PCL
traditional drivers 116
Source is settings, unidrivers
182
sources and destinations 297
tray assignment 75
trays, included 3
type commands 302
Type is settings, PCL
traditional drivers 116
Type is settings, unidrivers 183
types and sizes supported 299
types supported 301
Paper Handling Options, PCL
traditional drivers 139
Paper Options
PCL traditional drivers 115
unidrivers 180
paper trays. See trays
Paper/Output settings
Paper/Output settings 150
unidrivers 171
Paper/Quality tab, unidrivers 174
password, HP Embedded Web
Server 38
PCL documents, printing 33
PCL files, command-line printing
66
PCL traditional drivers
about 8
About button 134
accessing 88
alternative letterhead mode
144
alternative source/paper type
support 82
Basics tab 132
bidirectional communication
support 73
bins supported 75
bundle support 74
Configuration Status 135
Configure tab 137
connectivity support 73
custom paper sizes 301
Document Options 95
Effects tab 107
features 88
finishing options 83
Finishing tab 91
font support 83
Graphic settings 105
Help feature support 76
Help system 89
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 29
Include types in application
source list setting 144
installable options support 75
Job Storage 127
job storage support 78
Job Storage, enabling 142
job stream output support 71
job tracking 72
margins 300
media supported 299
memory settings 144
Mopier Enabled settings 140
More Configuration Options
142
NT Forms tab 136
operating systems supported
22
Optional Paper Sources 141
Output Settings 103, 106
Paper Handling Options 139
Paper Options 115
paper size commands 300
paper source commands 298
paper supported 77
paper type commands 302
PJL encoding 72
preconfiguration support 74
Print Quality Details settings
102, 104
Print Quality group box 102
Print Task Quick Sets 92
Properties tabs 136
reordering options 79
resizing options 80
resolution 79
tray assignment 75
user interface support 76
Watermarks settings 110
watermarks support 81
PCL Unidrivers
features 168
Paper/Quality tab 174
PCL unidrivers
about 8
About tab 220
accessing 168
Advanced tab 170
alternative letterhead mode
173
Index
alternative source/paper type
support 82
bidirectional communication
support 73
bins supported 75
bundle support 74
collation settings 171
connectivity support 73
Copy Count settings 171
custom paper sizes 301
Device Settings tab 210
Document Options 172
document preview image 190
Effects tab 191
External Fonts settings 213
finishing options 83
Finishing tab 197
Font DIMM Installer 214
font support 83
Form to Tray Assignment 211
Graphic settings 172
Graphics Mode 173
Help feature support 76
Help system 168
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 29
Installable Options 217
installable options support 75
Job Storage 205
job storage support 78
job stream output support 71
job tracking 72
media supported 299
Mopier settings 218
operating systems supported
22
orientation settings 204
Paper Options 180
paper size commands 300
paper source commands 298
paper supported 77
paper type commands 302
Paper/Output settings 171
PJL encoding 72
preconfiguration support 74
Print Optimizations option 172
Print Quality group box 190
Print Task Quick Sets 175
Properties tabs 210
reordering options 79
Resizing Options 193
resizing options 80
resolution 79
tray assignment 75
user interface support 76
Watermarks settings 194
watermarks support 81
PDEs (Printer Dialog Extensions)
281
PDF files
command-line printing 66
LPR commands, printing 70
printing using HP Embedded
Web Server 33
viewing 10
Percentage of Normal Size setting
PCL traditional drivers 109
unidrivers 194
PINs, Job Storage
PCL traditional drivers 130
PS Emulation Driver 157
unidrivers 208
PJL encoding 72
Point and Print installation,
Windows printing-system
software 276
port selection dialog box, Windows
Customization Wizard 262
Typical Installation 241
portrait orientation settings
PCL traditional drivers 98, 134
unidrivers 201, 204
PostScript Device settings 162
postscript documents, printing 33
PostScript Options, PS Emulation
Driver 151
Postscript Passthrough 219
Postscript printer description
(PPD) files 281
PPD (postscript printer
description) files 281
Preparing to Install dialog box,
Windows 235
Print All Text as Black
PCL traditional drivers 104, 107
unidrivers 173
Print Document On settings
PCL traditional drivers 108
unidrivers 193
print drivers. See drivers
311
Print Job Management dialog box,
Windows 243
print modes 96
Print on Both Sides
PCL traditional driver settings
96
unidriver settings 199
Print Optimizations option, PCL
unidrivers 172
Print Page Borders settings
PCL traditional drivers 101
unidrivers 203
Print Quality Details, PCL
traditional drivers 102, 104
Print Quality group box, unidrivers
190
Print Task Quick Sets, PCL
traditional drivers
about 92
defaults 93
driver support 77
use guide 95
Print Task Quick Sets, unidrivers
about 175
custom 179
defaults 176
driver support 77
use guide 179
print-ready files
command-line printing 66
printing using HP Embedded
Web Server 33
printing with HP LaserJet
Utility, Macintosh 70
Printer Connection dialog box,
Typical Installation 238
printer control panel settings
traditional drivers 87
unidrivers 167
Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs)
281
Printer Features options, PS
Emulation Driver 152
Printer Location and Comment
dialog box, Windows
Customization Wizard 272
Typical Installation 255
Printer Name dialog box, Windows
Customization Wizard 269
Typical Installation 252
312
Printer Port dialog box,
Customization Wizard 262
Printer Sharing dialog box,
Windows
Customization Wizard 270
Typical Installation 253
printer, setting default 277
printing
command-line 66
double-sided 96, 199
files using HP Embedded Web
Server 33
files with HP LaserJet Utility 70
Private job settings
PCL traditional drivers 130
PS Emulation Driver 156
unidrivers 208
PRN files, printing 33
product support 33
Proof and Hold job settings
PCL traditional drivers 129
PS Emulation Driver 156
unidrivers 207
Properties tab, unidrivers 210
Properties tabs
PCL traditional drivers 136
protocols
configuring 41
PS Emulation Driver 162, 216
PS 3 font emulation 147
PS Emulation Driver
about 8
accessing 146
Advanced tab 149
alternative source/paper type
support 82
bidirectional communication
support 73
bins supported 75
bundle support 74
collation settings 152
connectivity support 73
Ctrl-D settings 163, 216
Device Settings tab 159
Document Options 150
Economode 152
features 84, 146
finishing options 83
Fit to Page 152
font settings 163, 217
font support 83
Form to Tray Assignment 161
Graphic settings 150
help 148
Help feature support 76
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 29
Installable Options 164
installable options support 75
Job Storage 154
job storage support 78
job stream output support 71
job tracking 72
Levels of Gray 152
media supported 299
n-up printing 151
operating systems supported
22
Output Protocol settings 162,
216
Page Setup tab 148
paper source commands 298
paper supported 77
Paper/Output settings 150
PJL encoding 72
PostScript Device settings 162
PostScript Memory settings
162, 215
PostScript Options 151
preconfiguration support 74
Print Quality group box 102
Printer Features options 152
PS 3 font emulation 147
reordering options 79
resizing options 80
resolution 79
timeout settings 163, 216
tray assignment 75
user interface support 76
Watermarks settings 152
watermarks support 81
PS emulation fonts 226
PS Emulation Unidriver
about 8
About tab 220
accessing 168
Advanced tab 170
alternative source/paper type
support 82
bidirectional communication
support 73
bins supported 75
bundle support 74
collation settings 171
connectivity support 73
Copy Count settings 171
Device Settings tab 210
Document Options 172
document preview image 190
Effects tab 191
features 84, 168
finishing options 83
Finishing tab 197
Font DIMM Installer 214
Font Substitution Table 212,
213
font support 83
Form to Tray Assignment 211
Graphic settings 172
Help feature support 76
Help system 168
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 29
Installable Options 217
installable options support 75
Job Storage 205
job storage support 78
job stream output support 71
job tracking 72
media supported 299
Mopier settings 218
operating systems supported
22
orientation settings 204
Paper Options 180
paper source commands 298
paper supported 77
Paper/Output settings 171
Paper/Quality tab 174
PJL encoding 72
preconfiguration support 74
Print Quality group box 190
Print Task Quick Sets 175
Properties tabs 210
reordering options 79
Resizing Options 193
resizing options 80
resolution 79
tray assignment 75
Index
user interface support 76
Watermarks settings 194
watermarks support 81
PS Emulation Unidrivers
alternative letterhead mode
173
PS files, command-line printing 66
Q
quality, print
driver support 79
unidriver settings 190
Quick Sets. See Print Task Quick
Sets
R
Ready to Install dialog box,
Windows 256
Recommended Network Setup
dialog box, Windows 244
regional versions for printingsystem software 16
releasing Job Storage jobs 132,
209
remote firmware updates
about 56
determining current firmware
level 56
downloading 57
FTP, Windows 58
HP Web Jetadmin 63
LPR commands 63
Macintosh 62
messages 64
troubleshooting 65
UNIX 61
verifying installation 65
Windows network 61
Windows, using local port 59
reordering options 79
resizing options, driver support 80
Resizing Options, unidrivers 193
resolution
driver support 79
PCL traditional driver settings
103, 106
unidriver settings 190
RFU. See remote firmware updates
RTF files, viewing 11
S
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) feature
104, 106
Scale to Fit setting
PCL traditional drivers 108
unidrivers 193
Screen Fonts installer, Macintosh
290
screen-readable documentation
11
Security page, HP Embedded
Web Server 36, 38
Select printer dialog box, Window
247
Send Ctrl-D settings, PS
Emulation Driver 163, 216
Send TrueType as Bitmaps
PCL traditional drivers 103, 106
PCL unidrivers 173
serial number 33
Set Network Protocol dialog box,
Windows 248
settings
continuous export 29
locking 29
overriding 87, 167
Print Task Quick Sets,
PCL traditional drivers 92
Print Task Quick Sets,
unidrivers 175
Settings tab, HP Embedded Web
Server 35
shading, configuring for
watermarks 197
sharing setup dialog box, Windows
Customization Wizard 270
Typical Installation 253
silent installation
command-line 276
Customization Wizard 259
sizes, paper
commands 300
custom 301
driver support 77
margins 300
PCL traditional driver settings
115
Print on Both Sides settings,
unidrivers 199
313
Print on Both sides, PCL
traditional drivers 96
PS Emulation Driver settings
148
supported 299
unidriver settings 180
smart duplexing 199
Source is settings
PCL traditional drivers 116
unidrivers 182
sources, paper. See trays
specifications, features 2
Specify Printer dialog box,
Windows 263
speed specifications 2
standalone drivers 21
status
devices 33
supplies 32
Status tab, HP Toolbox 43
storage, job
enabling in PCL traditional
drivers 142
operating systems supported
78
PCL traditional drivers 127
PS Emulation Driver 154
unidriver settings 205, 218
substitution table for fonts, PS
Emulation Driver 162
supplies
AutoSend page, HP
Embedded Web Server 36
features 3
ordering 6
usage AutoSend page 36
viewing status 32
support, product 33
system requirements
Macintosh and Linux 280
Windows 223
T
TBCP output protocol, PS
Emulation Driver 162, 216
TCP/IP address, locating 32
text files, command-line printing
66
text, printing all as black
PCL traditional drivers 104, 107
314
unidriver 173
time settings, HP Embedded Web
Server 36
timeout settings, PS Emulation
Driver 163, 216
Toolbox
about 41
Alerts tab 50
bidirectional communication 26
disabling 303
Documentation tab 51
Embedded Web Server, linking
to 52
frame 43
installing 42
Other Links 53
Status tab 43
system requirements 41
top banner 43
Troubleshooting tab 45
uninstalling manually on
Macintosh 303
viewing 42
traditional drivers. See PCL
traditional drivers; PS Emulation
Driver
transparencies, paper type
commands 302
trays
assignment 75
autoconfiguration 10, 25
configurations 297
custom paper sizes 120, 182
included 3, 297
Installable Options, PS
Emulation Driver 164
media supported 301
paper source commands 298
paper type commands 302
PCL traditional driver settings
141
PS Emulation Driver Form to
Tray Assignment 161
Source is settings, PCL
traditional drivers 116
Source is settings, unidrivers
182
unidriver Form to Tray
Assignment 211
Windows NT configuration 136
troubleshooting firmware updates
65
Troubleshooting tab, HP Toolbox
45
TrueType font settings
PS Emulation Driver 163, 217
Send as Bitmap, PCL
traditional drivers 103, 106
Send as Bitmap, PCL unidrivers
173
substitution table, PS
Emulation Driver 162
two-sided printing
PCL traditional driver settings
96
unidriver settings 199
TXT files, command-line printing
66
types, paper
Include in application source
list setting 144
PCL traditional drivers settings
116
Print on Both Sides settings,
unidrivers 199
Print on Both sides, PCL
traditional drivers 96
supported 301
unidriver settings 183
Typical Installation
choosing 5
dialog boxes, Windows 231
U
unattended installation
command-line 276
Customization Wizard 259
unidrivers
About tab 220
accessing 168
Advanced tab 170
alternative letterhead mode
173
alternative source/paper type
support 82
automatic configuration 26
bidirectional communication
support 73
bins supported 75
bundle support 74
collation settings 171
connectivity support 73
constraint messages 169
Copy Count settings 171
custom paper sizes 301
Device Settings tab 210
Document Options 172
document preview image 190
Effects tab 191
features 168
finishing options 83
Finishing tab 197
Font DIMM Installer 214
font support 83
Form to Tray Assignment 211
Graphic settings 172
Help feature support 76
Help system 168
HP Driver Preconfiguration 29
Installable Options 217
Job Storage 205
job storage support 78
job stream output support 71
job tracking 72
media supported 299
Mopier settings 218
operating systems supported
22
orientation settings 204
Paper Options 180
paper size commands 300
paper supported 77
paper type commands 302
Paper/Output settings 171
Paper/Quality tab 174
PJL encoding 72
preconfiguration support 74
Print Quality group box 190
Print Task Quick Sets 175
reordering options 79
Resizing Options 193
resizing options 80
resolution 79
tray assignment 75
user interface support 76
Watermarks settings 194
watermarks support 81
uninstalling Macintosh printingsystem software 287
units of measurement 121
Index
UNIX operating systems
command-line printing 69
driver availability 10
print-ready printing 69
remote firmware update 61
Update Now feature 10, 26
updating firmware remotely. See
remote firmware update
usage page 33
Use Different Paper/Covers
PCL traditional drivers 121
unidrivers 184
User Guide
Print Task Quick Set, PCL
traditional drivers 95
Print Task Quick Set, unidrivers
179
viewing 11
W
Wait Timeout settings, PS
Emulation Driver 163, 216
Watermarks settings
drivers supported 81
PCL traditional drivers 110
PS Emulation Driver 152
unidrivers 194
Web Jetadmin. See HP Web
Jetadmin
Web sites
Adobe 147
downloading software 21
firmware download 57
HP Driver Preconfiguration 10
HP Embedded Web Server 31
HP Web Jetadmin 55
links, HP Embedded Web
Server 33, 36
links, HP Toolbox 53
Linux product support 280
support links 6
UNIX model scripts 10
Welcome dialog box, Windows
Customization Wizard 260
Typical Installation 236
What's this? Help
PS Emulation Driver 148
unidrivers 169
Windows operating systems
availability of software
components 22
CD-ROM, print system 4
command-line printing 66
command-line printing, local
port 68
command-line printing,
networks 69
custom installation, printingsystem software 257
default printer, setting 277
dialog boxes, Typical Installation
231
directory structure, software
CD-ROM 15
driver versions 8
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
support 26
fonts supported 224
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 29
HP Traditional Postscript 3
Emulation Driver features 146
Installer Customization Wizard
259
installers 22
installing printing software 230
LPR commands 70
NT Forms tab, PCL traditional
drivers 136
PCL traditional drivers features
88
Point and Print installation 276
PS emulation fonts supported
226
remote firmware update 59
supported 24
system requirements 223
unidriver features 168
versions supported 222
wireless devices 56
315
316
© 2004 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, LP
www.hp.com
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement